UBC Theses and Dissertations

UBC Theses Logo

UBC Theses and Dissertations

Minority shareholder's remedies in corporate law Anyadiegwu, Okay Hyacinth 1991-12-31

You don't seem to have a PDF reader installed, try download the pdf

Item Metadata

Download

Media
UBC_1991_A6_4 A59.pdf [ 19.32MB ]
Metadata
JSON: 1.0077765.json
JSON-LD: 1.0077765+ld.json
RDF/XML (Pretty): 1.0077765.xml
RDF/JSON: 1.0077765+rdf.json
Turtle: 1.0077765+rdf-turtle.txt
N-Triples: 1.0077765+rdf-ntriples.txt
Original Record: 1.0077765 +original-record.json
Full Text
1.0077765.txt
Citation
1.0077765.ris

Full Text

MINORITY SHAREHOLDER'SREMEDIES ]N CORPORATE LAW  By OKAY HYACINTH ANYADIEGWU LL.B. (Hons) University of Nigeria, 1987 B . L . (Hons) Nigerian Law School, Lagos, 1988  A THESIS SUBMITTED IN PARTIAL FULFILMENT OF T H E REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF LAWS in T H E FACULTY OF GRADUATE STUDIES (FACULTY OF LAW)  We accept this thesis as conforming to the required standard.  T H E UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA September 1991 Okay Hyacinth Anyadiegwu  In  presenting this  degree at the  thesis in  University of  partial fulfilment of  freely available f o r reference and'study. copying of this thesis f o r scholarly department  or  by  his  or  the  requirements for  British Columbia, I agree that the  her  I further agree that  permission for extensive  purposes may be granted  representatives.  It  is  an advanced  Library shall make it  by the  understood that  head cf copying  my or  publication of this thesis for financial gain shall not be allowed without my written permission.  (Signature)  Department of The University of British Columbia Vancouver, Canada  Date  DE-6 (2/88)  gig  -  0  9  -  ii  ABSTRACT  Investment in the corporate venture may sometimes be a risky venture for the minority shareholders.  Apart from the business risk of the undertaking, there is also  the risk of disagreement within the corporate organization.  The interests of minority  shareholders has often been made virtually worthless by the machinations of those in control of the corporation.  They are often deprived of any income from the  corporation either in the form of dividends or salary, they are not allowed any effective voice in the business decisions and they are denied any information about corporate affairs. Often, they are eventually eliminated from the corporation at a fraction of the real value of their interests. Conflicts of interests which exist or develop among the shareholders constitute a threat to the success of the venture. In the absence of protective mechanisms, control is in the hands of the holders of the majority of the corporation's voting shares. While remedies do exist in the law for problems which arise unexpectedly, much could be done at the inception of the business venture to reduce the possibility of conflicts of interests arising.  Careful planning in the initial periods of the incorporation of the  corporate organization will do-much to reduce.'the-risk to investors and provide them with a structure for their relationships. However, even detailed planned and constructed contractual mechanisms do not always take care of the wide variety and forms which the suppression of minority interests may take.  The contractual arrangements may be inadequate to take care of  unforeseen future contingencies. Corporate law and the statutory provisions play active role roles here.  By providing the statutory remedies, the law enables minority  shareholders to either prevent the threat or rectify the abuse of corporate power. But  Ill  most of these corporate law remedies are surrounded with procedural requirements and. other technicalities which may diminish their utility as protective weapons available to the minority shareholders. The purpose of this work is to examine the adequacy of the statutory protections available to the minority shareholders vis-a-vis the private contractual mechanisms which also protect their interests.  This study will develop its lines of enquiry by  considering Ihe leading schools of thought in corporate law.  These schools are the  traditional legal view and the economic approach to corporate law.  While the  traditional approach supports state intervention in the corporate affairs either by regulation or the facilitation of shareholder litigation, the economic approach views the corporation as founded on private contract where the role of the state is limited to enforcing contracts entered into by the participants in the intra corporate contract. Notwithstanding the adoption of contractual mechanisms by the shareholders and the development of the economic approach to corporate law with emphasis on the dynamics of the market forces which align the interests of management with that , of shareholders, this study suggests that minority shareholders still need the protection afforded by the statutes,  iv  TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ABSTRACT INTRODUCTION  ii 1  PART ONE CHAPTER 1 THE TRADITIONAL STRUCTUREOF CLOSELY-HELD CORPORATIONS Introduction Definition of Closely-Held Corporations Characteristics of Closely-held Corporations Position of Shareholders in Closely-held Corporations Corporate Squeeze-Out of Minority Shareholders Protecting the Shareholders in a Closely-Held Corporation Conclusion  „ vJ J^ 17 21 25 32  CHAPTER 2 THE TRADITIONAL STRUCTURE OF WIDELY-HELD CORPORATIONS Introduction Separation of Ownership from Control in Widely-Held Corporations 44 Effects of the Berle and Means' Thesis Conclusion CHAPTER 3 ECONOMIC ANALYSIS OF THE CLOSELY AND WIDELY-HELD "CORPORATIONS A Introduction The Traditional (Corporate) Legal Theory The Economic Approach to Corporate Law The Theory of the Firm B. The Economic Structure of Closely-Held Corporatiens Governance and Contractual Monitoring Mechanisms in Closely-Held Corporations -Validity of the Contractual Mechanisms  AQ  ™  53 55 jg  cxxi  Page C. Economic Structure of Widely-Held Corporations Separation of Ownership from Control and Agency Problems in the Widely-Held Corporation Governance Mechanisms in the Widely-Held Corporation (a) Markets for Corporate Control (b) Corporate Executive Performance and Compensation (c) Product Market Competition (d) Capital Structure (e) Markets for Management (f) Corporate Hierarchy and the Board of Directors Conclusion  66 67 70  77  PART T W O CHAPTER 4 THE ROLE OF CORPORATE STATUTES ?fttroduction Role of Corporate Statutes as Standard Form Contracts Traditional Role of Corporate Statutes Classifications of Corporate Law Provisions Mandatory Provisions Presumptive Provisions (c) Permissive Provisions Conclusion  81 82 85 89  93  CHAPTER 5 THE ARGUMENT FOR MAKING STATUTORY MINORITY - REMEDIES OPTIONAL Introduction and Outline 95 Arguments for Optional Statutory Remedies •• ' 9 7 (a) Freedom of Contract Argument (b) Organizational Costs of Judicial and Legal . Supervision _ (c) Litigation Costs ; (d) Risk of Strategic and Opportunistic Behaviour (e) Lack of Judicial Expertise in Corporate MatteiS (f) Problems of Generality and States (g) Efficacy of the Market Forces as Adequate Constraintson Corporate Management Justifications for Mandatory Statutory Remedies 105 (a) High Transaction Costs of Drafting (b) Imperfect Information '(c) Imperfections of the Market orces as Effective Constraints (d) Benefits of Ixgal and Judicia* Enforcement of the Statutory Provisions Conclusion 111  vi  PART THREE  Page  CHAPTER 6 ECONOMIC ANALYSIS OF SELECTED STATUTORY MINORITY SHAREHOLDERS' REMEDIES Introduction and Outline A The Oppression Remedy (a) General Overview of the Remedy (b) Economic Analysis and the Oppression Remedy (c) Inter-relationship of the Remedy and the Corporate Structure (d) Conclusion B  The Derivative Action (a) General Overview (b) Economic Analysis of the Derivative Action (c) Derivative Remedy and .the Corporate Structure (d) Conclusion  C  The Appraisal Remedy (a) General Overview (b) Economic Analysis of the Appraisal Remedy (c) Appraisal Remedy and the Corporate Structure (i) Modern Capital Theory and the Investment Portfolio Diversification Theory (ii) Widely-Held Corporations (iii) Closely-Held Corporations (d) Conclusion  D  Just and Equitable Winding-up (a) Nature of the Remedy .(b) Winding-Up and the Corporate Structure (i) The Closely-Held Corporation (ii) The Widely-Held Corporation (c) Conclusion  115 118 120 123 128 129 130 135 138  ~ •  ""  140 142 146 146 147 149 150 "151; 152 152 155 157 —-  CHAPTER 7 THE ADEQUACY OF THE SELECTED STATUTORY MINORITY SHAREHOLDERS'REMEDIES Introduction  159  vii  Page A  B  C  D  The Oppression Remedy (i) History of the Oppression Remedy in Canada (ii) Essence of the Remedy (iii) The Statutory Provisions (iv) EtoxBdial Issues Relating to the Remedy (v) Judicial Response to the Remedy (vi) Relationship of the OppressionRemedy with other Remedies (vii) Summary  160 164 166 168 175 182 185  The Statutory Derivative Action (i) Outline and Introduction (ii) Common Law Position (iii) Position in the United States (iv) Statutory Reforms in Canada (v) Procedural Requirements and Judicial Response (vi) The Derivative Action and Special Litigation Committees (vii) Costs and Indemnity  186 187 190 194 198 207 211  The Appraisal Remedy (i) Introduction ' (ii) Origin and Rationale of the Remedy (iii) The Statutory Provisions (iv) Adequacy of the Remedy in Canadian Corporate Law 218 (v) Exclusiveness of the Appraisal Remedy (vi) Conclusion The Just and Equitable Winding-Up (i) Circumstances Justifying Winding-Up • (ii)  CONCLUSION BIBLIOGRAPHY  Adequacy of the Remedy -  212 214 216 226 231 ~  231 - 232 238  " _  240 243  INTRODUCTION  The corporation is one of the most successful inventions in history and this is evident by its widespread adoption and survival as a primary vehicle of capitalism over the past century.  It provides the forum for the complex economic transactions which  take place among the participants in the corporate organization.  These participants  include the management team represented by the board of directors and senior managers;  employees:  suppliers and investors (comprising the creditors and the  shareholders). The relationship which exists among these actors in the corporate setting presents an interesting picture because each group struggles to realize its expectations and objectives which often times conflict with the interest of another group.  The  creditors' and suppliers' interests are to ensure that the capital of the corporation is not diminished either by the payment of dividends if the Corporation by so doing, would be unable to meet its debts as ihey fall due or by engaging in unauthorised reduction cf capital to their detriment.  The shareholders' interest basically consists in the first  place, that the corporation should be made to earn the maximum profit compatible with a reasonable degree of risk.  Secondly, a "proportion of these_profits should be  distributed whenever the best interests of the business permit while the corporation at the same time, retains a proportion of the profits to ensure an increase in share value. Thirdly, nothing should happen to impair his right to receive his equitable share of the profits which are distributed and finally that his shares should, (in the case of the widely-held corporation) remain freely marketable at a fair price. The interests of the management are not easily discernible.  Is the management likely to want to run the  corporation to produce the maximum profit at the minimum risk? Is it likely to want to  2  distribute those profits generously and equitably among the shareholders? Is it likely to want to maintain market conditions-favourable to the investors?  Their interests are  varied but included in their objectives are monetary compensation and the desire for personal power and prestige with its attendant desire for security of position.  The  management may even engage in self-opportunistic conduct and take to excessive leisure to the detriment of the investors.  This situation is more predominant in the  widely-held corporation' where the management team is usually appointed and have little Or no stake t y way of investment in the corporation. Even in the closely-held 2 corporations where there is manifest duality of ownership and control, there is evidence from case law of directors engaging in conduct which is inconsistent and detrimental ts the other shareholders. 3  Within the class of shareholders, problems and conflicts of  interests may often arise as the majority shareholders may use their voting power in an oppressive and fraudulent manner to achieve their aim, without any consideration of the plight of the minority. The employees' interests may be identified as ensuring that the corporation continues as a going concern on a profitable basis, thereby making it possible for the continuous payment of salaries and wages.  Secondly, that favourable conditions for  prospect of rise and promotion on the j o b exists.  Many participants-protect their  The concepts of the widely-held corporation and separation of ownership from control is discussed in Chapter Two. The meaning and characteristics of the closely-held corpoiation is discussed hereunder. For example, in Nolan v. Parsons [1942] O.R. 358 (C.A.) the corporation had five shareholders. Four of them were directors, thefifth,who was the plaintiff, was not. In each of the years 1939 and 1940, the corporation had profits before the disputed payments in the neighbourhood of $20,000 and in each year the defendants voted and caused the corporation to pay to each of themselves director's fees of $2,000. At this time the defendants had apparently been seeking without success to purchase the plaintiffs shares "at a bargain price". The plaintiff sued to recover the director's fees for the corporation. He succeeded at the trial and on appeal.. Mastet'j, A, held that "the time, attention and services of the individual appellants as.directors . . . was wholly incommensurate with the fees which they appropriated to themselves" and that the defendants' action was "fraudulently oppressive . . . as against the plaintiff. Id. ut 342. See also National Building Maintenance Ltd. v. Dove [1972] 5 W. W. R.410 (B.C.C.A.).  i v n q n . ri i i n u u u u u o 'iu  '  interests by contractual agreements which define and regulate the conduct of each party.  The position of the creditors is often secured by the debenture deeds which  contain clauses restricting and sometimes prohibiting the corporation from certain acts considered detrimental to their interests and which also ensures security against property. This contractual protection is in addition to statutory protection accorded to them by certain sections of the Corporations' Act. 4 Employees are protected by their contracts of employment and union contracts. Shareholders are not in the same position with the other participants since they have different interests from that of the other participants they assume a contractual relationship quite distinct from that, entered into by the other participants in the corporation.  They are considered the residual claimants to the corporation's assets  because they reap the benefits of the corporation if it is successful and bear the burden if it fails. For this reason, their position merits special consideration. In jurisdictions where the process of incorporation involves the filing of the Articles and Memorandum of Association, the shareholders enter into agreement inter se and with the corporation and this is reflected in the Articles and Memorandum of Association!'  The articles  regulate the internal affairs of the corporation and define the scope of management powers vis-a-vis the corporation and the shareholders. In addition, in the closely-held For example, S.258 British Columbia Company's Act 1985, S.42 Canada Corporations Business ActM89. "' For example, Section 13 of the British Columbia Companies Act 1985 provides that "subject to this Act, the Memorandum and Articles, when registered, bind the company and its matters to the same extent as if each had been signed and sealed by Hie company and by every member and contained covenants on the part of every member, his heirs, executors and administrators to observe the Memorandum and Articles". A "member" is defined in Section 1 of the sama Act to include a subscriber of the Memorandum of the company and every other .person who agrees tu become a member of the company and whose name is entered in its register of members or a branch register of members. This definition invariably includ' te class of shareholders. For judicial decision on the effect of the Memorandum and Artie';:'; Association, see, Hickman v. Kent or Romney Marsh Sheepbrecders Assoc, [1915] 1 Ch. 881 - An Article providing for a reference to arbitration of disputes between members and the company was held to be contractually binding.  corporations, the members often device contractual mechanisms such as the shareholders' agreement which define and regulate the conduct of the management and other members of the corporation. In the widely-held corporation, there has been in recent times, emphasis on contractual mechanisms which exist within and outside the corporation and serve as protective devices. Corporate law statutory provisions afford protection to the shareholders by providing them with remedies against management abuse of power.  Similarly, the  minority shareholders are enabled under the remedies provided ty tlie statutes to seek the enforcement of the remedies against the majority shareholders where the latter's conduct unfairly prejudice or affect the former. However, most of these corporate law remedies are surrounded with procedural requirements and other technicalities which may diminish their utility and efficiency as protective weapons available to the minority shareholders. The aim of this work is therefore to examine the adequacy of the statutory protections available to the shareholders in the modem corporation. Ways of reducing the technical and procedural impairments in the remedies provided ty the statutes are desirables for adequate protection of Ihe shareholders. Notwithstanding the adoption of contractual mechanisms by the shareholders of small corporations as protective devices against management misconduct and tlie development of the economic approach to corporate law with emphasis on the dynamics of the market forces which align the interests of management of all corporations with that of the shareholders; it is the thesis of this work that shareholders still need the protection afforded ty the statutes. For one, the utility of most contractual mechanisms in the coiporation is impaired because of the inherent inability of the human mind to foresee every future contingency.  Secondly, the market forces do not work without costs and may be  inadequate to dsal with one time divergence or other corporate management misconduct.  "  1  v  ? ••-jSj-T--I?-""--."  '-t^i'-  The smaller corporations often represent the life time work of the members and constitute a major part of their investments. If the business does not serve their needs adequately, the result may amount to a virtual loss of all sources of income. Similarly, if shareholders of the widely-held corporations are not ensured of adequate protection of their investment interests then shareholding in the widely-held corporation as a form of economic investment may generally decline with the consequent negative effects on the economies of most jurisdictions:  In essence, the purpose of this work is to  contribute to the fashioning of an improved and realistic means of protecting the shareholders in the corporation.  In the course of the discussion, the contractual  mechanisms which enable the shareholders of small corporations to evolve a corporate structure that takes care of areas likely to give rise to disputes in the course of the operation of the enterprise shali be examined, hi larger corporations, the impact of extra-legal market forces on shareholder protection shall be considered. The thesis will develop its lines of argument by considering ths leading schools of thought in corporate law.  These schools are the traditional (corporate) legal view  and the economic approach to corporate law.  The traditional corporate legal theory  views the corporation essentially as a legal fiction which comes into existence t y virtue of a grant from the State  This view holds that a corporation is a distinct legal entity  different from the members who constitute it and can only exercise those powers conferred-on it t y its charter of-incorporation. ThisJraditional view of the corporation known as "the concession or entity theory" which has long dominated corporate legal thinking and scholarshipdates back to the early nineteenth century and has held sway in many corporate law jurisdictions. 6 ®  For example, the United States; this theory was exemplified by Chief Justice Marshall's description of the corporation when he stated that "a corporation is an artificial being, invisible, intangible and existing only in contemplation of law. Being the mere creature .of law, it possesses only those properties which the charter of its creation confers upon it, either expressly., or as incidental to its very existence". Trustees of Darthmouth College v. Woodward [1810] 17 U.S. (4 Wheat.) 518, 636. In Britain, the House of Lords expressed a similar view in Salomon\. Salomon & Co. 11897J A.C. 22. III  »  SMltM  / ' n n n n  nL u u u u ' u t'  '  n J  In the late 70's and early 80's, a new thinking in corporate law evolved which in essence sought to explain the benefits of carrying out economic activities through the firm rather than the market. This movement stressed the economic reality behind the corporate organization and applied economic tools to the understanding of corporate law. The starting point of these corporate law scholars was to explain how, if at all, economic activity can be efficiently carried out by means of the firm rather than by simply contracting in the market. A range of answers were given to this question, most being complimentary and they all started with the economic theory of the firm put forward by Coase. 7  He pointed out that the firm and trading in the market were  essentially devices for co-ordinating economic activity with the  distinguishing  characteristics of the firm being the suppression of the price mechanism within its area of activity.  For him, the principal justification for the use of the firm was that it  avoided or substantially reduced the transaction costs of using the market to effect an exchange. Within the last two decades, the economic theory of the firm advanced from a struggle with the identification of the economic conditions that led to the formation of firms to a discourse on more sophisticated issues concerning intra firm relationships. This period saw the emergence of a group of economic-oriented corporate law-scholars called the "contractarians" 8 who challenge the orthodoxy of the traditional legal view of the corporation as a mere concession from the State.  While the concession/entity  theory of the corporation supports state intervention in the form of either direct  Coase, "The Nature of the Firm" (1937) 4 Economics 386. Prominent among the major contributions of this group includc; Alchian & Demsetz, "Production, Information Costs and Economic Organization" (1972) 62 Am. Econ. Rev. 777; Baysinger & Butler, "The Role of Corporate Law in the Theory of the Firm" (1985) 28 J. Law & Econ. 179; Cheung, 'The Contractual Nature of the Firm' (1983) 26 J. Law & Econ. 1; Butler, "The Contractual Theory of the Corporation" (1989) 11 George Mason Univ. L. Rev. 99; Easterbrook & Fischel, "The Corporate Contract" (1989) 89 Col. Law Rev. 1416.  regulation or the facilitation of shareholder litigation in the corporation on the 'oasis that the'state created the corporation-'by granting it a charter, this movement views the corporation as founded on private contract where the role of the state is limited to enforcing contracts entered into t y the participants in the intra corporate contract. Applying an economic approach to corporate law, these corporate law economists viewed the corporation as a complex nexus of contracts among the participants, With this movement came the evolution of the "contractualtheory" of the corporation. They assert that one of the more important reasons why firms arise is to reduce transaction costs and self-interested post contractual behaviour among'persons who otherwise would be engaged in market transactions. They further argue that the essence of the contractual nexus within the corporation is that the participants should be free to mold a corporate form that best maximizes their probable expectations. To them, corporate law provisions should be optimal and not mandatory on the participants who should be free to adopt or opt out of such provisions. A strong basis of the contractarians' view is the recognition of free market forces which they assert, act as effective constraints on corporate management and should therefore play a more significant role in protecting the shareholders against the directors' misconduct. The application of economics to corporate law began in the United States, where it has gained enormous popularity and support. attention in Canada.9  It has also started to attract  However, it has not been expressly adopted in either United  States or Canada although an argument could be made that economic forces shape corporate law in both jurisdictions. In any event, the greatest contribution of c^ I P o r a te law and economics has been the study of the relationships which exist among the participants in the corporate setting. In this study, attention shall be focussed on the 9  See for example, Cheffins, 'An Economic Analysis of the Oppression Remedy: Working Towards More Coherent Picture of Corporate Law' (1990) 40 Univ. of T. Law J. 775; Macintosh, "The Shareholders'Appraisal Right in Canada: A Critical Reappraisal" (1983) 24 Osgoode Hall L. J. 201.  8  examination of the impact of the economic approach to corporate law with emphasis on the market constraints and its effect s on shareholder protection.10 One question which shall also be examined in this study is whether the corporate law rules regulating the conduct of the participants in the corporation should be optional (as the contractariane argue) or mandatory.  Law and economic analysts  support the enforcement of express articulated terms in intra corporate contract but they do not focus solely on express agreements.  They recognize that intra corporate  bargains are not fully articulated because at some point, the cost of setting out a bargain in writing will exceed the benefits. Corporate law then plays an important role here. Consistent with the "expanded choice thesis"," corporate law can act as a standard form of contract that provides the participants with ready made terms. Finally, it is intended in this work to examine how intra corporate disputes should be resolved. Two kinds of corporations shall be distinguished: the closely-held and the widely-held corporations. The former is characterized by a relatively small ic ; That is, to examine whether the free market constraints on corporate management which is one of the postulates of the contractarians have helped to ensure more adequate protection for the shareholders. ^  The "expanded choice thesis" was formulated by Goetz and Scott in their seminal article, "The Limits of Expanded Choice: An Analysis of the Interactions Between Express and Implied Contract Terms', (1985) 73 Col. Law Rev. 261, 262, 265-6. With the aim of defining the extent to which implied and express terms; arid' standardized and individualized forms of agreement function in complementary ways, they assert that complaints about the misinterpretation of an agreement are rooted in tensions between implied and express terms and between standard and non-conventional forms of expressions. A major attempt to harmonize these tensions relies on the expanded choice postulate. The postulate'maintains that implied terms expand contractors' choices by providing standardized and widely suitable preformulations, thus eliminating the cost of negotiating every detail of the proposed arrangement. The postulate presumes a neutral policy toward individualized agreements: atypical parties lose nothing, since they remain unrestrained from designing customized provisions to replace the state-supplied terms, Two kev suppositions underlie the notion of expanded choice; (1) that state-supplied terms are mere facilitators, specifying terms that the parties could formulate themselves if unrestrained by time and effort costs: (2) that the availability of state-supplied terms is neutral in that it raises no barriers beyond the existing resource costs to the use of alternative terms by atypical parties. • Butler has applied this reasoning to corporate law. See, H. Butler, 'The Contractual Theory of the Corporation'(1989) 11 Geo. Mason ULR 99; 119-20.  number of shareholders (usually not more than 50).  This small body of owners  frequently share in the operation and management of the business - there is hardly separation of ownership from control.  Since the shareholders are few in number and  the business is usually quite small and unknown to the general public, there is usually no active market for the purchase and sale of its securities. This type of corporation is also typified by restrictions on the transfer of shares.  The corporate firms that  dominate the economic structure of most countries, however, are the widely-held corporations. Their shareholders number in the thousands or hundreds and most times comprise institutional investors.  In these corporations, the sharenolders are usually  passive stakeholders who do not take part in any sense in the management of the corporation.  There is widespread separation of ownership from control and this  separation phenomenon has become the traditional mode of picturing the fundamental problem of corporate law and economics. 12  It will be advanced that the nature and  structure of the corporation should provide guidance as to how intra corporate disputes shall be resolved.  Legal rules governing internal affairs of the firm should be  supplementary in nature and courts should interpret the provisions in the light of the shareholders' probable expectations. In addition, for the widely-held corporations, free market constraints regulating corporate management should be considered where compliance with statutory - protective remoltfi would cause hardship and entail extreme technicalities on the part of the participants^  12  It should be noted that many corporations do not fit either mold described above. However, the more dominant ones fit into the above analysis and attention will be focused on them in this study. • . .  10  PLAN OF STUDY  The thesis shall be structured into three parts. The first part shall deal with an overview of the traditional concepts of corporate law relating to the modern corporation.  The structures of the closely and widely-held corporations shall be  examined. The position of the shareholders in the closely-held corporationand some of the various techniques t y which the minority shareholders'are frozen out of the corporation shall be examined.  Preventive mechanisms to solve the freeze-out  problems are proposed and the curative remedies provided by corporation law shall be highlighted. In the widely-held corporation, the separation of ownership from control analysis and its consequent implication on shareholder protection shall be discussed. In addition, an economic analysis of both kinds of corporations shall be undertaken in this part. The idea of corporation law as a kind of standard form contract which economizes on negotiation costs between managers and shareholders is a recurrent one in the economic analysis of the corporation.  Corporate law and economic analysts  support the enforcement of express terms in the intracorporate contract but they also recognize that such bargains are not fully articulated because at some point the cost of setting out a bargain in writing will exceed the benefits. Even the market mechanisms which economists see as important constraints on corporate management do not operate without cost and may be unable to deal with one time divergence by the managers. Corporate law plays an important role here. The second part shall examine the role of corporate law as standard form contracts. Given the assumption by economic analysts of corporate law that the participants in the intra corporate contract shall be free to  11 choose a corporate firm that maximizes their probable expectations, this part of the study shall also evaluate the arguments for making corporate law provisions optimal. The third part shall in the first instance be devoted to the economic analysis of selected shareholder remedies.  These remedies include the oppressive remedy,  derivative action, appraisal remedy and winding-up. Because economic factors often affect and shape the conduct of corporate affairs, it is intended to examine whether the presence of these remedies can be justified in economic terms. Also to be examined in this part are the practical considerations and problems arising from the operation of the current form of'these remedies in Canadian corporate' law.  Suggestions for  improvements in the law will be offered where adequate. This part also incorporates some concluding comments.  12  PART ONE CHAPTER ONE THE TRADmONALSTRUCTURE OF CLOSELY-HELD CORPORATIONS  Introduction: Investment in the closely-held corporation may sometimes be a risky venture. Apart from the business ride of the undertaking there is the ride of disagreement within the corporate organization.  And due to the peculiar nature of the closely-held  corporation, these risks pose a threat to the security of investment. closely-held  corporations usually  have personal involvement  Shardiolders in in,  and expect  commensurate degree of control over decision-making in the corporations. But under corporate law, control over decision making is primarily vested in the holders of the majority of the voting shares. managerial efficiency.  This may have some consequences.  It may lead to  Share values would probably go up and all'members of the  corporation would benefit.  Ch the other hand, it may be used as an instrument of  oppression. The majority shareholders elect the directors who appoint officers' of the corporation. Minority shareholders seldom have any say in this. Traditional coiporate legal view  depicts the position of the minority  shareholders as one which is vulnerable to oppression and other forms of abuse by the majority shareholders. Accordingly, if a significant different of opinion arises between the majority and minority group, the position of the minority may be a precarious one,  13  which may eventually lead to a squeeze-out. There is much emphasis on legal control mechanisms to check the majority'and protect the minority. Cn the other hand, modem economic approach to corporate law asserts that the position of the minority shareholders is not as precarious as the traditional law depict, otherwise no person would like to invest in the closely-held corporation. Basing their argument on the premise that the corporation is essentially founded on private contract, the corporate law and economic analysts recognize the efficacy of internal contractual monitoring mechanisms which take care of areas likely to give rise to disputes in the course of the business.  These contractual arrangements generally enable the  shareholders to depart from the traditional corporate management framework and agree among themselves on how control of the coiporation shall be allocated. An examination of the structure of the closely-held corporation and the position of the shareholders both from the traditional and economic perspectives is therefore necessary to enable us to appreciate the value and efficacy of the legal remedies and contractual devices which serve as protective mechanisms available to the shareholders. As a prelude lo the main focus of this work, this chapter examines the traditional, non-economic structure of the closely-held corporation.  It starts with an  attempt to define and identify the characteristics of most closely-held corporations. Thereafter, the position of the shareholders and some of the methods used to effect a squeezerout are examined. -Finally, the. corporate law remedies available to the minority shareholders are highlighted leaving a detailed examination of these remedies for a later part of the work. The chapter ends with some concluding comments. 13  Economic analysis of the structure of the closely-held corporation is undertaken in Chapter Three below.  14  Definition of Closely-held Corporation: There is no universally accepted definition of a closely-held - or simply "close" - corporations.  When "private corporation" was defined in Canadian corporation  statutes, a private company was defined as a company that by its memorandum or articles restricted the right to transfer its shares, limited the number of its members to fifty or less and prohibited any invitation to the public to subscribe for any shares or debentures of the company.  A "public" company was any company that was not a  private company. 14 This distinction was primarily introduced and designed to enable small business concerns and its shareholders to operate the business with the flexibility of a proprietorship or a partnership and simultaneously to enjoy the benefits of incorporation without having to comply with the regulatory requirements applicable to widely-held corporations.15 14 Most countries still adopt the traditional classification of corporations. Notable among them are Britain - 1985 British Companies Act; Nigeria - S.22 Company and Allied Matters Decree 1990; Australia, New Zealand • S.3 Draft Companies Act, 1990. In Canada, under the British Columbia Companies Act (hereinafter cited as B.C.C.A.) 1985, the classification is between reporting and non-reporting companies. Section 1 defines a reporting company to include a corporation that has any of its securities listed for trading on any stock exchange wheresoever situate or that was deemed to be a public company immediately before October 1,1973, Under the Canada Business Corporations Act (hereinafter cited as C.B.C,A.)~1989, corporations are distinguishedon functional rather than on doctrinal grounds. For example, some insider trading companies (S. 130(1)) apply only to insiders of "distributing corporations" which are defined as corporations any of whose issued securities are OF were part ofa distribution to the public; remain outstanding and are held by more than one person " Section 126(1)(C,B.C.A.). Similarly, corporations any of whose securities have been distributed to the public must, unless exemptedby the Director, appoint an audit committee- Section 171 (C.B.C.A.). . The British Columbia Securities Act 1985 makes a distinction between reporting issuers and private issuers. Under Section 1, a reporting issuer is defined to include an issuer that has fded a prospectus or Statement of Material Fact and obtained a receipt for it or has any securities which have been at any time listed and posted for trading on any stock exchange. For example, Section 175-181 of the British Columbia Companies Act 1985 are designed to ameliorate possible abuses of the proxy system. Directors of reporting companies only must enclose the information circular to proxy forms required to be sent to every member pursuant to Section 177. In addition, although all corporations must file annualfinancialreports, but under Section 197 B.C.C.A., reporting companies must, in addition, file interimfinancialreports.  15  The term sometimes seem to be used to imply an incorporated enterprise in which the participants consider themselves partners inter se and have tried by shareholders' agreement or otherwise to obtain for the enterprise one or more partnership advantages or attributes. Hence, close corporation has been described as a "chartered partnership";16 "incorporated partnership"17 and it has been said to 1® functionally more closely related to the partnership than to the corporation.18 Appreciative of one of the most significant characteristics of many corporations with a small number of iareholders, a leading writer19 has defined the close corporation as "one wherein all the outstanding stock is owned by the persons (or members of their immecjiate families) who are active in management and conduct of the business".  A case in point is Ebrahimi v. Westbourne Galleries Ltd. 20 in which the  appellant was one of the three shareholders: the personal respondents being the other two. The company was a private one which carried on business as dealers in Persian and other carpets. It was formed in 1958 to take over a business founded by the second respondent (Mr. I S t e r ) and since about 1945, the business had been carried on by the appellant and Mr. ISferar as partners, equally sharing the management and profits. When the company was formed, the signatories to its memorandum were the appellant and Mr. Nazar and they were appointed its first directors. Soon after the-company's formation the third respondent (Mr. Nazar's son) was made a director and each of the  yc  16  Furthermore, ripiirtin" companies under the B.C.C.A. shall have at least three directors - (S. I.Cli.f .( .A.) Cullen, C.J. in Ripin v. X55.  United  States Woven Label Co. (1912) 205 N.Y. 442, 447, 98 N.E.  17  Ebrahimi v. Wesbourne Galleries Ltd. [1973] A.C. 360.  18  Rohrlich, Organizing Corporate and Other Business Enterprises (Rev. ed. 1953).  19  Supra, note 18. [1973] A.C. 360..  16  two original shareholders transferred to him one hundred shares each. The court found asan indisputable fact that the appellant and Mr. Nazar had formed the company on the basis that the character of the association would as a matter of personal relation and good faith remain the same. However, this definition seems to exclude from the category of close corporations that large group of corporations in which one or more of several shareholders put up the larger portion of the capital for the enterprise but leave the active management of the business to other shareholders, who may have relatively small shareholdings. Thus, one may state that the apparent difficulty in formulating an all encompassing definition of the closely-held corporation is reminiscent of the dilemma faced by Justice Potter Stewart in deciding an obscenity case. After struggling with the definition of obscenity, he concluded that while perhaps he could not define it, "I know it when I see it. " 21 In the same way, th e closely-held corporation is difficult to define^ but we all know it when we see it. It is the form of business organization with which we are probably most familiar. The "closest" variety of the closely-held corporations is the one man corporation in which all the shares are owned or controlled by a single shareholder and family corporations in which the shares are owned or controlled by members of one family group. Although it is true that the corporate device was not originally designed for use by individual entrepreneurs or t y family businesses in which substantially all the shares are owned or controlled by the head of the family, but in the United States, England and in this country, one-man companies and family corporations have received judicial and statutory sanctions. 22 21  Holmes, Closely-Held Corporations in Michigan (1973).  22  See, for example, Sayers v. Navillus Oil Co. (1931) 41 S.W. 2d 506; Salomon v. Salomon & Co. [1897] A.C. 22; In Commissioners of Inland Revenue v. Sansoon [1921] 2 K.B. 492, Younger L.J. stated, "I. . . deprecate in connection with what are wlied one-man companies the  17  Characteristics of Closelv-Heiri Corporations Since "closely-held corporations" defies any precise definition, an alternative method of approach will be to identify the characteristics common to the various attempts made so far at defining the term.  Some of the common threads running  through all the definitions and terms relating to "closely-held corporations" constitute the normal attributes of such corporations.  Before delving into these attributes, it is  worth pointing out that the amount of a corporation'sassets, the scope of its operations, the number of persons it employs or the volume of its sales does not determine whether it is "close". Many closely-held corporations have tremendous assets and operate all over the universe. Until 1955, the Ford Motor Company was a close corporation. The T. Eaton Company (Canada) is anything but small and yet is closely-held by members of the Eaton family and the family trust. Most definitions stress some obvious characteristics of the closely-held corporation. These include the following: (1)  the number of shareholders is relatively small;  (2)  most of the members of the closely-held corporation take an active part in the business. 23  Frequently, the shareholders, besides being directors are also the  too indiscriminate use of such words as . . . simulacrum, sham or cloak . .'. or indeed any other term of polite invective. Not only do these companies exist under the sanction, even with the encouragement of the legislature, but I have no reason whatever to doubt that the great majority of them are as bona fide and genuine as in a business sense they are convenient and suitable media for the provision and application of capital to industry". See also Constitution Ins. Co. v. Kosmopoulos [1987] 1S.C.R.2. There is usually no division between the shareholder-owner and the director-manager. Either the shareholders themselves are the directors, or they so closely dominate and. control the directors that the latter are in fact little more than their agents. Katcher v. Ohhsman (Ch. 193) 26 N.J. Super. 28, 97 A-2d 180, illustrates the identity between ownership and management that typically prevails in n close corporation. In that case, the three persons each owned one third of the stock, the three constituted the board of directors and each was also an officer.  18  officers and executives of the company. In any case, either through serving as the directors and officers themselves or through detailed provisions in the Articles of Association or by-laws or shareholder agreements, the shareholders personally manage and control the business directly or else perform these functions through others who in reality, simply act as their agents. 24  The  shareholders usually expect a voice in manag;-Tient as well as financial returns from the corporation commensurate with their investment; (3)  there is no established market for the shares of the closely-held corporation. The shares are usually not listed in any stock exchange and very little or no trading on the shares takes place.  From these principal characteristics, other attributes which distinguish the closely-held corporation from the widely-held corporation follow. The shareholders in a closelyheld corporation are greatly concerned about the identity of the other members of the corporation. They have an inclination to hold the power to choose future shareholders or to veto prospective purchasers of shares whom they consider undesirable.  This  desire for control over the selection of future members and associates are often met by the use of carefully prepared clauses in shareholders' agreements, articles or by-laws. Participants forming a close corporation consider a corporate form to obtain-limited liability or other corporate advantage, but usually among themselves, they are "partners". 25  .-  24 Notwithstanding the traditional Anglo-Canadian rule that absent special facts; directors are not agents of shareholders and do not owe any fiduciary duties to them; (Percival v. Wright [1902] 2 Ch. 421), the reality of the situation in most closely-held corporations is that majority shareholders by the use of their voting power are able to manipulate and control the directors who are usually appointed by them. Directors who act contrary to their wishes risk the chance of being removed or not being re-elected. 25  This does not imply that close corporation participants do not appreciate the significance of possessing majority shareholdings in the corporation. They consider themselves "partners" with respect to the harmony and balance of their business. However, in terms of control or division of .assets or declaration of dividends, each "partner" is entitled to whatever is commensurate with the amount of his investment or as may be provided in any agreement, The notion of majority interest is still applicable in such corporations.  19  Unlike a shareholder in the widely-held corporation who is a passive stakeholder and does not expect any management responsibilities, the shareholder in a closely-held corporation usually has personal involvement in, and expect some degree of control over decision-making wiiich is commensurate with his investment. His participation in the corporation may often turn out to be his principal source of income. In a widelyheld corporation, power to control the corporation is relatively unimportant to the investor save in take over situations where majority shareholdings may sell at a premium. But the widespread nature of shareholdings in the widely-held corporations makes it difficult for an individual investor to possess a majority shareholding.  The  reverse is the case in the closely-held corporation where the power to control or at least to veto fundamental changes is vital to the member.  Luna  in his commentary  summarised the position succintly when he said: "it is for the protection of these interests that an individual director or shareholder should be permitted to have a voice in corporate affairs larger than that v/hich comes with the right to cast a lonely minority vote against a majority. Actively participating in the running of the corporation and thus situated as to know and understand the problems of the corporation, the veto power should be safe with him." With respect to the juridical nature of closely-held corporations, consistent with the entity or concession theory, 27 the closely-held corporation is generally viewed as a legal entity having in law an existence separate and apart from its shareholders. - As in a widely-held corporation, the shareholders in a closely-held corporation have in theory only an indirect interest in the business and assets of the corporation, their right being to share in the profits and distribution of corporate assets on liquidation. The closelyheld corporation, just as any other corporation, holds property,28 enters into contracts, 26  Luna, "Protection of Minority Interests through Shareholders' Agreements: A Comments jvjn Section 9 of the New York Stock Corporation Law", (1953) 28 Phil. L.I. 506, 535.  27  Supra, note 6.  28  Macaura v. Northern Assurance Co. [1925] A.C. 619.  20  executes conveyances and conducts litigation in a capacity separate and distinct from its shareholders.29  The mere fact that one person owns all the shares of a corporation  does not mate corporate assets subject to payment of his debts. 30 . Notwithstanding the separate personality accorded to close corporations, confusion as to the exact juridical nature of close corporations often arises by the court's attribution of the corporation's property to the individual owner of the business. An example of the legal confusion this can cause is illustrated by the case of Constitution Insurance Co. v. Kosmopoulos. 31  Prior to this case, the corporate law  proposition has been that the assets of a corporation are not the assets of its shareholders and that a shareholder's interest is merely the right to receive a dividend, if and when declared by the corporation or otherwise due, and to receive a pro rata share of the proceeds of the net assets on a winding up of the corporation. The Ontario Court of Appeal held in this case that this principle does not apply to a one-person corporation.  The learned judge distinguished the present came from Macaura v.  Northern Assurance Co. 3 2 when he said: "I am of the opinion that Macaura can be properly distinguished, and that on the facts of this case, it would be unfair to permit the insurers to succeed in their defence. I conclude that Mr. Kosmopoulos did have an insurable interest. The defence rests its argument upon a legal fiction; a fiction that has been created for purposes relating to the conduct of-the business of the corporation, its management and control, and the limited liability of its shareholders, and it has nothing to do in the circumstances of this case with the risk that was underwritten.33  12  29  Foss v. Harbollle (1843) 2 Hare 461, 67 E.R. 189.  30  Star Brewing Co. v. Flynn (1921) 237 Mass. 213, 129, N.E. 438.  31  [1987] 1 S.C.R. 2; [1981] I.C.R. 5315.  32  [1925] A.C. 619. This case had been the leading authority for the corporate law proposition enunciated above. Supra, note 31, at p. 5518.  21  It is difficult to appreciate the reasoning of the courts in this case.  A person who  incorporates his business must abide by the consequences of his decision. Furthermore, there seans to be no reason of public policy which should allow the shareholder of a one person corporation to ignore the separate legal personality of his creation whenever he deems it convenient to do so.  Position of Shareholders in Closelv-Held Corporations The dominant shareholders in the closely-held corporations usually act as managers and directors.  The traditional view of the closely-held corporation depicts  the position of the minority interests as unique. According to this view, their interest in close corporations are often made worthless by the conduct of the majority who are in control of the corporation. The minority shareholders are deprived of any income from the corporation either in the form of dividends or salary; they are not allowed any effective voice in the business and control of the corporation; they are denied any information about corporate affairs and often, they are finally freezed out from the corporation at a fraction of the real value of their interests.34  Participants in the  general partnership form of business are not in a similar predicament if-they are excluded by their associates from full participation in their enterprise.35 According to Dean O'Neal;  •• -  .'  _  "The inherent characteristic of the (general) partnership form of business preclude many of the popular corporate squeeze-out techniques. Partners ordinarily do not depend on salaries or dividends for a return on their investments but receive a share of the profits of the enterprise. Additionally, a partner, as a co-owner of the business, is entitled to Hodge O'Neal, "Oppression of Minority Shareholders: Protecting Minority Shareholders" [1987] 35 Clev S.L.R. 121. An analogy is drawn here between the shareholders in the closely-held corporation and their counterpart in the general partnership because of the marked resemblance in the structure of the two forms of business organizations.  n n n n u u u u  n C 0 O u a a t  _  '  22 continued employment by the firm. In consequence, there is no partnership counterpart of the corporate squeeze-technique of terminating a shareholder's employment.and withholding of dividends." 36 The shareholder in a widely-held corporation enjoys a similar position.  The stock  market provides substantial forces which ensure that managers operate corporations in a manner that maximizes the shareholders' expectations.37  The availability of a liquid  market for shares offers the shareholder an opportunity to liquidate his investment and re-invest in another corporation that meets his expectations.  Cti the alternative,  shareholders' derivative actions are available to enable shareholders to recover indirectly any loss, but the transaction costs associated with such suits usually prevent shareholders from relying on that remedy. The market forces which align management interests with that of the shareholders in widely-held corporations do not exist in closely-held corporations. Because of the inherent difficulties in obtaining control of the closely-held corporation, corporate raiders are discouraged from bidding for the shares of closely-held corporations.38 In addition, an unhappy minority shareholder in the closely-held corporation has difficulty in disposing of his interest.  Usually, the only prospective purchasers of a  minority interest in a closely-held corporation are the majority shareholders.39 If they 36  37 38  on  F. O'Neal & Desuri, "Expulsion or Oppression of Business Associates: Squeeze-outs in Small Enterprises" (1961) 143. Even in the limited partnership form of business, the position of the limited partners is not as precarious, as that of an oppressed minority shareholder in a closelyheld corporation because his rights and circumstances under which he may be expelled from the business are often well defined in the partnership agreement. In the closely-held corporation, it is a well known principle of corporate law that there is no fundamental light to remain a shareholder and the majority shareholders may use one squeeze-out technique or the other to eliminate an unwanted member. See Re: Saltdean Estate Co. Ltd. [1968] 1 W.L.R. 1844. See l'osncr, Economic Analysis of the Law, 383 (3d. ed.) (1986). See Manne, "Our Two Corporation System; Law and Economics", (1967) 53 Va. L. Rev. 259, 280. Corporate raiders do not usually have access to the information about a closely-held corporation with which to assess a potential takeover. Bahls in his article, "Resolving Shareholder Dissension: Selection of an Appropriate Equitable Remedy", (1990) J. Corp. Law, 285 described this condition as "monopsony". Commenting on the difficulty encountered by the minority in disposing their shares, the court in Re: Block's  23  refuse to buy or offer a token purchase price, the unhappy shareholder is locked into the corporation. Generally, the minority shareholders seeking to sell their shares are not able to find other bidders when the majority shareholders hold out for an unreasonably low purchase price.  Because the majority shareholders already control  management, they desire no additional benefit from purchasing an additional control. The discounted value of the shares are therefore relatively low. 4 0 Most problems in the closely-held corporation revolve around the conflict of interest and disagreements over the business policy of the corporation between the shareholder-directorsor managers and the ordinary shareholders who don't participate in the management of the corporation. This last group usually constitutes the minority. An uncooperative minority shareholder may often be the cause of dispute in the corporation.  The frequency with which the uncomprising attitude of the minority  shareholder occurs and the problem arising from such is put succintly by O'Neal in the following words: "Time and again, when questioned about squeeze-out problems, lawyers and other business advisers comment on the problem of the minority shareholder who 'throws his weight around', and makes life miserable for management. An unreasonable and obstreperous shareholder . . . often gives company managers a 'rough time'. Some corporate officers say they have to spend more time and thought in keeping minority shareholders pacified than in operating the business" . 4 1  Will (1946) 60 N.Y.S. 2d. 639, stated at page 642; "In view of the nature of the shares themselves, being those of a closely-held corporation, having no general market and not saleable to the general public in the usual manner, it would be extremely difficult if not impossible to obtain a ready buyer for the shares". 40  This notwithstanding, economic analysis suggests that the shareholders in the closely-held corporations are not that badly off, otherwise no one would invest in them. Restriction on alienability of shares is justified to ensure that those who are investors are also compatible as managers. Further, when the corporation begins as a familial venture, the restrictions also ensure that control remains in the family, which may aid inreducingopportunistic conduct. See, Easterbrook and Fischel, "Close Corporations and Agency Costs", (1986) 38 Stan. L. Rev. 271.  yc  Hodge O'Neal, supra, note 34 at 122.  24  Friction also arises when a minority shareholder enters with a competing business. An unhappy shareholder who have acquired skill in the particular kind cf business operated t y the corporation may establish a similar business or go to work for another company in a similar business. Disregard of corporate law provisions and requirements and inability of the participants to distinguish in what capacities they act also cause friction. Due to the close nature of the corporation and interwoven nature of the status of members either as shareholders, directors or officers, there may be sometimes no avenue of establishing "who took what action when". 42 Although the law plays a role in ensuring managerial efficiency, 43 the Majority Rule doctrine may pose as an impediment to the protection of the minority interest in the corporation. Under corporate law, the general rule is that the will of the majority members shall prevail.  This is usually achieved in general meetings where some  decisions are taken t y a simple majority of members and other more important decisions are taken by special resolutions. The doctrine could be a double-edged sword for the minority shareholders. Apparently, where it increases managerial efficiency, this may lead to an increase in share value. happens.  Minority shareholders benefit if this  However, the majority shareholders might also use the doctrine as an  instrument of oppression.  Majority shareholders select the board, thereby choosing  management and the minority shareholders "seldom have substantial input in the process. 44 42  43  44  ibid.  By providing fiduciary standards and enabling shareholders to seek remedy for the enforcement ill fiduciary duties and other personal rights. Another principle which impedes the protection of minority interest in the corporation is the Business Judgment Rule. Although this principle is of American origin and. not part of Canadian corporate law, it states that courts will not second guess or inquire into the adequacy of decisions of management if it is reasonable to believe that management is acting in good faith with a reasonable basis and within the scope of the powfcr conferred on them. This rule creates problems of proof for the minority shareholder - bringing a suit for breach of a director's duty  25  Minority shareholders encounter a number of practical difficulties when seeking monetaiy compensation to remedy damages caused by dishonest management.  They  must invest large sums of money to sustain a litigation* Most times, the dissatisfied shareholder is unable to afford the I01™' ""cf  remedying a wrong.  Even if he  eventually succeeds in obtaining monetary compensation, the incompetent or dishonest controlling shareholderremains.  Corporate Squeeze-Out of Minority Shareholder Compounding the problems of minority  shareholders in a closely-held  corporation is the potential or actual threat of squeeze-out. Most times, the majority shareholders and the directors (elected by the majority) try to freeze-out the minority. This pressuring of the minority into eventual exit from the corporation has been defined as: " . . . the manipulative use by some of the owners or participants in the business of corporate control, strategic position, inside information or powers of control or the utilization of some legal device or technique to eliminate minority shareholders from llie enterprise or to reduce lo relative insignificance their voting power or claims on corporate earnings and assets or propose to deprive them of corporate income or advantages to which they are otherwise entitled. 45 The majority shareholders through their-voting power to elect »?nd control a majority of the directors have extensive powers to benefit themselves at the expense of minority shareholders.  'Directors may refuse to declare dividends and may drain off  the corporation's earnings in a number of ways. Exorbitant salaries and bonuses to the majority shareholder - officers and perhaps to their relatives, high rentals for property of care.. See, for example, Auerbach v. Bennett (1979) 393 N.E. 2d 994 New York Court of • Appeals. 45  O'Neal&Desuri, supra, note 36, at page 143.  26  the corporation leases from majority shareholders, and unreasonatie payments to majority  shareholders under "contracts  between  the  corporation  and  majority  shareholders or companies the majority shareholders own are three major ways. Directors appoint officers and may deprive minority shareholders of corporate offices and of employmentby the company or may cause the corporation to sell its assets at an inadequate price to the majority shareholders or to companies in which the majority are interested.  Majority shareholders may also organize a new company in which the  minority will have no interest, transfer the corporations' assets or business to it and perhaps then dissolve the old corporation, or thcv may bring' about a merger under a plan unfair to the minority'. 4 6 There exists no limit to the various forms that a squeeze-out might take. The Majority Rule Doctrine has enabled some Canadian courts to maintain a policy of noninterference in the internal management of the corporation except where there is excessive manifestation of fraud, or oppression.47 Certain forms of squeeze-outs which are most prevalent include the following:  (a)  Fundamental Corporate Changes This technique involves an alteration of the structure of the business.  While  most fundamental corporate changes accord with the dictates of good business and thus beneficial to the corporation as a whole, the majority shareholders may nevertheless, use this device in a manner that is obviously disadvantageous to the minority shareholders with the sole purpose of effecting a squeeze-out. The provisions of some 46  Hodge O'Neal, supra, note 34, at page 125.  47  Brant Investments Ltd. v. Keeprite Inc. (1987) 37 BLR 65 (Ont. HC). However, most judges have adopted a liberal approach to the doctrine and this has enabled them to grant reliefs even in situations where the conduct of the majority falls short of excessive manifestation of fraud or oppression. See Sparling v. Javelin Int. Ltd. (1986) RJQ 1073 (Que. SC); Re Ferguson and Imax Systems Corp. (1983) 43 OR 2d. 128; Keho Holdings Ltd. v. Noble (1987) 53 Alta. LR 195 (Alt. CA).  150  corporation law statutes authorizing the alteration of the Articles or by-laws and other fundamental corporate changes give considerable opportunitiesto directors and majority shareholders to take unfair advantage of minority shareholders.  For instance, the  Canada Business Corporations Act 1975 and the British Columbia Company Act 1973 (as amended) permit fundamental corporate changes by a special resolution of the members.48 The amendment of the Articles of Association may be used, either alone or in conjunction with other techniques to eliminate unwanted shareholders or alter their rights.  Sections 248 and 249 of the British Columbia Company Act (B.C.C.A.)  authorize a great variety of changes in the rights of shareholders to be effected by an amendment of the Articles through special resolution. However, the statute gives some protection to minority shareholders by providing that an alteration which affects the rights of preferences of any class of shares is subject to the right of the class affected to vote thereon as a class. 49 In British Columbia, a corporation's article can be amended to make a nonredeemable class of shares redeemable. A minority shareholder can then be eliminated from the corporation by making his shares redeemable and then redeeming his shares.50 Provisions permitting voluntary dissolution of a corporation on the vote of the specified percentage of its shareholders, especially if dissolution is not required to be  Jhe same position also applies in Nigeria. "Special Resolution" is defined under Section 1 B.C.C.A. 1985 as including a resolution passed by a majority of not less than 3/4 of the votes cast by those members of a company who, being entitled to do so, vote in person or by proxy at a general meeting of the company. Under Section 2 C.B.C.A, 1989, 2/3 majority is required instead. Nigeria has a similar definition contained in Section 1 of the B.C.C.A. (sec Section 236(2) Company and Allied Matters Decree 1990). Section 250(1) B.C.C.A. 1985. Of course, this may not be possible under the provisions of the Canada Business Corporations Act (C.B.C.A.) because Section 176(c)(ii) specifically requires a separate class vote of the affected shares before the alteration becomes valid. In contrast, the addition, removal or change in the redemption rights of the shareholder is not mentioned as a triggering event for a class vote in British Columbia  28  under judicial supervision, 51 may open the way for majority shareholders to bring about the dissolution of a company, the liquidation of its assets and the acquisition of • O the assets by a concern which they own  To quote Professor George Homstem,  "voluntary dissolution can be used to squeeze out small shareholders where the corporation is obviously earning money and prospering in every way, and it is proposed, not to discontinue the business, but to turn it over to a new corporation with a slightly different name but with the same powers and some of the original owners". (b)  Share Issue to Effect Dilution of Interests Essentially this technique consists in the :'hareholder-director-executives causing  the corporation to allot a large number of new shares, which they take at a grossly inadequate price, thus increasing their proportionate control and claims on earnings and assets and diminishing the minority's proportionate voting rights and proportionate claim on earnings and assets.  The creation of pre-emptive rights53 is an attempt to  limit the occurrence of this dilution by requiring a pro-rata offering to the members. But the utility of the shareholders pre-emptive rights as a shield against squeeze-outs is considerably impaired by the number ol'exceptions to those rights. For example, the rights do not attach to shares issued in exchange for property the corporation, needs. 54 Similarly, the minority shareholders may not have sufficient funds available to exercise their pre-emptive rights when-the new shares are issued. Majority shareholders and the 51  For example, Sections 291-292 B.C.C.A. 1985; Sections 211 and 137 C.B.C.A. 1989; Section 457 Company and Allied Matters Decree of Nigeria 1990.  52  Hornstein, "Voluntary Dissolution - A New Development in Intracorporate Abuse" (1945) 51 Yale L.J. 64,67.  53  S. 41 B.C.C.A.; S.28 C.B.C.A. (while the pre-emptive right is mandatory in B.C.C.A. jurisdictions, it is made optional under the C.B.C.A. The discussion paper on Company Act 1990' (B.C.C.A.) recommends the adoption of an optional pre-emptive right, with appraisal rights to shareholders who might dissent during the transitional period.  54  S. 28(2)(a) C.B.C.A.: This exemption is not applicable under the B.C.C.A. 1985.  29  directors and officers under their control may deliberately issue the additional shares at a time when it will be financially' difficult or impossible for the minority shareholders to finance the purchase of their part of the shares.  In Browning v. C&C Plywood  Corporation 55 for example, an issue of shares which reduced the plaintiffs interest from 32% to l % w a s set aside. The issued share capital was increased from 1,000 to 500,000 shares and the plaintiff was given thirty days to lake up 152,000 shares at $1 each. Management knew that the plaintiff could not afford this, and the sole purpose of the increase of stock was found to be to eliminate Browning's interest.  In corporations that use dividends as profit distribution mechanism, this technique is the most common method of effecting a squeeze-out.  To squeeze-out a  minority, the executives may refuse to declare dividends but they provide high compensation for themselves and otherwise enjoy to the fullest, the patronage which corporate control entails, leaving the minority shareholders who do not have corporate office with the choice of obtaining little or no return on their investments for a long period of time or of selling out to the majority at whatever price they will offer. A minority shareholder who challenges the directors' failure to; declare dividends faces many obstacles in obtaining relief from the courts. The first obstacle is the court's view that whether or not dividends are to be declared and, if so, when, how and in what amount they are to be paid are primarily matters for the sound discretion of the directors.56 The second obstacle which necessarily flows from the first consists in the court's relucntance to interfere in the internal management of the company absent  [1967] Supreme Court of Oregon, 434 P. 2d 339. Devail v. Wainwright Gas Co. Ltd. [1932] .1 W.W.R. 281; Miles v. Sydney Meat Preserving Corp. [1913] 16CLR50.  30  fraud or dishonesty, This reluctance to intrude on internal corporate affairs very nearly hardened into an absolute rule of law". In Burland v. Earle57 Lord Davey stated that: "Their lordships are not aware of any principle which compels a joint stock company while a going concern to divide the whole of its profits amongst its shareholders. W e t h e r the whole or any part should be divided, or what portion should be divided and what portion retained are entirely questions of internal management which the shareholders must decide for themselves and the court has no jurisdiction to ccntrol or review their decision, or to say what is a "fair" or "reasonable" sum to retain undivided, or what reserve fund may be "properly" required. However, there are limits to the director's privilege to retain earnings in the business and the courts, particularly in cases involving close corporations, will grant relief where the minority can prove the directors have abused their discretion by acting arbitrarily, fraudulently or in bad faith. Re Ferguson and Imax Systems59 illustrates this point. There was a iracLtaL breakup and the husband attempted to squeeze-out his wife who was a minority preferred shareholder in the corporation. To achieve this, no dividends were declared even though funds were available, A special resolution was passed converting the preferred shares into ones which could be redeemed. The wife applied under the oppression remedy to compel the payment of dividends and an injunction to invalidate the special resolution. The court held that the corporation must pay dividends because they were withheld for improper purposes. resolution was also invalidated.®0 31  [1902] A.C. 83.  58  At-page 85.  59 60  • • •-•  • /...'  The special  — :  [1983] 150D.L.R.3d 718. See also, Dodge v. Ford Motors Co. (1919) 204 Mich. 459, 170 N.W. 668; Patton v. Nicholas (1955) 154 Tex. 385 , 279 S.W. 2d. 848. In Von An v. Magenheimer (1908) 126 App. Div. 257, 110N, Y. Supp, 629, a minority shareholder alleged that majority shareholders conspired to obtain her stock and that in order to induce her to sell they; (1) refrained from declaring a fair dividend; (2) increased their salaries as corporate officers, and (3) represented that the company had suffered reverses to such an extent that it could not pay a dividend, larger than three percent and that it probably would never be able to pay more. The minority shareholder having sold her shares, the court permitted her to maintain an individual action against the majority shareholders for the losses that she suffered from the sale. As was said by the Supreme Court of Indiana in Star Pub. Co. v. Ball (1922) 192 Ind. 158, 171, ''the courts will not allow  31  (d) '  Excessive Compensation A typical squeeze-out technique is for the majority shareholders to acquire  corporate wealth t y  causing the Corporation to pay them high and excessive  compensation for services rendered as directors, officers or senior employees. usually compensate themselves not only by huge salaries, but also t y  They  'bonuses,  pensions, profit-sharing, generous expense accounts, medical and health programs, company-purchased insurance and various other so-called "fringe benefits".  A  minority shareholder often watches th$ majority shareholders and their families live on compensation from the corporation and-'enjoy the prestige, privileges and patronage that accompany control of the corporation, while he and his family receive no financial return or any other benefit from his investment in the company.' 61  Payment of  excessive compensation over a 'long period of time may be to the minority shareholder's detriment when the corporation sells its business and assets or merges with another corporation, because its earning power may be reflected in the price the corporation receives for its assets or in terms of the merger agreement.  (e)  Non-Disclosure An effective technique of squeeze-out by the majority shareholders usually  consists .in adopting a method-of active non-disclosure of corporate information. This can be the preface to either a purchase by the majority of the minority interests or to a new issue of shares in the company.  The effect is to conceal corporate information  which might cause the ignorant party to value the shares more highly; thus resulting in the directors to use their power oppressively by refusing to declare dividends where the net profits and the condition and character of the business clearly warrant it". The ultimate test resolves itself into an examination of the good faith and reasonableness of the policy, of retaining that which otherwise is available for dividends. 61  Hodge O'Neal, supra note 34, at 129.  • "  1  ' \  n n n N'.,"n  LOO  32  a sale of his shares at a bargain price, or in his failing to subscribe to a share issue w h i c h would result in the dilution effects. The position of the minority shareholder becomes  more endangered when it is realized that reporting and  requirements of the Securities Act  62  disclosure  do not apply to close corporations (which by their  very structure, cannot be classified as "reporting issuers").  Shareholders in a close  corporation do not have access to sources nf information available to securities holders i n a widely-held corporation.  PrQ.tc.cti.ng the Shareholders in a Closelv-Held Corporation It has been illustrated in the foregoing pages the problems and difficulties which may confront the shareholders in a closely-held corporation. Closely-held corporations account for most of Canadian business. Even in the United States, it is estimated that family-owned businesses alone represent ninety-five percent of all United States' business and are responsible for nearly fifty percent of the jobs in the United States. The legal principles applicable to several of the practices by which the minority shareholders are deprived of their interests in the corporation raise basic questions as to the nature and extent of the duties owed by controlling shareholders. - From the attributes  common  lo all attempted definitions of the closely-held corporation  cnunciatcd above, 64 it may-be justifiable to'assert that the closely-held corporation  yc  62  63  For example, Section 67 of the British Columbia Securities Act 1985 makes provision for the publication of any 'material change' occurring in the affairs of a "reporting issuer". Section 1 of tilt Act il dints what auwlitutcs. a material change. See supra, note 13 for definition of "Reporting Issuer". J. Ward, Keeping the Family Business Healthy (1987). See supra, pages 17-19.  33  bears a striking resemblance to the partnership. 65  Therefore, the relationship among  the shareholders in the closely-held-Corporation shall be one of trust, confidence and absolute loyalty.  Closely-held corporations with substantial assets and with more  numerous shareholders are no different from smaller closely-held corporations in this regard. All participants rely on the fidelity and abilities of those shareholders who hold office.  "Disloyalty and self-seeking conduct on the part of any shareholder will  engender bickering; corporate stalemate and perhaps, efforts to achieve dissolution".66 Costs associated with the frictions and consequent litigations in the closely-held corporation may result in the ineffective use of management time;  diminished  confidence of banks, suppliers and customers in the corporate enterprise;  inability to  obtain necessary financing;67 reduced efficiency of the management, as well as the increased risk of business failure. , beholder disputes within the corporation also give rise to non-economic losses.  If allowed to go on, it can destroy sound family  relationship and lead to acrimony and vindictiveness.68 To ensure a more realistic and harmonious environment for the operation of the business within the closely-held corporation, an atmosphere of good feeling amongst the shareholders is an essential pre-requisite.  Where an event or conduct by the  majority shareholders gives rise to a dispute, resort may be had to one or other of the corporate legal remedies.  Most of the problems encountered in the closely-held  corporation which lead to corporate squeeze-out of minority shareholders could be resolved through the application of the legal remedies. However, the adequacy of the '65 ' There are however significant dissimilarities between them; the most prominent being the separate legal status accorded the closely-held corporation which is non-existent in partnership bu.>im*>. 66  Per. Tauro, C.J. in Donahue v. Rodd Electrotype Co. of New England, (1975) 328 N.E. 2d 505 at 514.  67  F. O'Neal and Thompson, Oppression of Minority Shareholders (2d. ed. 1985).  68  Bahls, supra note 40; at page 287.  34  corporate law remedies is another question which shall be looked at in one of the subsequent chapters. In addition to the statutory remedies, corporate law and economic analysts assert that certain contractual monitoring mechanisms designed to minimize the conflict of interest problem also exist in tire closely-held corporation. Beginning from the premis§ that the closely-held corporation is essentially founded on private contract among the participants to the nexus of contract within the corporation, they point out that thes§ contractual devices take care of areas likely to give, rise to problems in the future a n ! further that the minority shareholders in the closelv-held corporation are not that badly off otherwise no one would invest in them. While the  statutory remedies available to the shareholders are merel  highlighted here (leaving a detailed discussion for a latei part of this work), the contractual monitoring mechanisms designed to minimize agency problems in closelyheld corporations and the enforceability of such arrangements shall be taken up when the economic structure of the closely-held corporation is examined in Chapter Three. Suffice it to say at this point that the adoption of contractual arrangements enahles the participants in the closelv-held corporation to depart from the traditional corporate management framework and agree on how control of the corporation shall be allocated. Similarly, that adoption of the shareholders' agreements as planning device in dispute prevention or resolution may-be inevitable.for'assured corporate success.  Statutory Remedies Preventive mechanisms against squeeze-outs and frictions may sometimes be ineffective because the variety of possible forms which a squeeze-out may take, virtually precludes any success at preventing every attack. Therefore, where a course of conduct pursued by the majority is not one covered by some form of preventive  protection, the injured minority shareholder may have recourse to common law 69 a m the statutes for relief. Some of the Corporate Law remedies which are readily available to an aggrieved shareholder include;  the oppression remedy;70  appraisal rights;^  derivative action72 and an action for winding up. 73  Conclusion Development of appropriate methods of pr3t e c t i n S minority, shareholders, in the closely-held corporation requires an appreciation of the  and business environment  which will affect the enterprise. The ascertainment of the circumsfaiiS es of the parties who are to be members in the corpora^ 011 pointed out that an obvious fact that many persons whd  i s 3150  become  attitudes  important.  O'Neal  minority shareholders  in the closely-held corporation when it is being organized or who buy into the buSl n e s s later, have a trusting, almost child-like infl o c e n c e > at the outset of their involvement. 69  70  The Common law rules areRot a ' w a y s valuable to a minority shareholder because of the rule in Foss v. Harbottle (1843) 2 Hale 461. Attention will therefore be focused more on the protection offered by the Corporation Acts. In British Columbia, the remedy is provided under Section 224 B.C.C.A. See also Section 241 C.B.C.A. for similar provision. In Britain, Sections 459-461 of the British Companies Act 1985; Nigeria - Sestions 310 - 313 of the Company and Allied Matters Decree 1990. In the United States, some states do not have any direct equivalent of the oppression remedy but Rule 10b-5 of the U.S. Securities and Exchange Comt^issi ... corporations to obtain a remedy lor coining! fet.would arise under the oppression remedy in The scope of potential applicants is more limited under the B.C.C.A. than in the C.B.C.A. However, the Company Law Discussion Paper 1990 (B.C.C.A.) has recommended for an increased scope of applicants to include previous members. For judicial recognition of the need to include past members as eligible applicants, see Buckley v. B.C.T.F. (1990) 44 B.C.L.R. 31 (2d). ;,  71  See Sections 231 B.C.C.A.; 190 C.B.C.A.  72  Sections 225 B.C.C.A.; 238 C.B.C.A.  73  Sections 296-298 B.C.C.A.; 213-217 C.B.C.A.; 408(c)(e) C.A.M.D. 1990, Nigeria.  36  They are enthusiastic about going into business for themselves and they are optimistic about success in the business and the receipt of high profits. Conflicts of interests which exist or develop among the shareholders constitute a threat to the success of the venture. In the absence of protective mechamisms, control is in the hands of the holders of the majority of the corporation's voting shares and the likelihood of abuse of this power of control may not be far. While remedies do exist in the law for problems which arise unexpectedly, much could be done at the inception of the business venture to reduce the possibility of conflicts of interests arising. Careful planning in the initial periods of the incorporation of the corporate organization will do much to reduce the risk to investors and provide them with a structure for their relationships which will allow them to devote their attention to the business of the corporation rather than to the security of their position within it. However, it must be appreciated that even detailed planned and constructed contractual mechanisms do not always take care of the wide variety and forms which a squeeze-out may take. The technique of avoiding these contractual arrangements are numerous.  Corporate law and the statutory provisions play an active role here. By  providing the statutory remedies the law enables the minority shareholder to either enforce a breach of an agreement or to prevent or cure any abuse of-power by the controlling shareholders.  A combination of the contractual devices and the statutory  remedies-may ensure a more realistic protection for-the shareholders in the closely-held corporation.  37  CHAPTER TWO THE TRADITIONAL STRUCTURE OF THE WIDELY-HELD CORPORATION  Introduction: While corporate law and judicial decisions in some jurisdictions have increasingly recognized the existence of the distinction between the two kinds of corporations termed the closely-held and widely-held corporations, an important change in Canadian corporate law in the late70'sand early 8Q's was to drop the public/private distinction. Emphasis was rather shifted to the reporting obligations of the corporation as a distinguishing factor. For instance, the British Columbia Companies Act makes a distinction between reporting and "non-reporting" companies. 74 difference in terminology notwithstanding,  However, the  most features of the non-reporting  companies could be identified in the closely-held corporation while the reporting issuers more closely resemble the widely-held corporations. The typical one-person or family enterprise and the small corporation in which all the shares are held by comparatively few persons who regard, themselves as "partners" and who are active in the business are clearly closely-held corporations. The larger enterprises with securities publicly traded (usually on a recognized stock exchange or in an organized over-the-counter market) is no doubt a widely-held corporation. These widely-held corporations dominate the economic structure of most countries with shareholders numbering in the thousands and most times Comprising institutional investors. yc  See Section 1, B.C.C.A., 1973; similarly Section 67 of the British Columbia Securities Act 1985 imposes some disclosure obligations with respect to any "material change" occurring in the affairs of "reporting issuers". See supra, note 13, for definition of "reporting issuers".  38  Between the extremes of the closely-held and widely-held corporations lies afl important distinction which is besf-understood in terms of the degree of identity between ownership and management. Where the owners and the managers are identical or substantially so, the closely-held corporation feature is predominant. The dominaBft shareholders usually double as managers. management team is usually appointed.  In the widely-held corporation, the  Most often, the managers are either ndt  shareholders in the corporation or they own a relatively little percentage of the stock: These corporations are marked t y widespread share ownership structure.  Th6  shareholders are for the most times considered to be passive stakeholders who do ndt take any (active) part in the management of tha corporation. There is separation of ownership of shares from control of the corporation. It is this separation phenomenon that has become the traditional mode of picturing the fundamental problem of corporate law and economics. 75 Due to the manifest widespread nature of sharelr 1 ' 1 '";  ™_m™finn  nf  ownership from control, traditional corporate lawyers have asserted that the small group of managers are relatively free to manage the widely-held corporations for their own benefit, not that of the powerless and passive shareholders/ They have called for more stringent legal rules to restrain the management group.  However, as ..shall be  shown later, corporate law economists argue that these traditional corporate law scholars fail to recognize the operational effect's o.f some market forces on corporate management and their assertion becomes hallow when the value of the free market ; constraints on corporate management is examined. . There exists an available market for the sale or transfer of securities. Unlike in the closely-held corporation, the securities market affords powerful inducement to ensure that managers of widely-held corporations operate in a manner that maximizes yc  Economic analysis of the widely-held corporations is treated in the next chapter.  39  the shareholders' expectations.  Although dissatisfied shareholders may remove  dishonest and incompetent managers t y the use of the proxy machinery, this process is rarely used because of the costs and delay inherent therein. Most times in the widelyheld corporation, the dissatisfied shareholders simply sell their shares. While the sale of shares does not often lead to new management, it does offer the shareholder an opportunity to liquidate his investment, and re-invest in another corporation.  But  sometimes, the sale of shares may result in the sale of control usually at a premium with the consequent implication on the probability of the installation of a new management t y the acquiring team.  Separation of Ownership from Control in the Widely-Held Corporation The most dominant feature of widely-held corporations which distinguishes them from the closely-held corporations is the notion of the separation of ownership by shareholders from that of control by the management group.  The shareholders are  widespread and this makes it difficult, if not impossible for them to come together and device an organized contractual mechanism akin to the shareholders' agreements obtainable in the closely-held corporations.  With no-identifiable interest in the  corporation other than profit maximization by the corporation, the shareholders are considered passive stakeholders without any interest in management responsibilities and duties. The separation of ownership and control in the widely-held corporation was brought to the fore almost sixty years ago by Berle and Me<ns. 76  This separation  phenomenon has retained a central position in recent writings about the economic theory of the corporation. 76  The problem created by the separation phenomena was  Adolf A. Berle & Gardiner C. Means, The Modern Corporation and Private Property (1932).  i  n n n <~i n n n i u i u, i u u u u  40  recognized by Berle and Means when they stated that "the separation of bwnership from control produces a conditionivhere the interests of owner and of ultimate manager may, and often do, diverge, and where many of the checks which formerly operated to limit the use of power disappear . . ," 7 7  Thus, they asserted that ownership and  control have been separated in the widely-held corporation and that this has large effects on the conduct of the corporate enterprise.  The holder of corporate shares  experiences a loss of control over his resources because ownership is so broadly dispersed across large numbers of shareholders that the typical shareholder cannot exercise real power to oversee managerial performance in modern corporations. Management exercises more freedom in the use of the corporation's resources than would exist if the corporation were managed by its owner(s) . The theme of their work could be gathered from the early pages of the book: "It has been assumed that, if the individual is protected in the right both to use his property as he sees fit and to receive the full fruits of its use, his desire for personal gain, for profits, can be relied upon as an effective incentive to his efficient use of any industrial property he may possess. In the [quasi] public corporation, such an assumption no longer holds. . . , it is no longer the individual himself who uses his wealth. Those in control of that wealth, and therefore in a position to secure industrial efficiency and produce profits, are no longer, as owners, entitled to the bulk of such profits. Those who control the destinies often own so insignificant a fraction of the company's stock that the returns from running the corporation profitably accrue to them in only a very minor degree. The stockholders, on. the other hand, to whom the profit of the corporation go, cannot be motivated by those profits to a more efficient use of the property, since they have surrendered all disposition of it to those in control of the enterprise. • ; The theme of the book rests on three propositions:79 1.  The large corporation is owned by so many shareholders that no one or even no score of them typically owns a significant fraction of the outstanding shares. At p. 6. Ibid," pp. 8-9. See Stigler & Friedland, "The Literature of Economics: The Case of Berle And Means", (1983) 26 Journal of Law and Economics, 237, 238.  41  Berle and lyfeais conducted an empirical study and examined the structure of control exercised over two hundred largest American corporations in 1930, including the Pennsylvania Railroad, the United States Steel and the AmericaA Telephone and Telegraph.  They observed that "sixty-five percent of tliS  companies and eighty percent of their combined wealth"80 were controlled bf the management or by a legal device involving a very small percentage of proportion of ownership.  Since no one individual or group possessed ft  controlling block cf shares in such corporations, they asserted that control over the conduct of the I  I  *  0f  the widely-held corporations resided in the small  group of directors and senior management that run the corporation; 2.  Corporate officers in general own a very small fraction of the shares of their corporations;  3.  The interests of management and shareholders diverge widely.  ;  Berle made a study of the changing statute and case law with respect to the rights and duties of shareholders and corporate directors and officers. 81 The relaxation of incorporate statutes, the reduction in the rights not only of voting but of participation by the shareholders, and the growing prerogatives of the management to control investments, corporate structure and disbursement of profits and the like, were held to have eliminated most legal restraints on management prerogatives. Berle and Means recognized the availability of the proxy machinery to the shareholders who may nominate their own directorial nominees and campaign for votes but they equally recognized that the process is so expensive that only wealthy groups can finance the effort. The cost of mailing proxy solicitation materials to shareholders is great when this is added the cost of the inevitable legal battle, printing fees for the Berle and Means, supra, note 85, at p.94. 81  bk. 11.  42  solicitation materials, costs of retaining accountants and financial advisors, the aggregate costs are now and were'in Berle and Means' time, immense. 82  Incumbent  directors on the other hand, do not bear any of these costs - the corporate treasury does. The shareholder in reality is thus reduced to a mere passive stakeholder subject to the whims and caprice of the directors. Berle and lyfeais concluded: " . . . for the most part, the stockholder is able to play only the part of the rubber stamp . . . the usual stockholder has little power . . . . The separation of ownership and control has become virtually complete. The bulk of the owners have in fact almost no control over the enterprise, while those in control hold only a negligible proportion of the total ownership." 83 The authors contrasted the widely-held corporation to the Adam Smith 84 enterprise in which the owner managed as well as owned the business. By carrying on enterprise he would employ his energy and wealth in such a way as to obtain more wealth. In this effort, he would tend to make for profit those things which were in most demand. Thus, while the owner of the small enterprise is spurred cn by the expectation of profits to risk his wealth; in the case of the widely-held corporation, the shareholders may , hope to maximize profits by risking their capital, but the control group may seek to maximize salaries and easy executive life, Adam Smith recognized this fact when lie wrote that  82  83 84  Wolfson, The Modem Corporation: EieeMarkets versus Regulation, 14 .J1584J. Berle and Means, supra, note 114 at p.89.  '.'  After two centuries, Adam Smith, an eighteenth century classical economistremainsa towering figure in the history of economic thought. Known primarily for a single work, " Anlnquiry into the Nature and Causes of he Wealth of Nations", (1776), the first comprehensive system of political economy, Smith is more properly regarded as a social philosopher whose ecflnxanic writings constitute only the capstone to an overarching view of political and social evolution. The "Wealth of Nations" may be seen not merely as a treatise, on economics but as a partial exposition of a much larger scheme of historical evolution. In his book, Smith described the evolution through federalism into a stage of society requiring new institutions such.as marketdetermined rather than guild-determined wages, and free rather than government constrained enterprise, This later became known as laissez-faire capitalism. Smith called it the system of perfect liberty.  n n n n > n ~i / n  U <U U U ><, U\L  I-.U  43 ". . . the directors of such companies8 . . . being the managers rather of other people's money than cf their own, it cannot well be expected that they should watch over it with the same anxious vigilance with ' which the partners in a private co-partnery frequently watch over their own. Like the stewards of a rich man, they are apt to consider attention to small matters as not for their master's honor, and very easily give themselves a dispensation from having it. Negligence and profusion, therefore, must always prevail, more or less, in the management of the affairs of sucn a company.ii86 Berle and Means stressed that the modern corporation is "so different from the privately owned enterprises of the past to make the concept of private enterprise an ineffective instrument of analysis." 87  They argued that the existence of the modern  giant corporations cannot be integrated into the classical theory of capitalism.  They  further stated that: "when Adam Smith talked of "enterprise" he had in mind as the typical unit the small individual business in which the owner, perhaps with the aid of a few apprentices or workers, labored to produce goods for market or to carry on commerce.  Very emphatically, he repudiated the stock corporation as a business  mechanism, holding that dispersed ownership made efficient operation impossible . . . . Yet when [we] speak of business enterprise today, [we] must have in mind primarily these very units which seemed to Adam Smith not to fit into the principles. . . he was laying down for the conduct of economic activity".88 They concluded that the modern corporations, unlike the smaller units of Adam Smith's day operate in non-competitive markets dominated by a few great enterprises in which individual initiative has disappeared. corporation as an economic state.  Berle and Means viewed the modern  In their opinion, "the law of corporations was in  Adam Smith was talking of joint stock companies, the 18th century equivalent of the widelyheld corporations. Adam Smilh, An Inquiry into the Nature and Causes of the Wealth of Nations, 700 (E, Cannan, ed. 1966). Berle and Means, op. cit. p. 349. Ibid, at 345-346.  44  reality a branch of constitutional law for the new economic state".89 They advocated that a new corporate constitutional law and government officials rather than the free market would be used to force the corporation to serve not only the shareholders but also the society."  Effects of the Berle and Means Thesis For the last sixty years or thereabout, public discussion of corporations and public policy towards corporations have been dominated by the vision of Adolf Berle and Gardiner Means.  The authors' analysis made two suggestions.  One was for the  courts to adopt the doctrine that corporate officers and directors are trustees for the shareholders, and to hold them to the highest standards of fiduciary responsibility. This suggestion was considered weak because it would require close monitoring of corporate affairs t y the courts, a task for which the judges were not qualified and for which even the largest investors showed no soncern. The authors recognized this point when they conceded that the legal effort on monitoring corporate affairs has not been successful because the courts lack the "ability to handle the problems involved". 91 Another suggestion was to restore active control to the shareholders. Berle and claimed that corporate officers were promoting their own financial.interests at the expense of the shareholders and that to remedy the situation, the shareholders should be encouraged to play an active role in nominating and electing directors and thus influence the selection of the officers who run the corporation.  This approach  known as the "shareholder democracy" holds that shareholders are inactive or apathetic mainly because they lack easy access to corporate information. And presumably, they 89  Ibid, at p. 357.  90  Ibid, at p. 356.  91  Ibid, at p. 357.  n n n h < nJ ri  U U U U  t i  7 U L 'I C T  45  would be willing to play an active role in determining corporate goals and in designing a 'strategy to achieve these goals, if Ihey posses Ihe information needed to make informed policy decisions. Most modern corporate law legislations are based on Ihe fears of domination by the corporate directors and managers expressed Iy Berle and Means.  The goal of  public control animated many of those who wrote and adopted the United States Securities Act of 1933 and the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. For instance, the Chairman of the United States House Commerce Committee presented the 1933 bill in a language consistent with the analysis of Berle and Means: "Where the stock is widely distributed, as in the case of so many American corporations, the officers of the company, through the use of proxies and the advantage they have in obtaining proxies, are able to continue in office without much regard to their efficiency . . . . Two hundred companies own 75 percent of the total wealth of the United States. The management of these big corporations, as a rule, own an insignificantpercentage of the outstanding voting stock. 1,92 The Berle and Means' book was credited with the inspiration for the 1933 reform legislation, and Time magazine called it "the economic Bible of the Roosevelt administration". 93 The reformative effects of the Berle and Means' thesis notwithstanding, the work has not been without criticism. In the first place, Berle and Means asserted that the interests of the management group and shareholders diverge widely in the widelyheld corporations, but no attempt was made in the book lo present any systematic divergence of interest between ownership and control. One writer has pointed out that organized empirical research would have been welcome:  "even significant albeit  anecdotal evidence of the misuse of control power would have aided the case" . 9 4 92  (1973)4; The Economic Regulation of Business and Industry 2615-16 (Bernard Schwartz, edi).  93  Time, April 24, 1933, at p. 14.  94  Wolfson, supra, note 82 at p. 17.  46  Secondly, economic analysts are highly critical of the Berle and Means thesis. A fundamental defect in their thesis is the failure to recognize the value of free market constraints on corporate management which help to align management interests with that of the shareholders in the widely-held corporations, Wolfson in unequivocal terms criticized the work of the authors in similar terms when he wrote: ". , . the book after development of data demonstrating the dispersion of stock ownership into many small shareholders devotes over a hundred pages to a demonstration that could not have been new even in 1932 that corporate directors and management have the potential power under the case and statutory law to dominate the financial and business affairs of the corporation . . . . None of the Rerlc and Means discussion with the literal exception of one or two isolated anecdotal examples ever proveS that free market forces do not discipline management § r systematically uses its power to harm shareholders o r 'he public."  Conclusion No doubt, there is bound to be a high probability of divergence of interest between the management interest and that of the s h i r e h o l d e r s  when  control  property 8 0 and the ownership thereof is not housed in the same individual. summarizes the basic fact of most widely-held coif orations.  of  the  This  The position of the  shareholders in the widely-held corporation is qui^ different from that of their counterparts in the closely-held corporations, where the existence of shareholders agreements go a long way in preventing and taking care of areas.or issues likely to give rise to difficulties.  ShareholdF s ' agreements are not possible in the widely-held  corporations chiefly because of t h e widespread ownership structure. Similarly, the use of the proxy machinery as a control mechanism may be expensive,  95  Wolfson, Ibid at 17-18.  94  As evidenced by the shares.  47  However, the shareholders are not totally without protection from management misconduct.  Corporate law and economic analysts argue that the managers are  constrained by an identifiable network of bonding and monitoring devices to exercise their discretion in the shareholders' interests and that an exploration of the economic reality of the corporate structure and the capital market in which is exists will reveal that the widely-held corporation is not a kind of institution free from the discipline of a free competitive market, Moreover, resort may be had to corporate law provisions for the protection of the shareholders. The provision of the oppression remedy, appraisal remedy and for breach of fiduciary duties the derivative action serve to protect the shareholders where the market forces are unable to take care of one-time divergence by the managers. Similarly, the enactment of the Securities Acts 97 which require frill disclosure of facts relevant to the value of corporate securities also serve an important function in shareholder protection. Derivative action for breach of fiduciary duties may lie where the directors or managers fail to disclose any material change in the affairs of the corporation and subsequently make use of the undisclosed information to their owm benefit. 98  57  For example, U.S.A. 1934,British Columbia 1985. See, for example, Section 121 of the British Columbia Securities Act. 1985; See also Securities &Exchange Commission v. Texas Gulf SulphurCo. (1968)410 F. 2d. 833. Personal action may lie for Ihe breach of duty to disclose any material change occurring in. the affairs of the corporation (as provided by Section 47 of the British Columbia Securities Act, 1985) if the plaintiff can rely on the corporate law tule Which states that where a statutory provisipn is designed for the protection of a diss to which the plaintiff belongs, then if he can show loss through damage caused by failure to observe the statutory provisions, he can rely oiv that provision to claim for personal relief. See Goldex Mines Ltd. v. Revill (1974) 7 O.R. (2d)  48  CHAPTER THREE ECONOMIC ANALYSIS OF THE CLOSELY AND WIDELY-HELD CORPORATIONS  Tntrofluction: In the previous chapters, the traditional structures of the closely and widely-held corporations were examined. It was pointed out that there is a fundamental differen® between the two corporate forms.  Apart from the existence of share transfer  restrictions in the closely-held only, it was noted that there is great diffusion of shal® ownership in the widely-held corporations. Furthermore, risk bearing and management are separated in widely-held but not in closely-held corporations. Two views exist on the consequences that follow from the diffusion of share ownership and the separation phenomenon in the widely-held corporation. The two views represent the assertions of the two leading schools of thought in corporate law - the traditional (corporal®) legal view and the economik approach to corporate law. The traditional legal view emphasizes that the position of the shareholders in the widely-held corporation has degenerated into, a helpless one because of the separation phenomenon and the likelihood that the management may exploit the situation to their advantage. The view also holds that shareholders"in the closely-held corporation face unique risks of exploitation;  hence the need for state intervention in the form of  imposing strict legal rules including the oppression remedy, fiduciary duties and appraisal remedies enabling exploited members to liquidate their investments. The economic approach which represents a new thinking in corporate law applies economic tools to the understanding of corporate law problems.  The view  holds that shareholders in the widely-held corporation are not worse off because of  49  —  b  «  „  „  Plenome  - . «* —„ - H  : : : t  * "  'he  ^  Welftre  „on „  ~  and  markcl  of  — . ,hetomarta m i posss on  - -  e h °f  «  ™ " " " " — foundalton a m o , £ the p a ^ p a n . M -  d i f f us i o n  « *  ~ a M e  cons|rai0B  M  c  > ~  „ ^ o  ^  w  ^  vie., *  -  ^  ^  coa.escenee  ^  ^  0(  ».,rae,na,  ^  intervention for Ihe proteclion of shareholders. Although economic analysis „f .PP.tea.ion o f economics to c o <Wh  w  c  Iaw 6a!  ~  T O i o  „  s  in  g  a d o p M  *  corporate Governance; * * *  ,„  contention of  Tradi,l0Ml  bMh  ^  ,he  ,y  * *  „7mJ"'1"?^ W f  ^  ^ ^  J  » n h e nrm which  •>»••(  a-, a ,mwtr t.,nli,ror lha,. "*" » d t k o, <»' analyst. h, W C  01  _  ^ ^  (Co[poraB) U g a l  asanexusofconlrael); V . Brmlney T o ™ r Contract", (1985) 85 Col. I. R S , f Z i ' ^ T ' T •"-»"•£ » J., , , , ; ,® , "' "r"™' o » falls o, alternatives). f  wMe  ^  . ^  ^ M o  ^  examines the reiationship  by pres5n[iog  of , h . „ g 6 , in corporate , a . -  -  e,p«ssly  management* i„  tal„„  —  ^  M y  ^  , sets the stage f o , , h e  -  ^  of the relationships „ h , c h e „ s t among  light  S «e„»n  r  ten  »  e , s t , » g between the shareholders and „  •  „„,  .  |aw  Canada, the  M W  *  closely-held c o  r a l e  ™  i . w and c o m i c s has heen the s *  ^  ...  50  structures of the widely and closely-held corporations finm perspective When th„ . , T " ^ r a t i o n s from an economic pecnve. When the closely-held coloration is looked at <h. * ' • ^  corporation wi„  be  considered  flm  °f  ^  Th  which align the interests f t ^ "-danisms B interests of those n control with th.t . . considered The d i , , • with that of m.nonty shareholders are also Ille • discussion on the c'nwh,  -  m  When the widely-held corporation is examined, the agency o r * . separation phenomenon w , market constraints on ™  be  • ,  identify "™ermore, the contractual and free  constraints on corporate management are discussed.  Section IV o f f ,  concluding remarks and comments.  ^  S  °m°  I: The Traditional (Corporate) Legal Theory  V  Ty I W  r  1  , a ,  r  '™  **""  r y:  ~  —  a  Chl C r a t e  " - " •»*-*»-«Powers»S»r  K  r : :c : : :, " W o  e r ~ o f ^ n supports slale.  e e r a  " „id  ^ —  b y  ,  - • « * . . 0 * ^  ™^  in  essential  h e s M e  ^ -  -^ ^ -  ^~  Alii. I 51  ei  regulation or the facilitation 0 f shareholder litigation in ft,  'I S M  fostered the  C  °n"°'! "  meaningful constraint on managerial behavior „,„ ™«™>r. P M a preeminent role i„ ^ ^  c„m  characterized h y the  ^  separalion o f  ^  ^  —  *  and has  , , according to this vie,, J " " . T ~  ~  The Economic Approach to Corporate Law -  - o m i c approach represents a new t h i n M „ g  »«  r  r  a  h  ^  ^  by economists and ccono m ie oriented corporate  n  d  emp,rici  '  *  —  -  -  law  ^  ^  . v . * ,  of  .  o  The approach began in the United State, h„t j,  °  "" " "  —  ~  -  » « P -  —  economic activity  post.con,  101  nri n n  n i io '  Lt'Ll U II i II '/< I I  1  1  behavior among persons who otherwise would be engaged in market transactions.102 The economic approach is in stark opposition of, and challenges the orthodoxy of the traditional legal view of the corporation as a mere concession from the state,  The  approach views the corporation as founded on private contract where the role of the state is limited to enforcing contracts entered into t y  the participants to the  intracorporate contract. Thus, according to this view, the corporation is a complex nexus of contracts that are different from and presumably more efficient than those which would arise in the market  10  With this approach came the evolution of the "contradual theory" of  the corporation. Proponents of the economic approach to corporate law argue that the essence of the contractual nexus within the corporation is that the participants should be free to mold a corporate form of their choice. A strong basis of the economic approach is the recognition of free market forces which act as effective constraints on corporate management and the use of contractual controlling mechanisms by the participants to reduce the conflict of interests which usually arises between those who manage the corporation and the shareholders. Proponents of the economic approach argue that the modern corporation is a competitive entity circumscribed by powerful market forces which should play a more significant role in shareholder protection than governmental or regulatory intervention.  For leading works on the economic theory of corporations, sec supra, notes 7-8. Prof. Cheffins argues that the economic approach despite the apparent opposition to the entity approach, provides strong theoretical support for the Memorandum and Articles approach to corporate law. Under this approach which was developed in England, the Memorandum and Articles are viewed as a contract both between the members of the corporation and between the members and the corporation. See Chr 'tins, supra, note 9 at 784.  n n ri, n1 j n n' 1 n u u u u ' u. I >C ~u  53  II: The Theory of the Firm The theory of the firm explains the methods of carrying out economic activities within a market economy. Two basic methods of economic coordination in the market economy are the market coordination and firm coordination.  Market coordination  involves the direction of production decisions by the price system manifested by specific contracts while firm coordination involves the direction of production decisions by the firm. Firm coordination entails the use of hierarchical decision making methods in production processes instead of market contracts.  The. management organizes,  coordinates and monitors the production process within the firm.104 A major contribution of economists has been their explanation of how an economic activity could be more conveniently carried on by means of the firm rather than t y contracting in the market. The first economist to develop the modern theory of the firm was Coase. 105 He pointed out that the firm and trading in the market were essentially  devices for coordinating  economic activity  with the distinguishing  characteristic of the firm being the suppression of the price mechanism within its area of activity. He explained that the adoption of the firm was as a result of an effort to reduce the transaction costs of market coordination.  The cost includes the effort to  discover the various market priGes and the.costs of negotiating the many contracts with suppliers of services and commodities.  .  Many other factors which affect the cost of carrying on business through market coordination could be minimized where the business is carried on through the firm. Parties may behave opportunistically by pursuing their own self interest and where J04  See Butler, supra, note 8, at 103.  105  See supra, note 7.  these risks are high, the firm presents a way of reducing them as members of the firm are better placed to monitor each'other's behavior.  Furthermore, human limitations  inhibit their capacity to draft contracts covering all future contingencies.  This  obviously reduces the utility of the contracts, The cost of contracting may be expensive and thus exceed the benefits to be derived therefrom. These problems are avoided or minimized when an activity is carried on by the firm because of its ability to adjust to contingencies. While Coase focused on the factor of transaction costs as determinants for the development of firms, Alchian and Demsetz 106 took the issue a little further. They analyzed the issue of the shirking and information problems of team production in a firm. They developed a framework for explaining how the nature of the production process affects the type of organization and the internal organization of the firm. They observed that the firm emerged as a response to the benefits of team production and that in team production, marginal products of cooperative team members are not so directly and separably observable.  What a team offers to the market can be taken as  the marginal product of the team but not of the team members. They conceded that the benefits of team production has transaction costs based on the impossibility of monitoring the marginal productivity of individual members in allocating pro-rata rewards and some take advantage of this. But they assert that as long as the productive efficiency of the team outweighs the shirking costs, the firm continues to grow. The members of the team hire the manager to monitor their behavior in order to enhance team productivity. These individual team workers in the firm submit to the manager's commands voluntarily because of the shirking problem. Thus the role of the manager is to monitor the production process, coordinate team production and discourage shirking by linking compensation to productivity. 106  A.A. Alchian and H. Demsetz, "Production Information Costs and Economic Organization", (1972) 62 Am. Econ. Rev. 777.  55  The authors sought to determine who will monitor the monitor. They found the answer in the creation of automatic built-in voluntary incentives to monitor well.  A  most effective method is to give residual rewards, that is the ownership of net earnings, less payments to the other inputs. 107  This will give the monitor a great incentive to  check the shirking of firm participants. If there are multiple owners, many of who do not engage in the monitoring business, the monitoring manager cannot receive the entire residual. The greater his rewards are tied to profits, however, the greater will be his incentive to monitor well. Another method is to develop methods by which outside rival monitors will be rewarded if they replace inefficient incumbent monitors. Another method is to increase the competition within fi-ms for the top monitoring jobs.  Ill: The Economic. Structure of Closely -held Corporations Closely-held corporations have relatively few managers who tend to be the largest residual claimants. Because the principal investors in these corporations are also its managers, it is often necessary to restrict the members' ability to alienate their shares. Such restrictions may increase the likelihood of compatibility of ideas amongst the managers. It ensure retention of control, especially where the corporation arises as a family venture. This also reduces opportunistic conduct among the managers. Restrictions on alienations and the apportionment of jobs are important when the corporation distributes profits, in the form of salads instead of dividends. This has tax consequences because salaries are usually tax deductible. From its very nature, the closely-held corporation lacks the benefit of specialization. few managers.  The same people manage and bear the risk of investment. There are Furthermore, the members have great percentages of their wealth  invested iri the corporation and they lack access to capital markets. ]07  ibid.  They are less  56  efficient risk bearers than their counterparts in the widely-held corporation who usually diversify a greater proportion of their investment portfolio. 108 However, the lack of specialization has advantages.  Because the number of  participants is usually small and the both manage and bear the costs of their action^ there is every likelihood that each will be compatible with the other. Everything being equal, managers with large percentage of the corporation's shares will work harder and engage in less self-dealing than their counterparts in the widely-held corporation^ Furthermore, the relatively small number of residual claimants in the closely-heKl corporation facilitates contracting and monitoring which reduces agency cost.  .  Most closely-held corporations arise out of familial or other personal relations. 109 Economic analysts argue that the continuous and non-pecuniary nature of the relationship reduces agency problems. The bond between parents and children, for example, reduces conflicts of interests."' Shareholders in the closely-held corporations lack access to a public market for the liquidation of their investments. Traditional corporate law scholars argue that the absence of the market often results in a risk of exploitation and oppression of the minority by the majority shareholders. This may force the minority to sell their shares at a distress price. Commenting on this illiquidity problem, Bahls pointed out that: ". . . majority shareholders frequently have monopsony power . . . to the extent that the majority shareholder is the only buyer, minority 108  109  110  But if the closely-held corporation is a relatively small one without large-business operation and no need for specialized experts or big capital, then it has a comparative advantage. See Easterbrook and Fischel, "Close Corporations and Agency Costs", (1986), 38 Stanford Law Review, 213,214. Easterbrook & Fischel, supra note J08. Although a great proportion of closely-held corporations arise out of purely business relations. Easterbrook & Fischel, (supra) points out that some of the famous cases dealing with closelyheld 'corporations!nvolvc situations where these informal bonds have broken down as a result of death or divorce - see, e.g., Galler v. Galler (1964) 32 111. 2d. 16, 203 N.E. 2d. 577; In Radom & Vidorff, Inc. (1954) 307 N.Y. 1, 119 N.E. 2d. 563. See also In re Lundie Brothers l td. (1965) 1W.I .U. 1051.  57 shareholders seeking to sell their shares are not able to find other bidders when the majority shareholders hold out for an unreasonably low purchase price . . . . In the case of close corporations, the majority shareholder has no incentive to purchase the minority shareholders' stock for a price greater than the discounted value of the future stream of payments to which the minority shareholder is otherwise entitled, phis the transaction costs of dealing with a minority shareholder on an , ongoing basis." 1 1 1  i  The lack of capital market for trading in the securities of the closely-held corporation may affect the ittvesfor in many ways. In the first place, it may negate the idea of reliance on the stock market as a monitoring device. mechanism  112  The takeover  which helps to align management interest with that of the shareholders in  the widely-held corporation lias no application to the closely-helr) corporation.  In  closely-held corporations where the ability of outsiders to acquire chares is restricted, the market for corporate, control is insignificant in creating an incentive towards 'corporate management efficiency. Lack of securities market for shares ol closely-held corporations prevents uniformed investors from acquiring information concerning the relative strength and 'price oh the shares of the corporation,  frby  buyers and sellers compete to acquire  information about public corporations, ihe competition and ensuing trading cause the price of securities to reflect reasonably well the available information about their value,' 1-1  TJiis provides  the. management  wWi incentives to make. credible  commitments to potential investors to reduce Ibrjjr rational fears.  Thus while an  investor m a widely-held corporation is afforded the advantage of purchasing-the shares at the market price, the reverse is the case with (he investor in the closely-held corporate because these is no market pries.  ' 11? 113  Buhls, "Resolving Shcie'ir-ider Distension: Selreticn of the Appropriate Equitable Remedy", (1999). fpKmal of Corp. Law 201. ForrtjscH5.--«oocm the takeover mtx&amsra and Ihe nurtetforcorporate control,' see.below. See Gilsor; X.: Kiaahrmn, "The Mechanism of Mai U t Efficiency", (1984) 70 Va. L. Rev. 549; EasterbrocikfitRwlisi, stipra-  58  Furthermore, the absence of securities market makes the valuation of residual claims uncertain and difficult to obtain.  Unavailability of market prices and the  existence of contractual restrictions on the possible buyers makes the transfer of shares more difficult by high transaction costs.  Easterbrook and Fischel point out that a  shareholder willing to liquidate his interests faces costly haggling which sometimes frustrates such attempt. Absence of securities markets may create problems over dividend policy and other distributions.  The future stream of payments usually expected by a minority  shareholder consist of four components - dividends, liquidation proceeds, court-ordered payments and salaries (where he is employed by the corporation).  In closely-held  corporations where the payment of dividends is adopted as a profit sharing mechanism, the directors may allow either no dividends or relatively small dividends. And where the corporation is in the habit of retaining a large proportion of its profits instead of declaring them as dividends, an investor who wishes to obtain immediate cash loan on the collateral of his share interest may find himself in a difficult situation. Lenders will be hesitant and unwilling to do so. The only alternative for such an investor may be to sell his interest to the corporation or other shareholders usually at a discount.  His  counterpart in the widely-held corporation would not envisage such difficulties. His ability to make use of the exit process enables him to sell his shares in the secondary market,-thereby eliminating the use of retention ..of earnings as a weapon against the minority interests. 114 Notwithstanding the difficulties created by the lack of securities market for trading in the shares of the closely-held corporation, economic analysis suggests that i't is a mistake to conclude that the shareholders face unique risks of oppression. Rather, it is more' helpful to appreciate the agency problems in the corporation and the 114  For further discussion, see Fischel, "The Law and Economics of Dividend Policy", (1981) 67 Va. L. Rev. 699.  ..-  - r"  ^ -• —  -._•?. . -rf-  --i*.  -'--'•-*  •*r  1 - M" f ------  -^y^iiagrt f * -fiSi-nr-a^MrAi •Tr-^^V'ww jStf^a "L.tF-^  59  mechanisms that have developed to control them. This leads us to an examination cf the governance mechanisms.  Governance and Corporation:  Contractual Monitoring Mechanisms in  the  Closely-held  Shareholders in most corporations are usually concerned about the likelihood that the actions of others'" corporation is no exception.  may reduce their rate of return.  The closely-held  Economic analysis suggests that the corporation is best  viewed as essentially founded on private contract among the participants to the nexus of contracts. The management usually have an' incentive to adopt governance mechanisms that respond to the shareholders' concern and allay their fears. Closely-held corporations do not separate management from risk bearing. Monitoring is less costly when compared with the position in the widely-held corporations. Outsiders have less incentive to monitor managers. However, the lack of separation gives rise to the adoption of other types of governance mechanisms. Shareholders in closely-held corporations usually adopt contractual monitoring devices such as the shareholders' agreements as planning devices in dispute prevention and resolution.  These agreements may be oral or written.  But many important  advantages attach for reducing all aspects of the shareholders' bargain into writing. In the first place, written agreements enable the shareholders to digest and appreciate the ramifications of the proposed arrangements more carefully and make decisions on issues which otherwise might escape their attention and remain undecic!?d. Secondly, the existence of written documents minimizes the chance of misapprehension and increases the probability that the shareholders will voluntarily comply with the terms of the agreement/ In the words of O'Neal, "a bargain in writing has a psychological  Especially those in the management group.  '1 '« , 1 t IISiSiiiSvifiSB  *  , >,  ,. I  <  n ri n n " u u u < U iC i  60  effect on the parties and tends to reduce disputes, unfounded claims, squeeze plays and litigations". 116 Contractual arrangements enable shareholders in the closely-held corporation to define the course of conduct of the business of the corporation.117 Such arrangements also make up for the lack of control over corporate affairs which the minority shareholders are usually subject to. Shareholders' agreements enable the participants to depart from the traditional corporate management framework and agree among themselves on how control of the corporations should be allocated. The aim of the minority shareholders in this regard usually is to obtain membership on the board of directors, some voice in the management of the corporation and protection against the power vested in the majority. The use of the shareholders' agreements touches upon the realm of what could be described as corporate marriage and divorce. The marriage is the welding together of the parties are shareholders while an aura of optimism and enthusiasm prevails.  It  also provides a means of separation which is as certain and as simple as possible should the corporate love fail and turn into antipathy and distrust. Shareholders' agreements provide for some of those matters that are likely to require agreement by the shareholders at some time during the formation of the corporation; its corporate life and termination. 118 116  117  118  Hodge O'Neal, "Oppression of Minority Shareholders: Protecting Minority Shareholders" (1987)35 Clev. S.L.R. 121 at 12.4. Easterbrook & Fischel point out that the restriction on the power of members to alienate shares ensures that those who invest are compatible as managers. The restriction usually prcscn cs nil agreed on division of profits. Thus, if an active manager resigns or quits his job, it may be. necessary to transfer his shares as well. Similarly., when he retires or becomes incapable of performing his duties by reason of death, he or his personal representatives cannot continue to receive the salary component of the profit from the business. Buy out agreements address these problems of illiquidity. . Apple, "Shareholders' Agreements", (1986) Special Lectures of the Law Society of Upper Canada.  a  Management and other provisions which might be included in the shareholders' agreements to help prevent disputes leading to squeeze-out of the minority shareholders and safeguard the interests of all parties include the following: 119 (a)  specified shareholders or their nominees shall constitute the board of directors;  (b]  salaries of officers and key employees shall not be changed except by unanimous consent of the shareholders;  (c*  whenever the corporation's surplus exceeds a specified sum, dividends in the amount of the excess share be paid to the shareholders; dividend agreements which require the corporation to pay dividends if the corporate treasury has a certain amount of funds serve the same function'  (d'  each shareholder is to be employed in a key position by the corporation at a specified salary. 120  Employment and compensation agreements also make it  difficult for those in control to act without the consent of minority shareholders. Agreements to keep people in office enable those not in control to get some return on their investments, (e  a shareholder shall not transfer his shares until he has first offered them to the corporation and to the other shareholders;  (f)  each shareholder or each of specified shareholders shall have the power to veto some or all corporate decisions;  (g)  -disputes among the .shareholders shall first be submitted to arbitration for settlement.  The shareholders' agreement may also set out the rights, duties and responsibilities of the parties in emoisngmatmgement functions.  "  119  H.O. O'Neal, Close Corporations, Vol .1 (1958).  120  This may however be practicable only where there are very few shareholders.  If Other Contractual Services (a)  Lone Harm Employment Contracts Minority shareholders often protect themselves against being deprived of  I a  employment with the corporation either as senior officers or otherwise, by insisting on .  long-term employment contracts.  By this method, they enter into contract with the  corporation and not with other shareholders.  QRm, the contract might include  provisions for severance pay or liquidated damages in the event the corporation breaches the contract, 121  (b)  High Voting Requirement for Fundamental Corporate Acts Another effective contractual monitoring mechanism is to include in the Articles  of Association or by-laws a provision requiring unanimity or a high vote for shareholderand director action. Such a provision gives the minority shareholder a veto over corporate decisions. To obtain sufficient protection for the minority shareholder, "special resolution" for the corporation may be redefined to amount to "unanimous" consent of the shareholders. This provides the desired security for the minority. But, it may have some negative effects on reducing the power of the corporation to act and may be detrimental from a business viewpoint.  Validity of the Contractual Mechanisms The validity of the contractual mechanism which attempts to determine some of the above-mentioned matters is open to question because it seems to take away from the 121 Of course, even where the shareholder is employed as an officer under a contract of employment, the corporation has power to remove him without cause. However, his removal without cause shall be without prejudice to his contractual rights. See S. 157(5) B.C.C.A. See also Shindler v. Northern Raincoat Co. Ltd. (1960) 2 All E.R. 239; Read v. Astoria Garage (Streatham) Ltd. (1952) 1 Ch. 637, Southern Foundries (1926) Ltd. v. Shirlaw (1940) A.C. 701.  n n n n"  U*U  U U  U  n , n I. 0  U  &£• Ar Jui  1 — h - M  <1 A.*?  —*  J.'"  V~  "  '.  '•  63  directors important decision-making powers traditionally within their province.  Courts  once viewed unusual contractual devices in closely-held corporations with suspicion. Many early decisions were hostile towards private arrangements, including restraints cn alienation,  voting  agreements, 122  and  agreements limiting  the  discretion  of  directors. 123 Most attacks on shareholders' agreements are based on the premise that they isolate a statutory provision conferring the power of management on the directors or that they are incompatible with the scheme of corporation management and operation established by the Act.  The most frequently used provision is the section which  provides that the business of a corporation shall be managed by its board of directors. 124 The decisions invalidating shareholders' agreements cn the ground of their inconsistency with statutory provisions or with a scheme of corporation management supposedly fixed by the statute create grave problems for investors in the closely-held corporation who usually have the task of evolving suitable corporate structures for their businesses.  A corporation from an economic view is, after all, a nexus of contracts  which enables the participants to work out a corporate form that maximizes their expectations. Their expressed intentions and agreements which is reduced into writing  JTT 123  124  See, e.g., Bostwick v. Chapman (Shepaag Voting Trust Cases) (1890) 60Conn. 553, 24 A.32. See, e.g., McQuade v. Stoneham (1934) 263 N.Y. 323 189N.E. 234. The court in this case held invalid an arrangement between a majority shareholder and two minority shareholders entered into at the time. Section 102 C.B.C.A. expressly makes the powers of directors to manage the corporation subject to the unanimous shareholders' agreement. This obviously removes any potential attack on the validity of shareholders' agreements as constraints on the powers of directors. In Section 142 B.C.C.A., the power of directors is made subject lo any provision in the Articles or the Act. Thus, an express provision in the Articles could validly restrict the managerial powers of the directors. However, such provision is often altered and ,this has the effect of. practically removing the utility of the shareholders' agreements. But under the B.C.C.A., it may be possible to use the technique of incorporation by reference to make the shareholders' agreement a part of the Articles to which the directors' power would be subject.  *> T V  64  should be the focal point of attention.  Courts should pay much regard to such terms  expressed by the sharehoiderswh'o, it could be asserted, are in a better position than the law makers to express what they want. Courts should help to facilitate the contracting process by giving interpretation to the expressed intentions of the shareholders except where such a course would work manifest injustice or hardship on third parties or outsiders to the contractualarrangements. The application of the Acts should be focused more towards the protection of shareholders and investors in the widely-held corporations where there is considerable separation of management from ownership and a real danger to the investing public. If the purpose of the statutory sections 125 rather than their literal language is allowed to control their application, they will not be applied to invalidate shareholders' agreements in closely-held corporations, at least where all the shareholders are parties. The effect of applying the statutory provisions to shareholders' agreements in the closely-held corporation may be to give the shareholders a protection that they do not need and to hinder them in the operation of their business by making it improbable for them to mold or choose a corporate firm that best maximizes their reasonable expectations. Today, courts enforce voluntary agreements of all sorts among investors in closely-held corporations.  In .Qarke v. Dodge. 1 2 6 the court enforced an agreement  specifying that a minority shareholder be continued in officeand receive one-fourth of net income as salary or dividends.  Similarly, in .Galler v. Galler. 127 the Supreme  Court of Illinois upheld a shareholders' agreement providing for salary and dividend 125  • . . Which, according to the economic approach'to corporate law is to act as standard form contract touching on those areas that the parties would have provided for, had they adverted their minds to them.  126  (1936) 269 N.Y. 410, 199 N.E. 641.  127  (1964) 32 111. 2d. 16, 203 N.E. 2d. 577.  65  payments to the shareholders themselves as well as to their immediate families despite the death of an original signatory." Other courts have upheld agreements that provide for the use of arbitrators or other third parties to break deadlocks 128 and restraints on alienation.129 In English law, collateral contracts among shaieholde-s governing the voting of their shares have been held to be valid. 130 It must, however, be restricted to building the shareholders qua shareholders and not in any other capacity, 131 for example, as directors. Where an agreement is held to be valid, its effect is invaluable in structuring the management of the corporation, as a remedy for breach of the agreement is specific In Ringuet v. Bergeron. 132 an agreement among three shareholders  performance.  provided for forfeiture of the shareholdings of any member in breach of the agreement. When two of the three shareholders did, in fact, breach the agreement, the court ordered that their shareholding be forfeited to, and taken over, by the third member who had relied on the agreement. The usual requirements of a valid contract - for example, notice of the terms, absence of prejudice to third parties, - apply to corporate agreements. restrictions  11"  on  alienation  generally  must  be  noted  conspicuously  Contractual on  share  Set, e.&,Lehrmanv. Cohen (1966) 43 Del. Ch. 222,222A. 2d. 800. " Colbert v. Hennessy (1966) 351Mass. 131,217N.E. 2d. 914; Allen v. Biltmorc Tissue Corp. (1957) 2 N.Y. 2d. 534, 141N.E. 2d, 812; Edmonton Country Oibv. Case (1975) 1 S.C.R. 534.  m  PuddephaiAv. Leith, (1916) 1 C.A. 200. Motherwell  Schoof (1949) 4 D.L.R. 812.  (1960) S.C.R. 672. See also Hornby v. Nugent (198?) B.C.S.C. - compulsory buyout clause in a shareholders' agreement entitling a shareholder upon giving written notice to have his share bought out by the other shareholders held to be enforceable.  66  certificates. 133  Shareholders' agreements even if unanimous may be invalidated if  prejudicial to creditors. 134  The Economic Structure of Widely-Held Corporations An extensive body of economic literature has developed over tlve last twentyfive years explaining how the various terms of the corporate contract address agency problems in the widely-held corporations.  This literature refutes the 1932 claim by  Berle and Means that managers control widely-held corporations and are free to operate these corporation sin their own interests rather than those of the shareholders.  Under  the Berle and Means view, the widely-held corporation is a trap for helpless shareholders and therefore an appropriate subject of legal regulation. Economic analysis suggests, however, that managers are actually constrained by an identifiable network of incentive, bonding and monitoring devices to exercise their discretion in the shareholders' interests. 135  Diffused ownership of shares in widely-  held corporations may enhance greater specialization among shareholders. Inefficient decisions by managers may induce the better informed owners to react sooner and more adequately, selling some or all of their shares and thereby lowering the stock market price and the cost of taking over the corporation. Corporate law and economic analysts point out that diffusion of share ownership in the widely-held corporation does not leave managers so autonomous or independentgiventhe constraints supplied by market forces which compel the managers to act in the shareholders' interests. 133  134 135  See Section 51 (l)(e) B.C.C.R. See Galler v. Galler, supra, note 170. In fact, economic analysts are highly critical of the Berle and Means thesis. Louis de Alessi, for example, observed that the Berle and Means thesis rested entirely on faith and on data i-dlccting increased diffusion of share ownership with no empirical evidence regarding the validity of the consequences alleged to follow from such diffusion. "Priwse Property and Dispersion of Ownership in Large Corporations", (1973) 28 J. Fin. 839, at 851.  67  Before discussing those market forces and contractual devices, it may be necessary to examine the economic implications of the separation phenomenon and agency problems in the widely-held corporation.  Separation of Ownership from Control and Agency Problems in the Widely-held Corporation Management and risk bearing in the widely-held corporation are separate. Managers' incentives to act efficiently may thereby bs weak because they neither bear the cost nor reap the benefits of their actions.  Moreover, it may be difficult for  shareholders to monitor managers' behavior. However, economists argue that the widely-held corporation takes its peculiar organization structure because it is the best method of attracting large amounts of capital with a minimum of agency costs. The shareholders invest capital and directors and other senior officers monitor the productivity of the employees and coordinate the inputs of labor and capital into the corporation.  The widely-held corporation comes  into existence as a result of the desire of investors to entrust their money to skilled managers. It is the consequence of the desire of the large institutional investors who have no ability or urge to manage to put their finances in the hands of expert corporate officers. The centralized control t y the senior management is as a result of the need to minimize shirking and agency costs. 136 Separation of ownership from control may be necessary to maximize managerial efficiency in the corporate firm. Investors therefore desire the management to 135 Alchian & Demsetz, supra, note 106, pointed out that if every share owner participated in each decision in a corporation, not only would large bureaucratic costs be incurred, but many would shirk the task of becoming well informed on the issue to be decided, since the losses associated with unexpectedly bad decisions will be borne in large part by the many other corporate shareholders. More effective control of corporate activity is achieved for most purposes by transferring decision authority to a smaller group whose function is to negotiate with and manage the other inputs of the team. The corporate shareholders retain the authority to revise the membership of the management group and over major decisions that affect the structure of the corporation or its dissolution.  68  maximize their welfare to the same extent as would the shareholders themselves if they managed the corporation.  But ah important concern may shirk and engage in self-  interested behavior and other forms of dishonesty. In fact, there exists great potentials for conflicts of interests between shareholders and managers. Such conflicts may arise from the fact that while one of the shareholders' objectives is that the corporation maximizes its per-share earnings, maximization of per-share earnings may not be the sole and often, not even the primary objective of the manager.  Included in his  objectivesis monetary compensation. But non-financial objectives may constitute more important objectives. In the first place, there may be the desire for personal power and prestige.  These objectives may bear heavily on structural changes because they may  lead management to engage in expansion through amalgamation or otherwise for its own sake rather than for the sake of maximizing per-share earnings of the shareholders. 137 Another non-financial objective may be the managerial tendency to identify with the enterprise and the desire for security.  Enterprise identification and a desire for  security may lead management to oppose corporate liquidations or amalgamations even though the shareholders' interests might be best served by such an action.  Corporate  managements seldom consider liquidation an alternative to unprofitable operations. The chief executive who has been long with his company rebels against the idea of 'his' firm's passing out of existence. 138  137  .  _  R.A. Gordon in "Business Leadership in the Large Corporation, 305-316 (Calif, ed. 1961) described this trend when he stressed that "one of the most important of the non-financial incentives offered by the large corporation is the opportunity to satisfy the urge for personal power . . . [the executives] power is a product of position rather than of personal wealth . . .. The corporation is the vehicle through which power comes to be held and exercised. . . . Widely-held corporations can also offer prestige over and above that which results from the executives' receipt of a large salary and bonus. Power itself brings prestige, as does the mere fact of heading a large and successful firm." Ibid, at .ill*.  69  Cn the other hand, management may recommend an amalgamation with another corporation or a disposition of substantial assets to such a corporation because of benefits which are promised to management t y way of employment contracts and the like. Henry Manne argues that: "When we find (management) recommending (such) a change it is generally safe to assume that some side payment is occurring . . . . The most obvious kind of side payment to managers is a position within the new structure either paying a salary eir making them privy to valuable market information. This arrangement, easily established with mergers, can looklike normal business expediency, s i c e the argument can always be made that the old management provides continuity and a link with past experienceof the corporation. Jensen in his seminal work 140 also identified some of the conflicts between managers and shareholders in the corporate firm as including tfee following: (a)  Non-payment of Dividends: Risk aveiSC managers may prefer to re-invest their firm's profits in the firm rafter than distribute them to shareholders even though the shareholders could put Ihem to a more productive use.  (b)  Risk Aversion: Managers in widely-held corporations tend to avoid bankruptcy at all costs but shareholders with diversified investments are risk neutral with regard to individual securities in their investments. Here, the manager's interest will be more aligned with that of creditors than the shareholders unless corrective governance mechanisms are adopted,  (C)  Horizon: This conflict refers to the issue cf how to encouragp a manager to act in the shareholders' interests as the manager approaches retirement or prepares • to leave the firm for other opportunities.  Manne, "Mergers and the Market for Corporate Control", (1965) 73 J. l'ol. Et on. 110, at 118. In England, this is some times called the "golden handshake". Jensen, "Agency Costs of Free Cssh Flow: Corporate Finance and Takeovers", (1986) 76 Am. Econ. Rev. 323. A list of conflicts between managers and shareholders may not be exhaustive but it serves as a reference point for discussing the roles of different corporate governance mechanisms that control corporate agency costs.  ""•^•••tYv. vvA;*'.; ,r,i'  ., un LI.n un un -  n 1 U '1 0 i,  j 1  l^MMMSiiSSM.  70  (d)  Effort:  This is a primary concern of the agency theory and the separation  . phenomenon in Ihe widely-held corporation.  The question is whether  entrenched managers have Ihe incentives to maximize their efforts in pursuing the maximum rate of return for shareholders. Corporate law and economic analysts recognize these potential conflicts but argue that most of them are solved by competitive forces that align the manager's interests with that of the shareholders. This theoretical economic approach which his called the agency theory suggests that unity of ownership and control is not a necessary condition of efficient performance of a corporation. voluntary, contractual nature of the corporation.  This view emphasizes the  A corporation's managers141 are  agents of the shareholders. In this perspective, the separation of ownership and control in the widely-held corporation is an agency relationship which exists because the benefits of the relationship exceeds the agency costs associated v th it. The agency theory explores institutional devices that enable shareholders voluntarily to allow managers to control their resources.  The resources devoted lo  controlling agency costs are equally identified as agency costs. 142 Managers select the least cost manner of controlling agency costs.  Governance Mechanisms in the Widely-Held Corporation Much literature which- exist on the economic analysis of_ the widely-held corporation reflect the examination of governance mechanisms that maximize the shareholders' expectations and align the management's interests with that of the shareholders. Professors Fama and Jensen observed that "absent fiat, the form of 141 Which are defined to include its officers and directors. 142 Agency costs thus include not only the direct costs associated with agents acting in their own interests at the expense of shareholders, but also the costs of controlling managerial agents through legal or market governance arrangements. See Butler, "The Contractual Theory of the Corporations" (19S9), 11 Geo. Mason Univ. Law. Rev. 99 at 110.  71  organization that survives in an activity is the one that delivers the product demanded t y customers at the lowest price while covering costs". 143 If the view is taken that the widely-held corporation exists as a result of the desire of the shareholders to entrust their capital to the managers, then the separation phenomenon shoold be seen as an advantage rather than a p." sblem. Most shareholders in the widely-held corporation do not have the time, knowledge, experience or desire to manage corporations whereas officers and directors are skilled in managing businesses. Economic oriented corporate law scholars argue that managers assume their roles with knowledge of the consequences, investors part with their money willingly. Managers obtain their positions after much trouble and toil competing against others who desire the same positions.  Corporations must attract customers and investors by  piomising and delivering what these people value. Corporations that do not do so will not survive. The key point lies in identifying some of the ways in which competition induces managers to act in the interest of the shareholders.  The identification of the  competitive forces and the appreciation of their interaction represents the contractual theory of ihe corporation.  The corporation manifests a voluntary contract and the  realities of the agency relationship presupposes that the managers select contractual terms that are offered to potential investors. Some of the governance mechanisms in the widely-held corporation include the following:  I.  Market for Corporate Control: Berle and Means depicted the widely-held corporation as a static institution and  posited that the managers have control and retain it. The powerless shareholders accept the crumbs that managers hand out.  Fama & Jensen, "Separation of Ownership and Control", (1983), 26 J. Law & Econs. 301.  72  Economic analysis suggests that one important element omitted t y Berle and Means is the competition among the team of managers to have control of the corporation. Economists argue that 1he corporate control contest is the direct answer to the agency cost problem inherent in the separation phenomenon.  The free market for  control and management operates to limit management dereliction of responsibility. Modem investment portfolio theory teaches individual and institutional investors to diversify their investments in many corporations and to hold the shares as long as the market price of the shares rises or does not fall.  When a corporation is run on a  profitable basis, the price of its shares will be high relative to comparable firms that are less efficiently run. 1 4 4  The inefficiency, incompetency, or dishonesty of a  corporation's management will directly affect the price of the corporation's shares thereby decreasing it. The market for corporate control may reconcentrate ownership t y making use of the safeguard built into the shares when they were issued.  The shares are freely  transferable and carry voting rights that allow their owners to take control. Shareholders in widely-held corporations may decide to sell their shares at the first manifestation of significant management dishonesty or incompetency. 145  Where this  happens, the result of the exit process is that the shares of poorly managed corporations trade at a discount below a level that could be attained with more competent and honest managers.  The corporation- becomes vulnerable to outsiders and. corporate raiders  seeking to acquire corporate control and who believe that they ~ os®s the ability to 144 The difference in the price of shares is a direct consequence of the Efficient Capital Market Hypothesis which states that all information which is publicly available about a firm is rapidly reflected in the linn's share price. l or a discussion on this theory and substantial empirical verification and evidence supporting it, see Easterbrook & Fischel, "The Proper Role of a Target's Management in Responding to a Tender Offer", (1987) 94 Harv. L. Rev. 1161; 116568. See also R. Brealey & S. Meyers, Principles of Corporate Finance (3d. ed. 1988). 145  Although shareholders may use their voting shares to wage proxy battles with the aim of changing management, this may be an expensive strategy, the cost of which may outweigh any possible benefit to the shareholders with relatively small holding in the particular corporation.  manage the corporate more efficiently than the incumbent managers. Thus viewed, an issue of voting shares by a widely-held corporation may be a bonding technique to reduce agency costs. Corporate raiders acquire the shares usually at a substantial premium over their market price but the premium is paid in the belief that as a result of their superior management, the price will rise to a level in excess of the premium,  Economic  analysts therefore argue that the constant pressure provided by the threat of a takeover probably plays a larger role in tne successful functioning of the corporate system.  It  conditions managers to a specific point of view perfectly- consistent with the shareholders' interests to wit; keeping the price of the corporation's shares as high as possible. 146 Butler points out that the role of the market for corporate control in the governance of the modem corporation is not based on some mystical or ideological belief in the power of the market forces' but rather it is supported by numerous empirical studies 147 and that the role of stock capital market in constraining corporate management may be viewed as one of the important steps in the application of economics to corporate law. From an economic perspective, the market for corporate control may be of great importance in creating incentives for management to maximize the welfare of shareholders. Incumbent managers acknowledge that-they will be subjected to a control 146  147  Henry Manne, supra note 139. The market for corporate cantrol operates in many different forms. The most dramatic is the takeover through a hostile tender offer. Others include friendly mergers, negotiated tender offers, sales of control by larger shareholders and pioxy contests. Henry Butler, supra, note 142 at 112. Notable empirical studies on the issue inuii'de: Jertjon & Ruback, "The Market for Corporate Control: The Scientific Evidence" (1983) 11 J. Pin. Econ. 5; Easterbrook & Fischel, "Managers' Discretion and Investors' Welfare: Theories and Evidence", (1984) 9 Del. J. Corp. Law 540; Jarrell, Brickley & Netter, "The Market for Corporate Control: The Evidence Since 1980, (1988) 2 J. Econ. Persp. 49.  74  contest if they do not act in the shareholders' interests. This knowledge induces them to behave appropriately.  II.  Corporate Executive Performance and Compensation: Corporate law economists assert that corporate compensationpackages are often  structured in a manner that solve most of the conflicts between managers and shareholders. Managerial salaries and other forms of compensation are often linked to how well the firm is performing. Compensation agreements may link changes in the manager's wealth to the performance of the firm. An ex-ante compensation strategy would seek to alleviate agency costs through incentive features in the compensation package offered to managers. Where managers are risk neutral and their efforts can be observed with certainty, the optimal compensation package would be one in which managers would absorb all variations of profits, becoming in effect, the holders of a position of the firm's residual value. They would then be expected to adhere to proper levels of care and to adopt investment policies which maximizes the firm's value. ' But a proper compensation package may be one in which the management and equity holders share firm'risk, even though such does not eliminate adverse incentive costs. This may necessitate the use of bonus strategies which, in addition to his direct salary, the manager is awarded further compensation if the firm is profitable. Fama points out that managers monitor each other's performance and reward achievements with bonuses and salary adjustments as a form of "ex-post settling up" that substantially alleviates incentive problems. 148 Becker and Stigler further observed that if managers  238  E. Fama, "Agency Problems and the Theory of the Firm", (1980) 88 J. Pol. Econ. 288, 295306.  75  enjoy favourable salaries or other forms of employment, they may be disciplined by the prospect of being  fired.149  Stock options and bonus plans used as incentives to managerial efficiency may alter the manager's time horizon.  Ill  Product Market Competition: Product market competition may constrain the divergence of interests between  managers and investors. It forces managers to maximize the profits of the corporation. Failure to do so results in the failure of the firm which may be costly for both the managers and shareholders. A firm that is inefficiently run will have difficulties selling goods and services on the same terms as more efficiently run firms. Where a firm does not have market power for its products, this will result in the failure to maximize profits and will be reflected in a below-average return on shareholders' investments. This makes the firm an attractive target for takeover.  IV.  Capital Structure: Jensen and Meckling in their seminal article 150 used agency problems and  monitoring of managers to identify the relevance of capital structure to the-value of a firm.  Corporation managers have an incentive to minimize their combined costs of  debt and equity capital because failure to do so would make them vulnerable to takeover. A high ratio of debt to equity restrains managers from retaining earnings beyond that which can be profitably reinvested by the corporation, thereby reducing the 149  15  '^  Becker & Stigler, "Law Enforcement, Malfeasance and Compensation of Enforcers", (1974) 3 J. Legal Stud. 1, 9-10. "Theory of the Firm: Managerial Behavior, Agency Costs and Ownership Structure", (1976) 3 J. Fin. Econ. 305.  n fi a n ' n n )j i u u 0 u u i i J  76  manager-shareholder conflict. A low ratio of debt to equity may restrain the managers from'engaging in projects that are too risky from the debtholders' position, thus addressing the shareholder-creditor conflicts.  V.  Markets for Management Corporate managers may reduce agency costs by improving on the performance  of the f b m A manager's future compensationpackage depends upon his reputation for efficiency and honesty. Managers compete with one another to attain the top positions in their corporations and most promotion decisions are made on the basis of an individual's productivity.  Shareholders benefit as managers attempt to climb the  corporate ladder by improving their productivity and impressing their superiors. Inefficient executives soon lose their j obs. Moreover, top-level managers often increase their salaries by jumping to other firms (or at least threatening to do so). 1 5 1 Thus, competition for managerial services both inside and outside the corporation encourages managers to act in shareholders' interests. 152  VI.  Corporate Hierarchy and the Board of Directors  -  -  Economic analysis suggests that recent developments in the economics of corporate hierarchy have helped to clarify the board's role as a monitor of managerial decisions. 153 The analysis takes the separation of ownership (residual risk bearing) and control (decision management) analysis one step further and looks at the specialization 151  Butler, supra, note 142 at 116.  152 '  . See, e.g., Faith, Higgins & Tollison, "Managerial Rents and Outside Recruitment in the Coasian Firm", (1984) 74 Am. Econ. Rev. 60. •  238  Williamson, "Organizational Form, Residual Claimants and Corporate Control", (1983) 26 J. Law & Econ. 351.  77  of functions by agents who control the corporation.  Theoretical contributions have  found a role for the board of directors. 154 The control of the corporation by agents is separated according to function whereby decision management (the initiation and implementation of strategic plans) is entrusted to senior managers and decision control (the ratification and monitoring of the strategy formulation and implementation process) is the domain of the board of directors. 155  Agency problems are reduced by tying  compensation to these specialized activities. Thus, unlike the Berle and lyfeais' perspective which views directors as pawns in the managers' hands, this view asserts that the role of directors is important to the control of agency costs and hence the long term survival of the corporation.  IV: Conclusion  Economic analysis allows us useful insights into corporate law problems and shareholder protection. Corporate law and economic analysts point out that free market and contractual devices play an important role in ensuring that the managers' interests are aligned with that of the shareholders.  The influence of economic-factors on  corporate law cannot be denied. -Contractual monitoring mechanisms" and shareholders' agreements in the closely-held corporation may condition tine atmosphere within the corporation into one that is conducive for the successful operation of the business. 154 155  They focus on those  Fama & Jensen, supra, note 143. That is, the management control functions are delegated to the board by the residual claimants and the board then delegates most decision management functions and many decision control functions to internal agents but it retains ultimate control over internal agents - including the right to ratify and monitor major policy initiatives and to hire, fire and set the compensation of top level decision managers.  n // n n • n i ij r P u u u • y • / _/  78  aspects of modem corporate life which often give rise to tensions and frictions. Courts may' therefore consider interpreting the corporate norms including the section providing that the business of the corporation shall be managed by its board of directors against the background of well known corporate facts of life. The conception of the board of a closely-held corporation as a body separate and apart from the shareholders with an y  unfettered independence and discretion in the conduct of corporate affairs m2y be regarded as a fiction which should not be permitted to becloud the real issue when a party to a business agreement tries to welch on his bargain. 156 In the widely-held corporation, shares are freely traded'and carry voting rights. This facilitates efficient risk bearing, accumulation of large blocks of shares and transfers of control while ensuring that management have incentive to maximize the value of the firm. Compensation agreements also link changes in manager's wealth to the performance of the firm. However, notwithstanding the adoption of these contractual mechanisms and the development of the economic approach to corporate law, it is still necessary that shareholders be offered the protection provided by the statutes. The use of contractual mechanisms may be inadequate to deal with all future contingencies which may give rise to difficulties and problems among the shareholders. They may be insufficient to constrain corporate management from misbehavior. Furthermore, the market forces do not work without costs and may be inadequate to deal with "one time divergence or other corporate management misconduct. The takeover mechanism for example, may  I  provide excessive leeway for managerial inefficiency because of the high transaction  I 1 I  costs imposed by the mechanics of takeover bids, the requirements of relevant statutes, 135 ; . . . . From an economic perspective, there is much to commend the approach of English judges, who are reluctant to interfere with actions taken in accordance with the corporate constitution.:. See Re Postage & Denby (Agencies) Ltd. (1987) BCLC 8 (Ch.D); Re a Company (No. 00437) (1987) BCLC 94. Canadian courts have been more inconsistent in their treatment of agreed upon terms. E.g., compare Bernard v. Montgomery (1987) 36 BLR 257 (Sask. QB) with Re Bury (1984) 12 DLR (4th) 451 (Ont. IIC).  •: .  79  the wide array of defensive tactics available to incumbent management, the incentives to takeover well run rather than poorly run corporations 157 and the time lag option experienced t y the public in ascertaining managerial efficiency. Another key empirical question bearing on the market for corporate acntral is how well acquiring corporations do after they buy other fimis. Notwithstanding the claim of stock market efficiency by Jensen and Ruback and others, 158 if one examines the large literature that traces back into the 1920s featuring the study t y Arthur Dewing 159 and 1930s (Shaw Livermore) 160 to the present, most investigations conclude that from the standpoint of the welfare of the shareholders of the acquiring corporation, acquisitions either damage them or are neutral in effect. 161 The uniform benefactors in mergers are the shareholders who sell out, especially i f they make an early and graceful exit from any security package which they may have acquired.  A study of British  experience published in 1981 t y Levine and Aaronovitch concluded that the evidence points to mergers "as strategic decisions not involving immediate economic or financial gains". 162 One aspect of such strategic thinking is the desire to become large.  Many large corporations have deliberately embarked on buying programs which focus on well managed and profitable targets. The conglomerate movements of the 1960s in US was frequently characterized by low-earnings-rate corporations, buying more profitable cnes. An example is the US Steel acquisition of Marathon Oil Corporation. The market havingfixedthe price on Marathon at about $60 a share, US Steel bought it shortly thereafter at S106. With Si record of only modest success in the steel business to which it h'jd been addressing itself foe many years, US Steel was explicitly unwilling Jo claim that it was going to manage the oil business better. ' . 158 159 160 161  Supra, note 147. Dewing, "A Statistical Test of the Success of Consolidation", (1921) 36 Q.J. Econ. 84. Livermore, "The Success of Industrial Mergers" (1935) 50 Q.J. Econ. 68. Mueller, "The Effects of Conglomerate Mergers: A Survey of Empirical Evidence", (1977) J. Bank & Fin. 315.  238 Levine & Aaronovitch, "The Financial Characteristics of Firms and Theories of Merger  Activity", (1981) 30 J. Indus. Econ. 149, 166.  80  Corporate legal rules and remedies are therefore important in inducing managers to act in the shareholders' interests. Contractual promises of faithful services may be worthless in the absence of these rules. Our next discussion focuses on the role of the corporation statutes.  8i  PART TWO CHAPTER FOUR THE ROLE OF CORPORATE STATUTES  Introduction; This chapter examines the role of corporate statutes.  It is divided into four  sections. Section I examines the role of corporate statutes as standard form contracts. The cocception of corporate statutes as standard form contracts emanates from the economic approach to corporate law which views the corporation as a legal fiction serving as a nexus for a complex set of explicit and implicit contracts existing among the participants in the corporate organization. According to this view, the proper role of corporate statutes should be to facilitate the contracting process. In other words, the corporate statutes should be seen as providing for the terms that the participants would have bargained for, in the absence of contracting costs. In this descriptive sense, these provisions and terms ought to be such that the parties could contract out of, if they choose. Section II examines the role of corporate statutes from the traditional conception of the corporation.  Under this approach, a corporation is viewed as a legal person  which possesses such povvers-as conferred on it by the charter of incorporation. This implies that state intervention in the corporation in the form of either regulation or the facilitation of shareholder protection may be inevitable. It is observed that while the primary role of corporate statutes is to enable the corporate participants to organize and operate their businesses, most corporate statutes contain some provisions which are non-variable. This is in recognition of the fact that within the corporation are many groups with competing interests.  It is therefore desirable to prescribe some non-  variable standards of corporate conduct to protect the interests of the weaker groups  n n h ri" n i y O u u u u .,.'. u I I I  82  (that is, minority shareholders) in the corporation. In this sense, corporate statutes do more than acting as standard form-contracts which provide terms that the parties are capable of contracting out of, if they desire. Section HI examines the main classifications of corporate law provisions. These fall into the general categorization of mandatory, presumptive and permissive ones. The classification is reflective of the fact that corporate statutes perform both mandatory and permissive/presumptive roles.  In its mandatory role, corporate law  prescribes non-variable minimum standards of corporate conduct, while in ill permissive or presumptive role, it enables participants either to adopt provisions in the statute or to substitute them with alternatives. Section IV offers some concluding remarks.  It is suggested that an ideal  corporate statute should first of all be an enabling Act since traditional corporate theofj makes it necessary that corporations obtain legislative sanction not only for thdr existence, but for their exercise of corporate powers.  Secondly, a corporate statute  should aim to restrict and regulate as well as to enable the conduct of  corpeffte  business. In fact, corporate statutes should perform mandatory and enabling roles?  l.  Corporate Statutes as Standard Form Centralis The contractual basis of the corporation has led some commentators writing  from an economic background to argue that the primary role of corporate law should bs to facilitate the contracting process. 163  The assumption is that participants in the  corporate contract are in a better position than the legislators or judges to make decisions regarding the manner in which the transactions will be deviced. The recognition of the ability of the participants to choose the contractual form that best maximizes their expectations implies that corporate law economists recognize 163  For example, J.A.C. Hetherington, 'Redefining the Task of Corporation Law", (1985) 19 USFR 229, 256-9; Butler, supra, note 8, 118-22.  83  the enforcementof expressly stated terms in intra-corporate contracts. But they do not focus solely on expressed terms-in the contract because intra-corporate bargains are never fully put down in writing. The costs of setting out a bargain in writing will, at some point, greatly exceed the benefits.  O'Neal and Thompson identify some of the  benefits to include clarifying the participants' assumptions concerning risk, reward and expected conduct increasing the likelihood of voluntary compliance and signalling to a dispute resolver how contentious matters are to be dealt with. 164 Ch the other hand, the costs of articulating the bargain in writing may be many, I i the first place, comprehending the contents of the agreement may he difficult because  imperfections  misunderstanding  165  in  information  and  communication  can  causd  and even in situations where the contents of the agreement could  be appreciated with some reasonable clarify; financial and other inputs must be used in setting out the agreement in writing. 166  For corporations with sub-optimal capital  financing, the consequences may he unfortunate. This may warrant the corporation in not using the services of a lawyer during the incorporation stage thereby going it alone or instructing a lawyer to incorporate as cheaply as possible. Adequate investment in legal planning may not even solve the problem of ensuring that the intra-corporate contract is Mty expressed in writing because it is practically difficult to commit into writing all clauses or bargains which can adequately deal with future contingencies-including, but not limited to changes in the legal and commercial environment and alterations in the assumptions and objectives of the  O'Neal and 3i"hompson, "Oppression of Minority Shareholders, 2a. ed. (Wilmette; III: Callaghan & Go. 1985) Chapter 8. See Cheffms; aapra, note 9, 784. D.D. Prentice suggests that substantial savings accrue to persons intending to start up business if they are able to acfip* a convenient pre-set legal form which is easily available especially if the package has been us&jS over times.  84  participants in the corporation.167 The problems are increased due to the fact that the risk of misinterpretation "by the courts increases when new formulations arc used. If the view is taken that the choice of the participants to the corporate contact prima facie leads to efficient solutions to corporate law problems, it then means that the obstacles to the contract should be reduced so that participants can come as close as possible to reaching the agreements that would have been formed through costless bargaining. 168 Contracting costs may be reduced through the use of standardized terms. The use of corporate terms enables parties to engage in fairly complicated exchange transactions without incurring high transaction costs. Just as the techniques of contract interpretation and warranty law economize on contracting costs by in effect writing into all contracts those provisions which the parties would probably have included if they had been willing to incur the time and information costs and had been able to foresee the future, coroorate statutes set out similar terms for the participants to the intracoiporate contact Furthermore, under the expanded choice theory, 169 corporate law can act as standard form contract that provides the participants with off the rack terms. Corporate law economists assert that participants under this approach choose whether-the terms provided by corporate law are to apply to the corporation. Whenever the standard form is suitable, they will likely adopt it, since using the preformulated terms should reduce the costs associated with negotiation and articulation.  If the standard form is not  appropriate, however, either in whole or in part, it can be displaced with express terms 167  Cheffins, Ibid, at 784.  168  Ibid, 787. Corporate statutes can alert the participants to the areas where negotiations should be considered. Prof. Cheffins refers to this as the signalling function of corporation statutes. See Cheffins, "US Close Corporation Legislation: A Mode! Canada Should Not Follow?, (1989) 35 McGillLJ. 160.  169  Supra, note 12.  85  that better represent the participants' bargain. 170 Corporate statutes supply these terms "for free" 171 to every corporation enabling the participants to concentrate on matters that are specific to their undertaking. Even when the parties work through all the issues they expect may arise in the course of the business, they are apt to miss something.  In a world of changing  commercial and legal environment, all sorts cf complexities will arise later. Corporate law fills in Hie blanks and oversights with the terms that people would have bargained for had they anticipated the problems and been able to transact costlessly in advance. Corporate law in this sense, supplements but does not displace'actualbargains. One merit of this is that the standard form becomes attractive to most corporations which in turn increases the cost savings to participants.  Secondly,  whenever contracting out is not considered by participants in the corporate contract, the standard form provides them with terms that would have been agreed to and that thus reflects their collective best interests.  II.  Traditional Role of Corporate Statutes The traditional corporate legal theory teaches us that a corporation is a legal  person, separate and distinct from its members, possessing only those powers conferred on it by its charter of incorporation.  This implies that state intervention in the  corporation in the form of either regulation or"the_facilitation of shareholder protection may be inevitable.  Certain basic questions however arise from this proposition.  Do  the legislators show the awareness of commercial values and priorities when they formulate the rules of corporate law? Is it of importance to the businessman of being able to get things done and done in the way he wants?  Is there reflected in the  170 Corporate law economic analysts argue that there are lots of terms such as rule for voting, establishing quorums and so on. '"  Easterbrook & Fischel, "The Corporate Contract", (1980) 89 Col. L. Rev. 1444.  86  principles of corporate law a proper concern to avoid delays, to keep costs down to stimulate innovation and facilitate-enterprise? Is there a willingness to let business get on with thejob? For the law to intervene no more than is strictly necessary? Modern corporate statutes in Canada may be described as attempts to furnish reasonable facilities for doing business and proper safeguards to creditors and shareholders. Much legislative progress have been made since the 1970's and 1980's in Canada towards well-drafted corporate statutes.  These improvements in the laws  regulating the corporate set up involved much study by legislative draftsmen and long sessions of reform committees. These workers aimed to formulate clear and concise provisions which would facilitate legitimate business transactions, eliminate arbitrary, harsh and unreasonable liabilities on shareholders and directors, and at the same time, safeguard the investor, the creditor and those dealing with the corporation. The task force which was charged with undertaking the review and formulating proposals for the reform of the Business Corporations Law of Canada said: "We set to design a scheme of law that is clear, workable and above all, written for the businessman who will operate under it; not for the corporation lawyer. Accordingly, the Act simplifies and codifies wherever possible. We have sought to eliminate the obsolete and anachronistic, and to remove the trivially arcane."172 More recently, the Ministry of Finance and Corporate-Relations Department of the province of British Columbia, in presenting its policy proposals and intentions towards a major revision of the Company Act 1985 stat'edlhat: "Government intention in the internal operations of the companies in general will be reduced to a minimum. The result should be increased efficiency of operations to the benefit of the entire community . . . . The Company Act simply provides the legal framework for companies and is an enabling rather than a regulatory statute. Regulatory issues such as the regulation of financial institutions, environmental regulations and the  :  Dickerson, Howard & Getz, Proposals for a New Business Corporation's Law of Canada (1971) Vol. 1, Para. II.  87 regulation of securities are addressed with specific policies legislation. " 1 7 Z  and  Every business association' necessarily has legal relations with a variety of groups, including its employees, customers, creditors and shareholders. In as much as its relation with employees and customers are little, if at all, affected by the fact that the association has assumed a corporate form, legislative regulation of these relations is ordinarily embodied in statutes other than business corporation acts. The same is true to some extent of the relations between a corporation and its creditors although the peculiar privilege of limited liability necessitates certain safeguards for creditors. 173 Shareholders unlike creditors have votes.  They or at any rate a majority of  them, can in theory depose any director or officer whose performance of his managerial functions fails to measure up to their conceptions of efficiency and integrity.  The  question arises therefore, whether the legislators should permit shareholders to invest their savings in corporate enterprise without inventing legal devices for their protection? Traditional corporate legal theory . suggests that because of the separation between ownership and control in the large modern corporation174 and because of the fluidity of contract rights under modern corporate Articles of Association and shareholders' agreements, no modern business corporation act can be regarded as satisfactory unless it provides substantial safeguards for the shareholders, particularly the minority shareholder. The non-controlling" shareholder needs legal protection with respect to certain corporate subjects. He needs effective enforcement of the fiduciary obligations of officers and directors. He needs to have voting rights equitably 172 Ministry of Finance & Corporate Relations, Province of British Columbia, Company Act Discussion Paper, January 1991. 173  Few- example, see S.258 B.C.C.A.; Sections 238-241 C.B.C.A.  174  Subsuming under that phrase both these cases in which a corporation is controlled by a minority and those in which a controlling majority has interests more or less antagonistic to those of the minority.  88  distributed. H e needs adequate restrictions on the funds which are legally available for dividends and for purchases of a corporation's own shares and effective means of enforcing their restrictions. He needs safeguards against abuse of the power to make organic changes in the structure of the enterprises by amendment, merger or consolidation.  Finally, he needs to be assured of adequate and readily available  information about the corporation's activities and the state of its finance.  Although  most of these issues could be taken care of, through adequate planning and contractual agreements, complexities may arise later.  Furthermore, parties may be unable to  foresee all areas likely to give rise to problems in the future. Contractual efficacy is impaired.  Again, reliance on the market forces for adequate protection will not  adequately produce an optimal solution to the agency problems inherent in the corporate form of organization, especially in the case of widely-held corporations. This is partly because the operation of some of the monitoring institutions and incentive mechanisms that seem theoretically desirable in a frictionless model is hindered by transaction costs such as the cost of acquiring information and the cost of contracting in the real world. Corporate statutes however achieve these protective purposes. Generally, they seek to facilitate the conduct of business through the corporate organization.  In this  respect, they reflect a non-regulatory policy in corporate affairs. Professor Ballantine who drafted the legislation for California in the 19-30's succinctly stated that: "The primary purpose (underlining is mine) of corporation laws is not regulatory. They are enabling Acts to authorise businessmen to organize and to operate their businesses, large or small, with the advantage of the corporate mechanism. They are drawn with a view to facilitate efficient management of business and adjustment to the needs of change". 175 Corporate statutes thus provide the legal frame and financial structure of the intricate corporate device by which business can be carried on and in- which the Ballantine on Corporations (1946) 41-42.  89  combined energies and the capital of the managers and of many investors may work together.  They deal with the internal affairs of the organization, the content of the  Articles of Association, the rights of the shareholders, the powers and liabilities of directors, the authorized number and variety of the shares, the holding of meetings, restrictions on corporate finance, such as the withdrawal of funds by way of dividends and share purchases, the corporate records, the authorization of organic changes such as amendments, sale of assets, merger and consolidation and dissolution and windingup. However, notwithstanding the primary enabling function of corporate statutes, sight should not be lost of the fact that the corporation represents a conglomerate of various groups of participants with conflicting and competing interests. Each group seeks to protect its interest. In such a situation, the possibility is not ruled out that those with greater corporate power might often suppress or oppress those with relatively little power. In fact, the possibility that majority shareholders will manifest the tendency to oppress the minority cannot be discounted. It becomes inevitable that corporate statutes should take the plight of the minority shareholders into consideration. The result is the inclusion of some non-waivablc mandatory provisions in the various statutes. These provisions by their nature prescribe minimum standards which must be observed, with remedies available to the minorities in the event of failure to comply. Some of these provisions include the oppression remedy, the derivative action, appraisal remedy and the winding-up remedy.  Corporate statutes therefore perform  some mandatory functions.  III.  Classifications of Corporate Law Provisions While it may be accepted that corporate statutes can act as standard form  contracts, the proposition that participants to the corporate contract are free to adopt or displace the terms provided by corporate statutes is not applicable with respect to all the  <n m n n  , n i r  i  u u,u u i v !/ J i  213  provisions of the statutes.  Canadian corporate statutes reflect an amalgam of  mandatory presumptive and permissive provisions, 176  Under the present analysis,  mandatory provisions of corporate law are non-waivable because the idea is to regulate the conduct of corporate affairs while providing protection to the shareholders against the likelihood  of  abuse  of  corporate  power  by  those  presumptive/permissive provisions perform enabling functions.  in  control.  The  Therefore, while  parlies can opt out of the permissive provisions, the mandatory provisions remain nonwaivable and incapable of being replaced by private contractual agreements.  (a)  Mandator;/ Provisions Mandatory provisions define issues in corporate law that cannot be varied by the  participants and direct outcomes that may not be waived by individual agreements. Under the British Columbia Company Act, there are several mandatory provisions, for example, the company's directors have a duty of loyalty and care to the corporation that cannot be altered. 177  Payout of dividend is limited by a statutory formula and  directors are personally liable in negligence in making wrongful dividend payments. 178 Any shareholder who owned shares at the time of a breach of the duties of care or loyalty can bring suit against the wrongdoer on the corporation's behalf.179- Directors of non-reporting companies shall before alloting shares offer those shares pro rata to the members. 180 A memberhas the right to apply to the court for relief on the grounds 1 '  . For similar classifications, see A. Schwartz and R.F. Scott, Commercial Transactions: Principles and Policies (Mineola, NY: Foundation Press 1982) 3-5; Cheffins, supra note 9, • 794. • ' '  177  S.143, B.C.C.A.  178  S.151(l)(c).  179  S.225.  238  S.41(l).  that Ihe act or conduct of those in control of the company unfairly prejudice or affect or oppress him I s ' Generally speaking, mandatory provisions reflect one aspect of corporate law as a device for regulating the conduct of corporate affairs.  They supply minimum  standards of corporate performance. Some writers have suggested that the mandatory provisions of corporate law are based on the presumption that private ordering - market contracting - is incapable of producing an entirely efficient financial contract. 182 But if the view is accepted that the corporation comes into existence as a concession from the state and that it possesses those powers conferred on it by its charter of creation, then the existence of mandatory provisions could be justified. Being a creature of the state, it is inevitable that there should be some degree of the state's intervention in the corporate affairs either in the form of direct regulation or the facilitation of shareholder protection.  Mandatory provisions prescribe rules for the  orderly conduct of the corporate business. The rationale is to protect the shareholders and the investors and to achieve a certain standard for the operation of the corporate business through its regulatory functions.  In effect, mandatory provisions limit the  ability of the participants to customize their agreements as reflected in the Articles.  (b)  Presumptive Provisions . Some corporate law-provisions are enabling;  that is, they supply a type of  standard form contract with terms that the parties in many corporations would agree to in an environment where transaction costs were zero or negligible. Under its enabling form, corporate law supplies rules that are prescriptive in character.  Some of these  rules are contained in the B.C.C.A., for example, the members of a non-reporting 181  10T  mmmm -iitv  Tf.'hi •'•'-••  S.224.  -  For example, J. Macintosh, "Shareholders' Appraisal Remedy in Canada: Reappraisal", (1983) 24 Osgoode Hall L.J. 201.:  •mil  J  ,,  ' n nn n U U U  U  n VC n J  U '1  A Critical  92  company may, by consent in writing, waive the requirement cf appointment of an auditor. 183 Unless the Articles of a company otherwise provide, every member of a company shall have one vote in respect of each share held by him. 1 8 4  Unless the  Articles require an actual meeting, any resolution of the directors or of any committee of them, may be passed without a meeting if all the directors or the members of the committee consent to the resolution in writing. 185 Unless there is a provision to the contrary in its Memorandum or Articles, a reporting company may allot and issue its shares at the times, in the manner and to the persons or class of persons the directors determine. 186 Corporate law economists argue that the motivating reason for the rules of this character is the reduction of the transaction costs of financial contracting. The statutory standard form makes it necessary to specifically contract to a given outcome.  They  further assert that under this rationale, there is no reason to prevent those involved in a corporation from contracting lor other rules where they consider it appropriate to do so. The enabling function of corporate law assists in the process of private ordering.  (c)  Permissive Provisions Permissive provisions govern defined corporate issues but corporate participants  are permitted to adopt other rules in a specified manner. In other words, permissive provisions authorize corporations to do.things they might not otherwise be able to do. Most of the examples which reflect permissive provisions also take the presumptive character of corporate law. 183  S.203(l).  184  S. 185(c).  185  S.149.  186  S.41(6).  An example of a permissive provision is that which  93  provides that every company shall have at least one director and a reporting company shall have at least three directors.187 Another example is the one which states that a company other than an insurance company may t y its articles adopt all or any of the provisions of Table A in the First Schedule. 188 Similarly, where the Articles do not provide for the election, appointment or removal of officers, the directors can do so.* 89 The aim of permissive provisions is to set out the corporate rules that may govern if the parties make no contrary agreements.  ,:  Corporate law economists argue that corporate law provisions should he permissive or optional and that the contractual theory of the corporation with its emphasis on the freedom of the parties to fashion out a corporate form of their choice implies that the state should not have a greater role in corporate governance than in other private contractual relationships.  IV.  Conclusion The corporate legal fiction remains the major legal mechanism for economic  development.  The reason for its significance is presumably the efficiency and  flexibility of the coiporation as a system for organizing aggregation and use of capital. Corporate statutes do not merely act as standard form contracts which provide the terms that the corporate participants would have provided for in the absence of transaction costs. In fact, such statutes reflect an-amalgam of mandatory, presumptive and permissive provisions. enabling functions.  S.132 B.C.C.A. S.6 B.C.C.A. S.157(4)(c)(d) B.C.C.A.  In the same vein, the statutes perform mandatory and  94  In its mandatory role, corporate law regulates the conduct of corporate affairs. Such regulation is designed to protect shareholders and creditors agair jt abuse of the corporate form. This regulation continues in other laws, for example, Securities acts. Setting up regulations for the control of security issues to prevent fraud on investors are treated as regulations of business superimposed upon corporate statutes and apply to corporations. The enabling provisions apparently facilitate the efficient conduct of business and also enhances the contractual process within the corporation. An ideal corporate statute should provide for a rimple and cheap method of incorporation and operation of the corporate organization which is flexible enough to meet the demands of diverse organizations. It should identify the duties and powers within the corporate structure, ensure that regulation to prevent abuse is appropriate and commensurate with the risk of abuse so as not to frustrate the economic and social benefits of the corporate form. The provisions should be concerned with striking a balance between the enabling use of the corporate form and regulating to prevent its abuse.' However, it should be ensured that the balance does not undermine the economic and social benefits of the corporate form.  ..  :  95  CHAPTER FIVE THE ARGUMENT FOR MAKING STATUTORY MINORITY REMEDIES OPTIONAL  A.  Introduction and Outline:  I observed in Section III of the preceding chapter that corporate law provisions could be classified into mandatory, presumptive or permissive provisions. 190 A majority of the statutory remedies available to the minority shareholdeis within the corporation are mandatory in nature.  This implies that neither the corporation nor the parties can  waive nor displace them by alternative contractual arrangements. remedies are the oppression remedy; 191 remedy. 193  Amongst these  the derivative action, 192 and the appraisal  The notion that shareholders should be allowed to contract out of these  statutory remedies (if they choose to) and adopt a different regulatory regime derives from the contractarian theory of the corporation which sees corporate statutes as simply providing a model or standard form contract from which shareholders may deviate as they choose. 194 In this chapter, I will examine some of the various arguments put forward by the contractarians for optional, as opposed to mandatory, statutory remedies. Most of the justifications for optional remedies reflect the costs and disadvantages of judicial supervision of statutory remedies.  Therefore, for proper evaluation of the weight of  190  Fcr discussion of these terms, see supra, Chapter Four.  191  S.224 B.C.C.A.; S.241 C.B.C.A.  192  S.22S B.C.C.A.; S.239 C.B.C.A.  193  S.231B.C.C.A.; S.190(l) C.B.C.A.  104  Supra, Chapter Four.  96  their arguments, it will be necessary for us to examine also, the opposite side of the issue:- the justifications and advantages of judicial supervision of the mandatory statutory remedies. A cost-benefit approach will be adopted in this analysis. This will enable one to make a decision on whether the benefits of judicial supervision outweigh the costs. Where this is so-, then a case in favour of mandatory statutory remedies is made. The work shall be divided into three sections. Section I examines the contractarian argument for making the statutory remedies optional. This contractarian perspective has been most forcefully advanced in a series of articles by Easterbrcok and Fischel. In their view; "The code of corporate law is a standard form contract for issues of corporate structure. To the extent that corporate legal rules [and remedies] anticipate the desire of the contracting parties, these off-therack principles reduce the number of items to be negotiated and the costs of negotiating them." 1 9 5 The contractarians argue that corporate legal rules exist simply to reduce transaction. costs. Corporate law offers a model form contract; shareholders are free to buy offthe-rack.  From this perspective, statutory corporate law can be seen as only a  presumptive set of default rules that fill in the void where the parties have not chosen to write their own contract in more detail. Section II examines the justification and benefits of judicial supervision of the mandatory remedies.  The mandatory nature of the remedies has been upheld by the  traditional corporate law-scholars w h o ' rejeet the contractarian perspective as oversimplified - in effect, "an interesting intellectual thought experiment that has few empirical references in the real world of complex institutional structures and high transaction costs". 196 195  IQfi  Mandatory statutory remedies may be justified on the grounds  Easterbrook & Fischel, "Voting in Corporate Law", (1983) 26 J. of L.&Econ. 395, 401. J.C. Coffee, Jr., "No Exit? Opting Out, The Contractual Theory of the Corporation and the Special Case of Remedies", (1988) 53 Brooklyn L. Rev. 919, 933. Prof. Brudney has also dismissed the claim that private bargaining can restrain management self-dealing and shirking as mere rhetoric. See Brudney, "Corporate Governance, Agency Costs and the Rhetoric of Contract", (1985) 85 Colum. L. Rev. 1403, 1410.  A  that shareholders may be too dispersed to take effective coordinated action; they lack the requisite information and the necessary institutional mechanisms to bargain effectively; outside directors may be too compromised and insufficiently motivated to be effective monitors; the market forces operate at great costs and may be incapable of affording adequate safeguards to the shareholders. Section III offers some concluding remarks. It will be canvassed that despite the costs of judicial supervision, it is still desirable to have certain mandatory, nonwaivable statutory remedies available to the shareholders.  Opting out of corporate  mandatory rules and the remedies may have considerable implications. If corporations are allowed t h e freedom to opt out, this may bring significant changes to corporate life, Corporate law has never regarded the corporation as simply a private contract. Although corporate law may have moved far from the original position which saw corporations a s quasi-public bodies to become a largely enabling body of law, most corporate statutes remain mandatory on a number of important points including the remedies. Such mandatory provisions are necessary to provide minimum standard of corporate conduct while at the same time, reassuring the investor's confidence in the corporation as a form of business investment  I:  A r g u m e n t s for Optional Statutory Remedies:  (A)  Basis fear the Argument; To h e l p us understand the basis of the contractarian argument for optional  statutory remedies we may recapitulate their propositions in the following words: 1.  The coiporation is an entity that serves as the centre of a complex web of contractual relationships freely entered into by the affected participants. On this premise, it will be inadequate to view the corporation as being a creature of the state in any important or fundamental basis.  .  <  .  .'.IS..  Sit..*  ... '...  n n n u u  nil  pit i  'r  98  2.  The proper function of corporate law is simply to provide an efficient set of default rules to govern the nexus of contracts. It is desirable to have standard form boiler plate language available for adoption by the contracting parties because contracts are often costly • to write and negotiate.  Corporate law  furnishes such off-the-shelflanguage. 3.  Except when bad third-party effects (known as negative externalities) exist, managers and shareholders would be free to change any of the default rules by mutual agreement. And since most rules traditionally described as being within the sphere of corporate law do not involve any significant third party effects, but concern only the welfare of managers an( investors, private contractual arrangements in the corporation should almost always have dominance over legal rules and remedies.  This means that there should be virtually no  mandatory role for corporate law.  (B)  ;. ?  The Justifications for Optional Remedies The contractarians have put forward many reasons in their attempt to justify the  argument for optional statutory remedies. Some of these reasons include the following: i.  Freedom of Contract Argument:  .  ..  One argument put forward in support of optional statutory remedies for shareholders is the freedom of contract argument.  The reasoning is that the  participants in the intra-corporate contract know their interests best or at least belter than do public officials. Thus, where they agree to a rule governing their relationship, they think they will be better off or otherwise they would not have agreed to it. The contractarians argue that contractually created rules will tend strongly to be pareto-superior rules: such rules will make the parties-better off. Again, it is argued that where corporate contractual freedom exists, the price shareholders will be willing to pay for shares in an initial offering will  n n n n  u u u u  r  n i i_ i u 11 o D  99  generally reflect the initial provisions in the Article and the party designing the 'Article will tale this into 'consideration.  Provisions in the Article will  consequently tend to be the efficient value-maximizing provisions.  The  contractarians are strengthened in their position by their perception that the corporate context is most fitting for the freedom of contract argument.  The  market for initial shares is viewed by them as quite competitive with many sophisticated participants and with many mechanisms that transmit and spread information. ii.  Organizational Costs of Judicial and Lepal Supervision The contractarians are further strengthened in their argument by the  presumed fact that although strict corporate law may facilitate shareholder activism;  the benefits of enhanced legal controls and remedies arc offset by  significant organizational costs. They assert that increases in the legal rights of shareholders potentially opposed to managerial prerogatives reduce the ability of managers to exercise delegated authority.  At some point, increases in such  constraints will reduce shareholders' wealth by stifling innovation and increasing  the  shareholders.  iii"  likelihood  of  opportunistic  197  Litigation Costs  -••  ' ..""  behavior • ••  ;  by  individual  —  •-  Corporate law economic analysts who uphold the contractarian view of the corporation argue that judicial supervision of intra-corporate behavior can generate significant costs. These costs include the lawyer's fees. A shareholder Baysinger and Butler in their work had gone further to argue that the provisions of stricter corporate law may allow maverick shareholders to block mergers, acquisitions, changes in the Articles of Association and by-laws or other major changes that would likely increase shareholders' wealth. See Baysinger & Butler, "The Role of Coiporate Law in the Theory of theFirm", (1986)28 J. of L. & Econ., 1982.  100  must invest a substantial sum of money lo build and sustain a case. High legal fees may discourage a shareholder with small investments in the corporation from pursuing an otherwise legitimate course in courts. 198 Litigation may have other side effects. Legal proceedings can disrupt intra-corporate relationships;  give rise to undesirable publicity and less of  confidentiality, create uncertainty and give rise to opportunity costs since the participants have to forgo productive activities while preparing for, and appearing at court proceedings.  The shareholders may therefore want to  substitute a statutory remedy with a private contractual alternative arrangement. For example, they may want to substitute arbitration for the derivative action in order to protect corporate privacy.  Arbitration, it is argued, is a private  proceeding without public or press access and often reduces the direct or administrative costs of enforcement. However, the use of third-party arbitration in preference to judicial supervision generates its own costs which may outweigh its utility.  To reduce total enforcement costs, the reduction in  administrative costs must be greater than any increase in indirect costs such as the cost of increased error, bias or non-enforceability.  Arbitration may work  best in specialized environments such as labor law, where the arbitrators develop an acknowledged expertise, operate frequently enough to correct for bias and issue judgments enforceable by the state. dispute resolution mechanism in the corporate context.  It may be an inadequate :  '  Contractarians further argue that the minority shareholders also face a number of other practical problems when seeking damages in court to remedy the harm caused by the incompetent or dishonest management. 198  Apart from  Even if the possibility of recovery of attorney's fees exists upon a successful prosecution of the case, he may yet consider that the troubles with litigation is not worth his investment in the corporation.  n n n'n  U U U U  h n i  o  U 'L Q O  101  investing substantial sums of money to build and sustain a case, the directors control the books and records of the corporation and have been known to alter them, 199  Similarly,  recharacterize  a  the directors with the benefit of hindsight  questionable  justifications for the transactions.  iv  transaction or  find  new  and  may  acceptable  200  Risk of Strategic and Opportunistic Behaviour Litigation costs may have spin-off effects.  They may give potential  applicants an incentive to engage in opportunistic conduct "which is self interested behaviour that departs from the standard of conduct thai would maximize the collcclivc wealth of participants in a bargaining relationship".201 A typical situation in which the risk, of strategic and opportunistic behaviour is likely to arise is in connection with statutory amalgamation or merger at a premium over the market price. resolution  of  shareholders to  Corporate statutes usually require a special approve the amalgamation  transaction.202  Unanimous consent of shareholders is not required because that may presumably create incentives for shareholders to behave opportunistically.  A shareholder,  even if convinced that the amalgamation is beneficial and the terms fair may decide to refuse consent. His reasoning could be that the cost imposed on all other shareholders (the premium.forgone) would force the corporation to "buy" his approval with some type of side payment.  Such behaviour would be  199  F. O'Neal &R. Thompson; Oppression of Minority Shareholder (2d. ed. 1985) 2-17.  200  Id.  201  Cheffins, supra, note 9 at 789. On the nature of opportunistic conduct generally, see T.J. Murris, "Opportunistic Behaviour and the Law of Contracts", (1981) 65 Minn. L.R. 521, at 522-6.  238  For example, see S.272(4) B.C.C.A.; S.183 C.B.C.A.  u ntin n n 11 n Us LKU U 1 '"U I 0 !  privately rational but wealth reducing for shareholders as a whole. In the first place, resources may be wasted in haggling over the division of gains. Secondly, value increasing transactions would be abandoned altogether or never started under a unanimity rule because of strategic power of minorities. Contractarians argue that shareholder litigation enables a shareholder who is unable to blackmail other shareholders due to the absence of a unanimity rule to attempt to accomplish the same objective by alleging in an application that some aspects of the terms or disclosure in connection with the amalgamation are inadequate.  The hope would be that the potential loss  inflicted on other shareholders in the form of direct and indirect litigation costs as well as the possible loss of the premium would enable the shareholder to obtain a disproportionate share of the gains. 203 Opportunistic conduct may also arise because the applicant's cost benefit incentives concerning litigation may differ from those of the corporation.204 For instance, while an applicant can begin an application without substantial inconvenience, for a corporation, the litigation costs may be substantial. Where such a cost differential exists, it may cause the corporation to settle before trial for an amount that was higher than was justified by the applicant's-prospect of success in the case.  v  Lack of Judicial Expertise in Corporate Matters Another argument for optional statutory remedies rests on the lack of  judicial expertise in corporate matters. The corporation faces potential cost if a For a discussion of the problem of strategic use of litigation in the merger context, see Fischel, "The Race to the Bottom Revisited: Reflections on Recent Developments • in Delaware's Corporation Law", (1982) 76 NW. U.L. Rev. 913, 923-41. 198  Cheffins, supra note 9.  i  .  103  matter reaches trial. There may be possibility of error by thejudge which will . ' impose costs on the participants' bargain. The likelihood of misinterpretation is increased when it is realised that judges often have little expertise in corporate matters, which it is argued, may reduce their ability to appreciate why conduct that disadvantaged an applicant was in fact reasonable in the circumstances.  vi  Problems of Generality and Statis Legislative and judicial rulemaking may share the institutional problems  of generality and statis. In other words, rules made by these institutions apply generally to the subjects of the rule and these rules remain in force even when the business environment and changing commercial world demand their reform. This argument has been applied in the corporate context by the contractarians to justify their argument for optional statutory remedies. For instance, Butler and R i b s t e i n i n o n e o f their articles205 point to this assertion when they stated that "even a rule that is formulated by an all-wise and disinterested policy maker cannot suit every business equally well, any more than a well-made suit is right for everybody". Tlicv added that the literature on the theory of the firm reveals a wide range of organizational corporations that need to own- substantial resources or that involve complex decision processes may look very different .from smaller, simpler. corporations and-may want to adopt very different governance structures.  A remedy that is both initially perfect and suited to a  particular corporation may become imperfect or unsuitable over time as a result of rapidly changing business conditions. Legislative and judicial rules tend to remain past their welcome. 206 205  - & Ribstein, "Opting Out of Fiduciary Duties: A Response to the Anti-Contractarians", Butler (1990), 65 Washington L. Rev. 1, at 56. .  n n ri n U U'U u,  n i i t u I i< t  104  vii  Efficacy of the Market Forces as Adeauate Constraints on 'Corporate Management The call for optional statutory remedies is further predicated on the ,  presumed efficacy of the market forces as adequate constraints on corporate management and thus, providing safeguards for the shareholders.  In our  previous discussions, we observed that the proponents of the economic approach to corporate law argue that the modern corporation is a competitive entity circumscribed by powerful anarket forces which should play a more significant role in shareholder protection than governmental intervention.207  They argue  that the managers are constrained by an identifiable network of incentive, bonding and monitoring devices to exercise their discretion in the shareholders' interests. 208  In their view, mandatory statutory remedies serve no need for  shareholder protection in the light of the market constraints on corporate management.  Summary: The foregoing discussions are some of the arguments put forward in justifying the call for optional statutory remedies. Some advocates of optional statutory remedies recognize that the mandatory statutory, remedies-may give the minority shareholders adequate protection against opportunistic behaviour by the controlling shareholders and directors but they assert that such protection is obtained at greater costs. The effect of making the application of the statutory remedies optional would enable the corporation  See supra, Chapter Three, at p.66. For further discussion on the governance mechanisms in the corporations from an economic viewpoint, refer to Chapter Three.  105  and the participants to determine whether any particular remedy would apply to their corporation or not. This may lead to greater contractual freedom in corporate law. However plausible the arguments for optional statutory remedies may seem; there still exists a real necessity for some mandatory statutory remedies. The necessity becomes obvious when the benefits of legal and judicial supervision of corporate affairs and conduct is juxtaposed against the arguments for optional remedies; for it will be seen that such benefits outweigfi any cost wMch nmy arise fccmjudicial supervision. This assertion leads us to an examination of the reasons and advantages of having mandatory statutory remedies available to the shareholders'and which the court are readily willing to uphold.  II:  Justifications for Mandatory Statutory Remedies There are times when the law should not yield to privaite ordering either because  of third party effects or because of distrust of the bargain between the parties. The corporate form of organization reflects an appropriate subject for legal intervention for the protection of the minority shareholders and other investors who entrust their wealth with the managers of the firm. The intervention of corporate law statutory provisions becomes more meaningful when it is appreciated that the use of alternative mechanisms for private ordering of the corporate affairs either generate greater costs than their benefits or arc not sufficient to protect the .investment interests of the corporate I  participants. In the widely-held corporation, 'jie mattered shareholders may lack the requisite , : information and institutional mechanisms either to bargain over the terms of management's employment or to monitor and control management's activities.  The  'markets'" for managers and for securities may not effectively implement investor constraints on management. Outside directors may be insufficiently independent from management to serve as agents for shareholders in selecting or controlling management  n n n n j n in i u ".i • I 'I  U-Li u u  106  and too many factors, including information imperfections may affect the price of shares for it to serve as mechanism for effective shareholder impact upon managerial performance. In the closely-held corporation, private contractual controlling mechanism may be inadequate safeguards for shareholders because of the inherent limitations of the human mind to foresee future contingencies and make adequate provisions for them in the contract.  Secondly, even where the future may be predicted with reasonable  clarity, there exists an added risk of opportunistic amendment of the contractual agreements by those in control.  It therefore becomes necessary for corporate law to  evolve adequate mechanisms for safeguarding the interests of the shareholders and other participants in the corporation. This protection is achieved by the existence of some non-waivable mandatory remedies which enable shareholders and sometimes other investors (notably creditors) to enforce a corporate right or remedy a wrong suffered by them directly or indirectly. 209 Investor protection may therefore be regarded as an umbrella justification for the existence of some mandatory statutory remedies.  But other specific reasons and  advantages of judicial supervision are subsumed under this principal justification. Some of these reasons include the following:  1.  High Transaction Costsof Drafting  - ..•..'•-.•'.•  _  The high costs of contracting may preclude the participants in the intracorporate contract from writing contracts that completely define the duties of corporate managers. 209  Identifying all possible contingencies as well as appropriate responses is  • For example, directors owe their fiduciary duties to the corporation and not shareholders.:. Any breach of these duties constitutes a wrong to the corporation but shareholders may suffer a dilution of their investment interests by the occurrence of such breach. Derivative action enables shareholders to recover indirectly for any such breach. For a more detailed discussion of the derivative litigation, refer to Chapter Six.  —-I.—...  —  ——  1  107  highly impracticable because the direct costs of negotiating and drafting such contracts would be prohibitive.  More importantly, the attempts to define in advance what  managers should do in the light of certain contingencies may simply prove to be wrong in the light of new information and expertise.  Thus, the direct and indirect costs of  defining all possible future contingencies with attendant liabilities that might affect manager's decision making as well as responses to these contingencies may make defining adequate performance impossible. Contractarians may reply that if high transaction costs deter the participants from providing adequate safeguards and remedies in the contractual arrangement, then the provisions of corporate statutes should be used as standard form contracts which provide for those terms that the parties would have agreed on;  in the absence of  transaction costs. In other words, that high transaction costs do not justify making the statutory remedies mandatory because those statutory remedies could more adequately be seen as off-the-shelf terms which the parties are capable of contracting out of. But this argument seems weak. If we accept the above argument, the fear is that it might lead to a midstream opportunistic amendment of the Articles or the contractual documents with the possibility of removing an otherwise adequate remedy provided for the shareholders.  Thus, the existence of some mandatory non-waivable remedies  remove the possibility that corporations take away those rights and powers of the shareholders which compel management , to behave- well in the conduct of corporate affairs.  2.  Imperfect Information Lack  justification  of why  adequate information by some of  the statutory  the  shareholders constitutes  remedies  should remain  another  mandatory.  Shareholders may, and usually have imperfect understanding of the terms in the corporate charter or Articles of Association, of the risks that it allocates;  n n n n , n n r y u u u " u u <i  of the  1 •- •  I  •' '  ' *  ' '• 1  ,  108  differences between the charter terms that various corporations are offering or of the likely impact that a differencein terms will have on managerial behaviour. The lack cf adequate information may lead to the result that participants waive or consent to the waiving of otherwise protective remedies against management misbehaviour.  The  minority shareholders might thus be locked up in the corporation without means of addressing conduct which appear harmful. It therefore stands to reason to assume that minority shareholders rationally, would not assent to the effective confiscation of their investments even when the parties have executed a shareholder contract in a manner that assigns the minority shareholders a minimal governance voice. What is lacking on their part, is adequate information upon which to reach a desirable contractual bargain. The directors may understand that the shareholders (more especially, those in the minority) have not entered the venture knowingly taking the investment risk that they may have to suffer the deprivation of any meaningful governance input or share in economic return bccausc they have submitted to the exercise of an undiluted and untempered power short of fraud, misappropriation or breach of fiduciary duty. Additionally, awareness shall extend to the fact that the brunt of economically disappointing ventures or personality mismatches or incompatible expectations is ordinarily borne by the minority shareholders.  In closely-held_corporations, the  majority shareholders (and in the widely-held corporations - the management team in addition)-, arc in control of the governance levers and may conscript the minority shareholders' investment to the pursuit of their expectations.  Mandatory statutory  remedies may therefore be essential to guard the interests of the minority shareholders. 3  Imperfections of the Market Forces as Effective Constraints Contractarians doubt the efficacy of mandatory statutory rules and remedies to  correct perceived abuses within the corporation.  1  They argue that if any abuse is  n n n n u u u u  n n i " u iio  v.;:- ;-.i»;>>•  109  prevented or cured, it generates greater costs. 210 The operation of statutory remedies not'only give rise to direct costs, for example attorney's fees, the threat of applying them may stifle innovation and risk taking incentives (on the part of the managers) that may most efficiently, produce the goals and services that society desires. The contractarians believe that market forces monitor management and prevent abuses more effectively than can legislators or judges (through the statutory remedies). Firstly, they argue that a competitive product market rewards efficient corporate management with greater sales and profits, while high cost management would loose profits long before corporate law fiduciary duties could operate. Secondly, the market for corporate control operates as a check on inefficient or self-dealing managers.  A  third market force which the contractarians assert, is superior to judicially or legislatively imposed restraints is managements' reputational stake. To enhance career mobility, it is argued that managers must cultivate reputations for efficiency. Inefficiency inherent in shirking and opportunism at the expense of the corporation imposes agency costs on managers' firms. In turn, this impugns the reputation of those firms' managers.  According to contractarian philosophy, agency cost theory and the  market for managers are significant regulators of behaviour within the corporate world. Making the corporate statutory rules and remedies optional, the contractarians argue, will give freer play to market forces wiiich arc 'better' regulators of conduct. However, the market forces suffer, from imperfections _ that make them inadequate for the protection of the shareholders. In the first place, market forces may be inadequate to deal with last period or one time divergencies when the agent rationally concludes that the benefits of the one time use of discretion is worth whatever penalties may be forthcoming in the employment market for the agent's services. Secondly, market forces generate great costs in their operation. Such costs ?io  Anderson, "Conflict of Interest: Efficiency, Fairness and Corporate Structure", (1978) 25 U.C.L.A. L. Rev. 738, 788-89.  110  further reduce their efficacy as adequate safeguards against corporate management misconduct. In addition, managerial self-dealinghas to become quite significant before, it would justify the high cost of the market based remedy of a hostile takeover bid followed by installation of new management and might not be policied much at all in the supposed market for managers.  Much lower levels of self-dealing might be  remedied or deterred by statutory remedy; for instance, a derivative action for breach of fiduciary duty. 4  The Benefits of Legal and Judicial Enforcement of the Statutory Provisions Corporate law provisions which embody the statutory remedies recognize the  benefits of legal dispute resolution systems which has significant advantages over extra legal mechanisms in ameliorating the problems that give rise to intra-corporate disputes.  These advantages become evident when the parties have a genuine  disagreement over the meaning of key terms in the agreement. Judicial knowledge of the accumulated experience of other, similarly situated contracting parties who have grappled with analogous contingencies adds to the advantages of legal enforcement of corporate statutory remedies.  Even if the state has no interpretative advantage, its  ability to authoritatively resolve disputes would be a key factor in developing a cooperative equilibrium within the corporation:  ~  Access to legal enforcement may provide a credible threat of severe retaliation should one party deviate significantly from the cooperative pattern." Scott 211 'argues that without such a "large strike capability", each contracting party would be subject to the other's defection whenever the shadow of the future proved insufficient to prevent evasive behaviour.  211  '. Scott, "Conflict and Cooperation in Long-Term Contracts", (1987) 75 Colum. L.R. 2005, 20424.  n n n n u, u u u  111  The demand for a mechanism to maintain the fundamental structure of the relationship between the management a!,- shareholders within the corporate represents a classic public goods problem.  Mandatory statutory remedies make up for the  minority shareholders' weaker position in the intra-corporate relationship t y providing them with means ofjudicial enforcement of their corporaterights.  HI:  Conclusion: I shall conclude the discussion on the desirability of optional statutory remedies  t y evaluating the arguments raised on either side of the issue. This will enable me to determine whether the continuous mandatory nature of some statutory remedies is still justified. The use of corporate law statutory provisions to regulate the shareholdermanager relationship turns on the relative strength of markets and specific private ordering, as compared to law, in providing sufficient constraints on managers' freedom to use their position for selfish gain instead of for the benefit of all residual owners. In this regard, the contractarian view which supports opting out of the mandatory remedies stands in distinction to the more traditional coercionist or- regulatory view which casts the role of law as prescribing and delimiting what shareholders and managers may do. The difference between the-two views is most pronounced on the subject of mandatory legal terms and remedies. Under the contractarian view, the law should never override the preferences of the parties stated affirmatively in their contracts (absent fraud, duress or some other common law defence). Any standard form supplied by the law shall be an option that parties can use if they want but which they are free to contract around if they prefer. To justify their arguments, the contractarians rely on certain basic assumptions which may be characterized as follows:  112  1.  Market forces alone are sufficient to enforce managerial diligence,  2.  Legal remedies have high' error rates that could make management excessively risk averse.  3.  The costs of legal remedies, such as the derivative action arc unnecessarily high in comparison with remedies that could be designed through private ordering.  4.  Specifically, shareholders might prefer arbitration which is a substituted remedy for derivative action to protect corporate privacy. Arbitration, it is argued, is a private proceeding without public or press access and has the advantages of lower cost, relative speed and expertise. In the same vein, shareholders might prefer buy-out agreements to the appraisal remedy which it is argued, suffers from the problems of technical and procedural statutory impairments and the cost of retaining a lawyer during the appraisal process. Notwithstanding the contractarian arguments, the mandatory nature of some of  the statutory remedies has positive net values which may outweigh the costs involved in their application. The mere existence and threat of invoking the remedi es may have the effect of preventing majority shareholders and directors from engaging in conduct that will not be wealth maximizing to the shareholders.  For instance, the corporate  fiduciary duty provides an indispensable backdrop to corporate relationships^ including protection against actions permitted by statute but nevertheless inequitable or overreaching.  Tlie breach of fiduciary, duty js usually remedied by corporate action  against the defaulting directors or by a derivative action in situations where those in control neglect or refuse to initiate proceedings on behalf of the corporation.  The  derivative action serves as a guarantee which ensures th°.l some degree of accountability and control exists over the board of directors and senior officials either directly by allowing shareholders the right to bring an action against directors or indirectly by the threat of such an action if duties might be breached.  113  Mandatory statutory remedies thus, may have deterrent effects on corporate management,  They are necessary to attract investors to entrust money to the common  enterprise a corporation often represents.  Without a non-waivable limit on the  director's ability to self-deal, 212 no sensible individual would invest in an incorporated venture. In addition, any contracting process that seeks to design a privatized substitute for the statutory remedies would have to write an extremely detailed contract and would have to develop and rely upon largely untested procedures.  Such a process may  involve very high information costs for shareholders and is subject to opportunistic manipulation by managers at various stages. For each procedural stage that any private contract must address, small differences in technical language could mean the difference between an effective and an illusory remedy. It may not worth the market's time to monitor these differences closely in advance of a particular transaction or event that gives them significance.  Moreover, management may have little incentive to  subject itself to litigation in any form because of its ability to exploit its de facto control over the process of formulating amendments to the corporation's Articles and by-laws. In conclusion, it may be stated that the benefits of judicial supervision of corporate conduct outweighs its costs. The continued presence of shareholder litigation suggests that judicial supervision does provide a net gain for corporate participants.213. It is therefore desirable to maintain the mandatory nature of some of the statutory remedies that are available for minority shareholders. 212 213  ,  That is. to cxproprmtcto themselves the shareholders' contribution to the venture. However, little empirical evidence exists to confirm or deny this, as research along such lines is just beginning. See Fischel & Bradley, "Thfi Role of Liability Rules and the Derivative Suit in Corporate Law", (1986)71 Cornell L.R. 261 (studied the effects of bringing derivative actions); E. Weiss and L. White, "Of Econometrics and Indeterminacy: A Study of Investors' Reactions to "Changes" in Corporate Law", (1987) 75 Cal. L.R. 551 (considered the aggregate market effect of a number of significant Delaware derivative action, fiduciary duty and cash-out merger cases). See generally, Cheffins, supra, note 9 at 790.  In the next chapter, an economic analysis of selected statutory minority shareholder remedies will be undertaken.  115  Part Three  CHAPTER SIX ECONOMIC ANALYSIS OF SELECTED STATUTORY MINORITY SHAREHOLDERS'REMEDIES  Introduction and Outline: This chapter focuses on the economic analysis of selected statutory minority shareholder remedies.  The remedies which will be examined are:  the oppression  remedy, derivative action, appraisal remedy and the winding up remedy. My primary purpose is to determine whether the presence of these remedies can be explained in economic terms which have earlier been surveyed in Chapter Three of this work. Central to this chapter is the examination of the costs and benefits of retaining these statutory remedies. It will be canvassed that in some instances the costs of applying a particular remedy may outweigh the benefits. This may necessitate the application of alternative remedies supplied either by private contractual mechanisms or by market forces.  In addition, I shall examine the relationship between these remedies and the  coiporate structure. In my previous discussion on the economic analysis of the closely and widelyheld corporations,214 it was observed that" economic analysis suggests that the corporation is best viewed as essentially founded on private contract among the participants to the nexus of contracts and that the closely-held and widely-held corporations adopt governance and contractual monitoring mechanisms that suit their different economic structures.  Shareholders in the closely-held corporation usually  adopt contractual monitoring devices such as the shareholders' agreements as planning 214  See Chapter 3 supra.  116  devices in dispute prevention and resolution. The widely-held corporations have a wide array of governance mechanisms that align managers' interests more closely with those of investors. For example, residual claims are freely traded and carry voting rights, This facilitates efficient risk bearing, accumulation of large blocks of shares, and transfers of cor.tvo !while ensuring that management teams have incentives to maximize the value of the firm. Similarly, compensation agreements link changes in managers' wealth to the performance of the firm, 215 In both corporations, while much emphasfe is made on contractual devices and market forces, less reliance is placed on corporate law as a governance mechanism. It was also observed that these contractual devices and market forces working alone cannot produce optimal governance structures.  In the first place, because of  inherent human limitations, it is impossible to foresee the future with reasonable clarity and the corporate contract may not fully articulate all the terms in writing. Secondly, at some point, the cost of articulating the terms will even exceed the benefits. Equally true is the fact that the market forces acting alone will not adequately produce an optimal solution to the agency problems in the corporate form of organization. Market forces may be inadequate to deal with last period or one-time divergence when the agent concludes that the benefits of the one time use of discretion is worth whatever penalties that may be forthcoming in the employment market for the agent's services..216  -  Because of these factors, some economic analysts have recognized that corporate law can play some role in corporate governance;  albeit a limited one.  These  commentators assert that it is more appropriate to view corporate law as a standard  215  See supra notes 159-170.  198  Supra, see Chapter 4.  117  form contract which provides for those terms that the parties would have bargained for absent transaction costs. 217 Modern corporate statutes nrnvide for remedies which are available to the shareholder whenever there is an allegation of corporate wrong either to himself or to the corporation.218  If one accepts the economic argument that corporate law is  standard form contract, it then implies that the corporate statutory remedies are equally standard form contracts which provide for nrotection that the corporate participants would have bargained for, absent transaction costs. Furthermore, if one agrees that these remedies can be explained in economic terms, another consideration comes to mind. The closely and widely-held corporations have different economic structures. This implies that the presence of these remedies may have different economic effects depending a i the nature of the corporation. This discussion shall be divided into four paits, reflecting the four remedies. Each part shall be divided into four sections.  In Section I, a brief summary of the  remedy will be undertaken. This will furnish a general background to my analysis. Sectiomll oilers an economic analysis of the remedy. The purpose, as indicated above is to determine whether the presence of the remedy can be justified in economic terms.  - • ~  • --  Section III considers the intendationship of the remedy and the corporate structure. My observation is.that some remedies are more suited to shareholders in one other, because of the nature of bargain reached among the participants in each corporation.  217  198  See for example, Easterbrook & Fiscliel, "Corporate Control Transactions", (19»2) 91 Yale L.J. 698; 702; Fischel, "The Corporate Governance Movement", (1982) 38 Vand. h. Rev. 1259; See also my discussion on Ch. 5. Through the oppression remedy or the derivative action.  m n n'rin ®> ;h c u u u u* iS- nO -i  118  Section IV offers a brief concluding remark depending on the preceding analysis. It remains to add that Chapter Six does not pretend to be an exhaustive analysis of all the issues relating to the adequacy of the statutory minority shareholder remedies. In fact, this chapter approaches the issue only from an economic perspective.  The  discussion extends to the next chapter where I intend to present an examination of the problems arising from the current form of the selected statutory remedies. In selecting the above-mentioned remedies, I am not oblivious of the fact that a minority shareholder has other alternatives both under corporate and securities laws for the protection of his interest in the corporation.  For instance, he may apply to the  court for an order that an investigator be appointed to examine the conduct of corporate affairs. Similarly, the disclosure requirements of securities laws are provided for the protection of the uninformed investor who often turns out to be a minority shareholder. The choice of these statutory remedies as my focus is however predicated on the fact that they constitute the most handv and readily available remedies for the protection of the minority interests. Moreover, the corporate law reform which took ninf-p in Canada in tiip late* 1 Qfifi'c nnrt the early 70's saw the introduction of these remedies as the most potent remedies in the minority shareholder1 s arsenal. It becomes necessary to examine the extent to which these remedies have gone in protecting the minority shareholders.  -  A.  THE OPPRESSION REMEDY  I.  General Overview of t'nc Remedy  "" —  For many years, British Columbia was the only Canadian jurisdiction to provide shareholders with a general remedy against oppressive conduct in their corporation.219 219  Companies Act, R.S.B.C. 1960, C.67, S.185.  |  '  ~1 — _ ' -1, ('' 'r*' ft11-. ' - ,'i - 11J -rtir.llt.. HI-. -  '." I  l&^Y.'S*'* .— "»!.•> 4.- I J J" r K. "|L - .J^.-, * " ;, , J..^.. j. . . v.. S.-• 1 „r... II. .t^-..  ' * -.ri  .* i!. ,  119  However, beginning with the Canada Business Corporations Act in 1975, 220 the  1  remedy has gained a much broader acceptance. It has been adopted in Manitoba and Saskatchewan,221 and otherjurisdictions as well. Under these Corporations Acts, an oppression remedy is provided for any member for even a single act or course of conduct of the directors or those in chaise of the corporation which oppresses him or unfairly prejudices or, in some statutes, 222 unfairly disregards his interests in the corporations.  The parties whose interests are  protected by the remedy include most of the groups directly concerned in the corporation; all the statutes permit complaints to be brought not only by shareholders but by anyone else whom the court considers proper. officers or potential creditors of the corporation.  This may include directors,  The Canada Business Corporations  A d specifically includes not only the security holders , directors and officers, whether present or former, but also any person who, in the discretion of the court is a proper person.  The British Columbia .Company Act does not name any group other than  beneficial owners of shares and any other person who, in the discretion of the court is a proper person. The circumstances complained of need not amount to a continuous course of conduct but include isolated actions.  In addition, a shareholder can bring an action  under the remedy in respect of merely threatened or proposed acts of oppression.  Canada Business Corporations Act, S.C. 1974-75, C.33, S.234. Business Corporations Act, S.M. 1976, C.40 (continuing Consolidation, C.(225), Business Corporations Act, S.S. 1977 C. 10. Today, in British Columbia, the remedy is provided under Section 224, B.C.C.A. See, also S.241 C.B.C.A. for similar provision. In Britain, it is provided under Sections 459-461 of the British Companies Act 1985; Nigeria in Sections 310313 of the Company and Allied Matters Decree 1990. In the United States, some states do not have any direct equivalent of the oppression remedy but Rule 10b-5 of the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission Act 1942 enables shareholders in some corporations to obtain a remedy for conduct that would arise under the oppression remedy in Canada. C.B.C.C.; S.241. Also provided under the Manitoba and Saskatchewan Acts.  n n ri n ' h n "b ~i '' < u a u u • <_* I o <1  '  '  120  The current form of the remedy in alljurisdictionsprovides the courtvery wide discretion to rectify the matters complained of. 2 2 3 Leave of the court is not required before the applicant can initiate proceedings under the remedy, provided that he comes within the group of potential applicants. The remedy applies to a wide variety of situations in both the closely and widely-held corporations. It could apply where the directors of a corporation unfairly withhold dividends which are otherwise available for distribution in the form of profits. 224  Similarly, a member can apply for relief under the remedy where the  directors allot shares at a time when it would be financially impossible for him to take up the issue, with the sole purpose of effecting the diludon of his interests. 225  II.  Economic Analysis and the Oppression Remedy One of the main assumptions of economic analysts is that absent transaction  costs, minority shareholders would bargain for protection against oppressive conduct and unfairly prejudicial acts by the majority shareholders and those in control of the corporation. It stands to reason to assume that minority shareholders rationally, would not assent to the effective confiscation of their investments as part of their involvement in the corporation. On this basic premise, the presence of the oppression remedy in the corporate statute may be justified. It provides the.participants (and more especially the minority shareholders) with a term they would have articulated absent transaction costs. The presence of the oppression remedy calls for judicial supervision and enforcement of corporate rights. This generates its own costs which include the 223  B.C.C.A. Section 224(2); C.B.C.A. Section 241(3).  224  Re Ferguson and Tmax Systems (1983) 43 O.R. (2d) 123.  225  Browning V.C&.C Plywood (1967) 434 P. 2d. 339 (S/C Oregon).  •/•••;  121  financial expense involved in retaining a lawyer and the social side effects of litigation. 226 Where these costs are relatively high, a potential applicant may engage in opportunistic conduct which involves the pursuit of selfish motives that run contrary to an ideal standard of behaviour necessary for maximizing the collective wealth of all participants. In the context of the oppression remedy, the potential for opportunistic conduct is high because the applicant's cost-benefit incentives regarding litigation may differ from those of the corporation's while an applicant can begin an application without substantial inconvenience, the litigation costs may be substantial for the corporation.  The existence of such a cost differential may cause the corporation to  settle before trial probably for an amount that was higher than was justified by the applicant's prospect of success in the case. Knowledge of this possibility may give the applicant an incentive to commence an application.227 Apart from the risk of strategic and opportunistic behaviour, other costs which may diminish the effectiveness of a judicially supervised oppression remedy include;  the organizational costs of judicial  supervision, and lack ofjudicial expertise in corporate matters.228 Notwithstanding these costs, it is assumed that the benefits of judicial supervision outweighs the costs. This does not however conclude the analysis in favour of an open ended statutory oppression remedy as currently contained-in the corporate statutes because an alternative would have been to expressly provide for the types of conduct which would give rise to an action urider-the remedy; Prior to the introduction of the current form of oppression remedy in Canadian corporate law, minority shareholders were protected by specific statutory provisions and by fiduciary duties. Those responsible for corporate law reform however felt that the combination "created 226  227  See supra note 214 and subsequent paragraphs. Cheffins, supra, note 9 at 790.  198 See the discussion in Chapter Five for details.  122  substantial uncertainty shareholders".  229  and provided  at best,  erratic protection  for minority  Emphasis was--shifted to the oppression remedy (amongst other  remedies) to aid minority shareholders.  In cases where the classification of the  instances which would give rise to oppressive conduct is impossible because of unforeseen future contingencies, parties to contracts will usually leave terms imprecise, thereby instructing the dispute-resolver to construe the contract equitable.  The  presence of an open-ended standard term suck as the oppression remedy can be justified on this basis. The dispute resolver of intracorporate disputes are the courts.  Any economic  justification for the presence of the oppression remedy h highly dependent on the ability of the court to correctly interpret the provisions in a manner that reflects the parties' bargain.  This implies that economic theory suggests that in applying the  oppression remedy the court should focu; on the content of tfie agreement between the participants, both in relation to express clauses add what the agreement would have been, in the absence of transaction costs. Participants in the corpor.H.ioii voi'ld gain more from the addition of the oppression iejrsfidy to corporate law if the courts can conveniently do this. However, difficulties may arise where ISie maucr UfW. whicli the court-is called to interpret is not covered in the contractual agrearaSit  j. pkusibk approach to the  problem would be to begin t y determining the issues that the parties had agreed m but had not included in the agreement because of transaction costs. Such terms woatd be, treated in the same manner as an expressly provided ferre. Where the panics thad not agreed on the matter in question, the ideal approach would be to consider, tiw matter in terms of a hypothetical bargain. Where such is the case, tbi? nature of the corpo. tlkm and the circumstances under which the applicant became iavoltf&sd in riie.busiiscsss might 229  Cheffins, ibid.  123  provide some assistance. Provided the structure of the corporation is fully appreciated, there should be little difficulty in deteimining whether or not '-t a given situation an applicant has been subjected to oppressive conduct.  Althoi'^h the expectations of a  shareholdercannotbe confined into a straightjacket, the two dominant characteristicsof the interests of a shareholder in a corporation are the ability to monitor the affairs of the corporation and the expectation of a return on his investment. When these have been infringed without good business justifications, 230 this may constitute prima-facie evidence of oppression.  HI,  Inter-relationship of the Oppression Remedy and the Corporate Structure The closely  structures.  and  widely-held  corporations manifest different economic  This implies that the application of the oppression remedy may be more  suited to the shareholders of one corporation than the other. Indeed, some writers have suggested that the remedy should not be available to the shareholders of widely-held corporations.231  In the United States, the remedy is limited to corporations with a  specified number of shareholders,232  No Canadian corporate statute contains such  limitation and there are case laws where relief have been granted under the remedy in widely-held c o r p o r a t i o n - . However, the Dickerson Committee suggested that the  This is in recognition of the fact that the withdrawal of dividend payment-perse is not evidence of oppression. Directors may decide to re-invest profits into the business instead of declaring dividends. Contrast: Devall v. Wainwright Gas Ca Ltd. (1932) 1 W.W.R.281 with Re: Ferguson &Imax Systems (1983) 150 D.L.R. 3d 718. 231 232 238  See, for example, Buckley & Connelly. Supra note 101 at 61 l-12.677-8of fiist edition. For example, the Minnesota and North Dakota legislation limit the application of the remedy to corporations with less than 35 shareholders. For instance, see Sparling v. Javelin Int'l Ltd., (1986) RJQ 1073 (Que. SC), Palmer v. Carling O'Keefe Ltd., (1989) 67 OR 161 (Ont. Div. Ct.) Alexander v. Westeel-Rosco Ltd. (1978) 22 OR (2d) 211.  124  remedy would be of most use in the closely-held corporations. Academic opinion is in support of this view and there are judicial pronouncement to the same effect. 2 3 4 To determine what economic analysts has to say about the oppression remedy and the type of corporation, the identification of the interests of the shareholders and the nature of the bargains reached in the closely and widely-held corporations is necessary. A closely-held corporation is usually formed or continued nn the basis of a personal relationship involving mutual confidence. There is usually an agreement or understanding that all or some of the shareholders are to participate in the conduct cf the business. Restrictions on the transfer of shares is the rule rather than the exception. The members often make relatively substantial capital contributions to the corporation. Shareholders in such corporations are a small close-knit group involved in the day to day operation of the business and financially and personally committed to the corporation.  These identifying features suggest that shareholder interests in such  corporations lie in four main areas: 1.  in employment and participation, given their close involvement with the corporation;  2.  in the status quo,' in order to protect the basis on which the business has been set up;  3.  -in the proper conduct of the corporation%affairs, in order-to ensure continued goodwill among the parties and the prosperity of the business;  4.  in their financial position, given the commitment of their personal resources to the corporation.  238  Prentice, supra, note 101, 59-60, Hannigan, "Section 459 of the Companies Act 1985 - A Code of Conduct for the Quasi-Partnership?", (1988) Lloyds Mar. and Comm. Law Q 60, 62-64. See supra, note 13 for judicial pronouncements.  125  Cti the other hand, the interests of shareholders in Ihe widely-held corporation are quite different and considerably more restricted.  There is usually no underlying personal  relationship and employment is rarely an issue.  Generally, the relationship is a much  more commercial one, with shareholders interested in such matters as dividend yield, capital appreciation and possible takeover bids and less concerned with the day to day running of the corporation. 235 Moreover, while there is generally a liquid market for shares in widely-held corporations, it is often difficult to find a buyer for shares i n a closely-held corporation especially when a minority interest is involved. 236 One important effect of this is that absence of liquid market negates the ideas of reliance on the stock market as a monitoring device.  The takeover mechanism which helps to align management  interests with that of the shareholders has no application to the closely-held corporation. In the widely-held corporation, the market for corporate control creates great incentives for management to maximize the welfare of the shareholders.  Incumbent managers  acknowledge that they will be subjected to a control contest if they do not act in the shareholders' interests.  This knowledge induces them to behave appropriately.  Managers and those in control of the closely-held corporation have little reason to be concerned about being displaced by outsiders regardless of the manner in which the business is carried on. Another important effect of the lack o f market for the'shares of closely-held corporations is that a minority shareholder does not have an effective exit option, Minority shareholders seeking to sell their shares will not be able to find bidders. 235  236  This does not imply that all the shareholders are not interested in the management of the corporation. Indeed, institutional shareholders and other shareholders with large shareholdings are as much concerned as shareholders in the clusely-held corporation about management matters. However, a large proportion of the sh areholders usually have little stakes and thereforeno identifiable management interests. See supra * note 111.  n n n n' 1 -n 'n- 'n t u u v u, \ u ' i I J  ,,'  126  Frequently, the only buyer is the majority who will have no incentive to purchase the shares at a price greater than the discounted value of the future stream of payments to which the minority is otherwise entitled. In contrast, as long as there is a market for the shares, a dissatisfied shareholder in a widely-held corporation can obtain the full value of his shares by selling them on the stock exchange. Given these factors, a minority shareholder in the closely-held corporation has a greater incentive than his counterpart in the widely-held corporation to contract for protection. Some of these protection are contained in the shareholder agreements.237 In the Sana vein, buy-se!l agreements provide exit option for them. However, these agreements are not often fully articulated because the costs of contracting will at some time exceed the benefits. Under economic analysis, this is an ideal situation f o r the application of oppression remedy since it will provide a remedy for conduct that breaches the agreement that the participants would have reached, absent transaction costs. Also, in the widely-held corporation, the bargain between shareholders and the corporation is not fully committed to writing because of transaction costs. The likelihood of selfinterested opportunistic conduct continues to exist despite the market for corporate control, the market for managerial talent and internal and external monitoring;30 This indicates that the oppression remedy should be as important for widely-held corporations as for their closely-held counterparts;- However, minimal role is assigned to t h e r e m e d y in the w i d e l y - h e l d c o r p o r a t i o n s u n d e r economic analysis. This attitude is  predicated on two reasons. The first reason is premised on ex ante compensation of shareholders. The reasoning here is that shareholders in widely-held corporations will have been See supra, note 119 for usual contents of the shareholders'agreements. 238  See supra, Chapter 3, Section III.  127  compensated ex ante against the possibility of wealth reducing conduct by those in control of the corporation. This ex-ante compensation is reflected in the price which the shareholders pay for the corporation's shares at the time of initial offering. Under economic analysis, the efficient capital market hypothesis teaches us that the price of a corporation's shares reflects all important public information concerning the corporation. On this level, shareholders would be taken to have consented to any selfserving conduct by the managers, hence the payment of a low price for the corporation's shares.  Any investor buying shares in a corporation with poor or  dishonest management should not complain about subsequent misconduct, as h e was compensated ex ante by lower shareprices. The second reason is premised on diversification of investments, the purpose of which is to reduce loss arising from unsystematic risk.239 Modem investment portfolio theory teaches individual and institutional investors to diversify their investments in many corporations. While an investor may lose by virtue of some unsystematic risks, he should gain from the superior performance of other corporations in his investment portfolio. The method in which a particular corporation is run should therefore be of little concern to the shareholders; what they lose from some corporations, they should cain f r o m others. The combined effect of these two reasons is that the conduct of those in control of the widely-held corporation will be of no concern to its shareholders. This implies that legal restraints on such conduct, such as the oppression remedy has little purpose in widely-held corporations.  Unsystematic or company specific risks are those tied to a specific corporation. Systematic or market risks are those that cause the securities of all corporations to move in the same direction. See Macintosh, supra, note 387, 210-211.  128  Economic analysts however, accept that legal rules can b e used i n widely-held corporations to restrain one-time'divergencies by those in control of the corporation. Such conduct is assumed to be wealth reducing.  IV  Conclusion  The oppression remedy accords significant protection f o r the interests of minority shareholders. I t would b e possible for a shareholder to provide either i n the corporation's Articles or in a shareholders' agreement for adequate protection but the possibility of such is hindered by transaction costs of drafting a lengthy contract, coupled with the inability of the parties to sufficiently provide f o r all future contingencies. The inclusion of a broad and open-ended oppression remedy therefore fulfills the need for protection by providing f o r the minority shareholders what they would have bargained f o r in t h e absence of transaction costs.  In interpreting the  remedy, the court have a role to play in filling the void created by any corporate contracts. In realization of this need, H o f f m a n n , J., noted in Re: Posteate & Denby (Agencies) Ltd.240 that the oppression remedy enables the court to give full effect t o the terms and understanding upon which'the members; of the corporation became associated, but not to rewrite them. Where this i s the case, the nature and structure of the firm should provide guidance as to how internal disputes should b e settled. And, given the nature of the bargains reached by the shareholders in both the closely and widely-held corporations, a strong argument can b e made that the oppression remedy ought to b e limited to the closely-held corporations.  (1987) B.C.L.C. 8, at 14.  129  B.  THE DERIVATIVE ACTION  I.  General Overview of the Remedv  Where a Corporation has been injured by some urrongdoing, a shareholder of the corporation arguably also has been injured through the diminution in value of his or her shares that is traceable to the corporate injury. Responding t o the problem, the courts, followed by the legislatures, developed the derivative action whereby a shareholder was permitted to bring an action to rectify a wrong committed against the corporation for which management did not seek redress, often because they or one of their members were the alleged wrongdoers. Under the derivative action, a shareholder brings an action on behalf of the corporation. Today, most jurisdictions contain detailed provisions for the derivative action in their corporation statutes.241 Under the British Columbia Company Act, a member242 or director of the company, subject to four grounds being established, may with the leave of the court bring or defend an action in the name and on behalf of the company. Such action may b e brought to enforce any right, duty o r obligation owed to the company that could b e enforced by the company itself or to obtain damages for any breach of any such right, duty or obligations. The four qualifications are that: 0  he has made reasonable efforts to cause the directors of the company to commence or diligently prosecute or defencLthe action;  (ii)  241 242  he is acting in good faith;  For example, B.C.C.A., S.225, C.B.C.A. S.239. Under the C.B.C.A., the action is available to a complainant which is defined in Si'CtJOJ) 238 as meaning (a) a registered holder or beneficial owner and a former registered holder.or beneficial owner, of a security of a corporation or any of its affiliates; (b) a director or an officer or a former director or officer;- (c) the Director; or (d) any other person who in the discretion of a court is a proper person to make an application.  130  (iii)  it is prima facie in the interests of the company that the action be brought or defend; and  (iv)  in the case of a member, that he was a member of the company at the time of the transaction or other event giving rise to the cause of action.243 Under the derivative action provisions in most corporate law jurisdictions, a  paramount role is given to the court. For instance, while such action is pending, the court may give directions for the conduct of the action and order that the corporation pay the interim costs of the persons controlling the conduct of the action.244 Similarly, no action brought or defended under the section can be discontinued, settled or dismissed without the approval of the ermri The orders that the court could make are wide including an order authorizing the complainant or any person to control the conduct of the action. Where provision is made for a statutory derivative action, it is the usually exclusive method by which a shareholder can vindicate corporate rights. 2 4 6  II.  Economic analysis of the Derivative Action  A central concept in modem institutional economics is that cf "agency costs" which refers t o the costs that shareholders must incur to hold their management accountable.  Corporate law as applied to "widely-held corporations, builds on the  assumption that share ownership is separate from oantrriL. The shares of most widelyheld corporations are widely dispersed and managers tend to own relatively small 24 3  TheC.B.C.A. does not contain this fourth qualification.  244  S.225(4) B.C.C.A.; 5.240 C.B.C.A.  245  S.225(6) B.C.C.A.; S.242(2) C.B.C.A.  246  See Farnham v. Fingold (1973) 2 O.R. 132; 135 (C.A.).  131  percentages of the shares of corporations that they control. Given the separation of management f r o m ownership in widely-held corporations, the agency theory assumes that the managers may sometimes find it possible and profitable to divert income or assets f r o m the corporation to themselves or engage in other forms of self-opportunistic behaviour which is not wealth maximizing for the shareholders. The separation of control f r o m ownership thus demands a system of accountability and monitoring to ensure that managers act i n the interests of the shareholders. Shareholders seek to limit these possibilities of self-seeking conduct by a variety of private contractual control mechanisms which include internal and external monitoring and incentive compensation. In addition, market forces which include the market for corporate control act as constraints on corporate management. The stock market also penalizes the manager to a limited degree by discounting the value of the corporation's stock if it believes repetition of the misconduct is likely. However, none of these techniques is costless. The high costs of contracting preclude writing contracts that completely define the duties of corporate managers. Identifying all possible contingencies as well as appropriate responses is highly impractical because the direct costs of negotiating and drafting such contracts would be prohibitive. More importantly, attempts to define in advance what managers should do in light of certain contingencies may simply prove to b e wrong in light of new information and expertise. Thus, the direct and indirect costs of defining all possible future contingencies that might affect the manager's decision making, as well as responses to those contingencies, make defining adequate performance impossible. In addition, internal and external monitoring is cost efficient only up to the point that additional expenditures spent on monitoring avert a greater discounted loss in the future. Further expenditures on loss prevention would not be rational if the cost of d c l c c t i o n o r e n f o r c e m e n t will cxceed the additional loss prevented. As a result, there is  132  always a minimum level of exposure to losses caused by managerial misbehaviour that rational shareholdersmust accept,' This level is called the corporation's "agency cost". N o single corporation's agency costs can b e specified with precision. The result is tliat the stock market has imperfect information regarding the true agency cost of each corporation.  Potential shareholders would be unable to differentiate among  corporations in terms of the relative likelihood that their managements will misbehave in the future. They will to a degree treat both good and bad corporations alike. This implies that even the shares of corporations whose managements have not misbehaved will b e discounted and some shareholders may suffer to the extent that their corporation's stock is excessively discounted because the average agency cost exceeds the "true" agency cost applicable to their corporation. Thus, an economicjustification for the presence of the derivative action is that it reduces average agency costs. Because shareholder coordination is not necessary in the case of the action, its availability economizes on costs that otherwise would b e necessarily incurred if shareholders were required to take collection action.  For  example, the costs incurred when a plaintiff in a derivative action obtains an injunction would likely be far less than those that shareholders would have to incur to organize a proxy fight. Similarly, in jurisdictions which allow the plaintiffs counsel to be compensated only to- the extent that he i s successful,247 the cost of wasted efforts is not directly borne by shareholders.  Cm this basis, the derivative action represents an efficient  solution to the organizational problem that would otherwise arise were it necessary to allocate the costs of opposing management proportionately among all shareholders, Moreover, the law applicable to derivative actions gives the court the discretion to make an order both while the action is pending and on a final disposition of the case, 247  Most jurisdictions in the United States allow this practice.  133  allowing the plaintiffs legal fees to be paid by the corporation.248 The practical effect of this rule is to create a mechanism that taxes the legal costs proportionately among all shareholders thereby ensuring that no shareholder is able to "free ride" on the efforts of another. Another important use for derivative suits is to protect the market for corporate control when confronted with a hostile tender offer, target corporation management often resorts to various devices to thwart the bid, consequently denying shareholders a profitable opportunity.  Whether this conduct is in the bestfen^-terminterest of the  corporation is debatable, but who bears the immediate cost and who reaps the shortterm benefits is clear. The availability of shareholder derivative atiion may curtail the ability of target managers and target boards to defeat a tender offer by manipulating the corporate machinery.  Although shareholders have, ifs the "cast, unsuccessfully  challenged the devices employed by target management to block hostile tender offers,249 the courts have not been unresponsive to the plights of the shareholders.250 Derivative action represents a cost-effective ir«eans of deterring opportunistic behaviour by agents, particularly in the case of non-recurring "one shot" transactions that the market cannot be expected to discipline effectively. In addition, a successful derivative action has the potential of increasing the value of the corporation's equity for two reasons. First, in most derivative actions, money is in dispute. Presumably, if the plaintiff succeeds, the money flows back into the corporation and be claimed by its equity holders. Secondly, since the potential of a derivative action deters managerial 248 249  See B.C.C.A, S.225(4)(b) and (5)(b); C.B.C.A. S,240(d). See, for example, Data Probe Acquisition Corp. v. Datatab Inc. (1983) 722 F.2d 1; Panter v. Marshall Held & Co. (1981) 454 OS 1092. In Norlin Corp., 744 F.2d 264. the court held that once a prima facie showing is made that directors have a sclf-intcrcst in n particular corporate transaction, the burden rhifts to them to demonstrate that the transaction is fair and serves the best interests of the corporation and its shareholders.  134  malfeasance, a successful action improves the extent to which the corporation is run in the interests of its shareholders. 'A successful action puts the corporation's management on notice that they are being monitored more closely and this monitoring aligns man- serial behaviour with shareholder interests. However, the foregoing benefits do not suggest that the derivative action does not generate its own costs. As with other liability rules, the derivative action has costs associated with its use. The most significant of these costs is the risk of strategic and opportunisticbehaviour t y minority shareholders. Shareholderswith little investments can bring derivative actions on behalf of the corporation. Because of his small stake in the corporation, the applicant or his counsel may have little incentive to consider the effect of the action on other shareholders, who ultimately bear the costs. Where the action appears to b e a positive net value project because of the possible recovery of attorney's fees, an attorney may pursue it regardless of its effect on the value of the corporation. Another cost generated by the derivative action is the chilling effect it imposes on sensible risk taking.  Derivative actions discourage risk taking by managers.  Managers have a tendency to avoid risk because they cannot diversify the value of their human capital. Shareholders, however, can better diversifyriskbecause of their access to capital markets. Therefore they want to create incentives for managers to accept all positive net p r e s e n t v a l u e p r o j e c t s , even those that are risky. However, risky projects c a n h a v e p o o r o u t c o m e s ; if managers are sued whenever decisions-that were optimal  ex ante turn out poorly ex post, they will tend to avoid risky projects. This result may not be wealth maximizing for the shareholders. The problem of error cost similarly discourages risk taking by managers. Courts may have great difficulty in measuring manager's efforts or output. Because most law suits follow poor outcomes, courts may tend to assume that such outcomes  smmmm V  V  n<n, n n V u u u u ' u t31,nuL  -  -  «  135  are a product of bad actions. This results i n the reinforcement of manager's tendency to avoid risk, which may not be in the interest of most shareholders. Tn addition, derivative suits may reduce net shareholder wealth. The litigation costs imposed on the firm may well exceed the damages awarded even in successful actions. Some derivative actions are based on public policy issues and if won, will reduce shareholder wealth. For example, actions motivated by environmental concerns or brought to halt the payment of bribes to foreign officials would, if successful, undoubtedly decrease the wealth of the corporation's equity holders.  However,  because most shareholders hold a portfolio of securities, the fact that the costs in an individual derivative action may exceed the recovery to the corporation is not necessarily adverse to their interests, if there is a generic benefit to their broader interests as diversified shareholders in the form of enhanced deterrence against unfair self-dealing. Ch a balance, it may be asserted that shareholder litigation as represented by the derivative action profoundly affect the conduct of corporate managers. Although Ihe system of corporate governance is not costless, its benefits are quite immense.  Ill,  The Derivative Action a n d the Corporate Structure To enable one to determine what economic analysis has to say about the  relationship of the derivative action and. the corporate structure, it will b e useful to examine the nature of the interests and bargains reached by the shareholders in both the closely ana widely-held corporations. This exercise has been undertaken earlier in Section II (Part A) of this chapter, when the relationship between the oppression remedy and the corporate structure was examined.  Suffice it to say that while a  closely-held corporation is usually formed or continued on the basis of a personal relationship involving mutual confidence and understanding that all or some of the shareholders are to participate in the conduct of the business, the interests of  136  shareholders in the widely-held corporation are quite different and considerably more restricted. In addition, while there fs generally a liquid market for shares i n widelyheld corporations, it is often difficult to find a buyer f o r shares in a closely-hell corporation, especially when a minority interest is involved. In some circumstances, in closely-held corporations, the normal policy reasons for requiring a plaintiff to employ the f o r m of the derivative action may not b e picscai or will b e less weighty, even though the action alleges in substance a corporate injury! A closely-held corporation is often treated as essentially an incorporated partnership with each shareholder retaining t h e right to sue individually to-rectify wrongs to the corporation.251 On the one hand, the likelihood of a disinterested Mard is far smaller in such corporations because the majority shareholders are likely also to be the corporation's managers.  Similarly, the concept of a corporate injury that is distinct  f r o m an injury to the shareholders approaches the fictional in the case of a corporation with only a handful of shareholders. In addition, the typical procedural rules applicable to derivative actions often make little sense in the context of a dispute between persons who are effectively incorporated partners. These rules originated in the United States and were essentially designed to protect widely-held corporations against strike suits and frivolous actions by plaintiffs holding only a nominal-interest in the corporation. In Watson v . Button 2 5 2 die court found that the usual policy reasons that require an action principally alleging an injury to the corporation to be treated as a derivative action are not always applicable to the closely-held coiporation. Apart from policy considerations, the presence of an open-ended oppression  remedy constitutes another reason why the derivative action may be of little concern to minority shareholders of a closely-held corporation. Facts giving rise to wrongs to the 251  For example, Donahue v. Rodd Electrotype (1975) 367 Mass. 578, 328 N.E. 2d 50$.  252  (1956) 235 F.2d 235.  137  corporation, such as breaches of fiduciary duties owed by directors, can often b e the subject matter of an oppression retiiedy as well as a statutory derivative action.253 An applicant seeking to bring a derivative action must satisfy a number of statutory prerequisites and must obtain the leave of the court before proceeding.  N o such  prerequisites exist with the oppression remedy and leave is not required to bring an application. Moreover, the remedies available are much broader under the oppression remedy. The above reasoning suggests that the derivative action may b e a more ideal remedy for the protection of minority shareholders in the widely-held corporation. T h e widespread ownership structure and the separation phenomenon which exists in the widely-held corporation makes the derivative action an effective system of policing the board of directors. It ensures that some degree of accountability and control exists over the board of directors and senior officials either directly by allowing shareholders the right to bring an action against directors or officials if they have breached their duty or indirectly by the threat of such an action if duties might be breached. However, some economic analysts do not go this far.254 They believe that the derivative action is relatively unimportant in providing desirable management behaviour and in reducing agency costs. They maintain that the derivative action fail for several reasons:  the threat t o an otherwise valuable relationship, the chilling effect of  derivative a c t i o n s o n sensible-risk taking ancl'lh e^ existence of less costly alternative  methods of assuring proper conduct.  Contractual and market based governance  m e c h a n i s m s a r e b e l i e v e d t o b e m o r e effective means of protecting minority  shareholders, 2 5 5 F o r instance, the market for corporate control is believed to provide 253  254  occ  Kor example, Sparling v. Javelin Int'l Ltd. (1986) R..I.(J. 1073, Re: Peterson and Kanata Invs. Ltd. (1975) 60D.LR. 3d 527. See, tin- example, Fischel & Bradley, "The Role of Liability Rules and the Derivative Suit in Corporate Law: A Theoretical and Empirical Analysis", (1986) 71 Cornell L. Rev. 261. : For a more detailed discussion of these governance mechanisms, see Chapter 3.  .  n n n n ,~'h o~n c U U U U > LI 0 U J  138  managers with an incentive to perform well and thus keep share prices high, as well as a device for displacing management teams who perform poorly. Similarly, managerial performance is subjected to internal and external monitoring.  Such arrangements is  believed to reduce the probability of managerial misconduct. In addition, emphasis is placed on executive compensation agreements which are often structured i n a manner that presumably solve most of the conflicts between managers and shareholders. Product market competition may force managers to maximize the profits of the corporation. Furthermore, the availability of an exit option enables dissatisfied shareholders to liquidate their investments and re-invest same in other corporations which they believe that are more efficiently managed. The existence of these alternative corporate governance mechanisms implies that liability rules such as the derivative action has little purpose in widely-held corporations.:. Economic analysts however, do not completely write off the utility of the derivative action in the widely-held corporations. They recognize that it plays some role in deterring large one-shot frauds. If there were no such thing as a derivative action, 256 m a n a g e r s c o u l d decide, at least in theory, to distribute all of their c o r p o r a t i o n ' s a s s e t s to t h e m s e l v e s . They also recognize that the derivative action plays a useful role- in deterring o t h e r e g r e g i o u s derelictions by corporate managers.  IV  Conclusion  Derivative actions assist in maintaining the efficiency of an economic system. The availability of the recourse is essential if management's fiduciary obligations to its shareholders are to constitute more than a precatory body of law.  But it must be  recognized that the derivative action is neither the initial or primary protection for Ignoring here the role of criminal law.  139  minority shareholders against managerial misconduct.  A variety of contractual and  market forces also operate to hold corporate fiduciaries accountable:  internal and  external monitoring; compensation agreements; the disciplinary power of the market and shareholder voting - all these mechanisms and the regulatory authority of governmental agencies would constitute significant protections in the absence of private litigation. Even if dissatisfied shareholders had no other recourse than to sell their shares, such action taken collectively, might also inhibit managerial overreaching, to the extent it depressed the value of the corporation's shares. However, no single technique of accountability is likely to be optimal under all circumstances.  Each has its characteristics and limitations,  Shareholders would b e  better served t y an overlapping system of protections when properly structured. T h e derivative action could enhance the capabilities of these other remedies of accountability by (i)  ensuring a measure ofjudicial oversight,  (ii)  providing a remedy that does not depend upon the ability of widespread shareholders to take coordinated action, and  (iii)  protecting the free functioning of the market for corporate control by subjecting to a measure of judicial review improper actions intended to prevent a change in control.  Moreover, derivative action may offer the only-effective remedy in those situations where a control group has the ability to engage in self-dealing transactions with the corporation. T h e minority shareholders o f closdy-held corporations may have little need for the protection offered by the derivative action.  In the first place, the oppression  remedy covers most types of conduct which could be appropriate subject matters of a derivative action.  Minority shareholders might prefer seeking relief under the  oppression remedy because of the broad remedies available and absence of statutory  * nVl-h n n oli 1 u Oru u " wo  140  pre-requisites for the initiation of proceedings.  Secondly, most of the policy reasons  for requiring a plaintiff to employ the f o r m of the derivative action may b e lacking in the case of a closely-held corporation.  This line of reasoning suggests that the  derivative action may be more suited to shareholders of widely-held corporations.  C.  THE APPRAISAL REMEDY  I.  General O v e r v i e w of t h e R e m e d y Of central concern to any minority shareholder would b e the many and varied  changes which occur in the corporation. Certain changes not only change the structure of the corporation and the nature of investment i n it, they also radically alter an individual shareholder's position. Legitimate business expectations may be frustrated, the shareholder may b e squeezed out, in that his personal interest in the corporation is made less desirable by management or majority shareholder design, he may be "locked in" by destruction of the market for the company's shares; he may be expropriated by statutory procedure; he may suffer adverse income tax consequences. By t h e o l d r u l e s o f c o m m o n l a w , corporations were viewed through the  jurisprudential prism of partnership. c o r p o r a t e changes.257  Unanimity was required for all fundamental  W i t h i n t h e limits of business risks, investment in corporate  enterprise was antecedently known and certainin-ihat the enterprise could not change without the shareholder's approval. The unanimity rule vested in each shareholder a veto power over decisions to change the corporation fundamentally. But the necessity for corporate flexibility in adapting the enterprise : to changing fortunes or business conditions eclipsed that avenue of shareholder protection. Such changing environments may demand an internal recasting of the capital structure of the enterprise, perhaps 257  Laltin, "Minority and Dissenting Shareholders' Right in Fundamental Changes, (1958) 23 L. & Contemp. 1'rob. 307, 308.  141  including an alteration of the relative rights of outstanding securities, or the addi r i " n «r e v e n elimination of a class of securities.  Business conditions may also dictate a  reseating of the enterprise either t y corporate combination or t y increase or reduction in the size or scope of the enterprise.258 Minority shareholders would want to protect themselves against being forced to participate in ventures beyond their initial contemplation; that is, to continue to invest in an enterprise that has altered its character in some material respect from the investment initially contemplated. Appraisal remedy represents the right of a shareholder to require the corporation to purchase his shares at an appraised valueif the corporation takes osrtain triggering actions from which he dissents.259 T h e appraisal right tries to mitigate the risk of hardship or injustice to minority s h a r e h o l d e r  It works as a device to reconcile the  m a j o r i t y ' s need t o a d j u s t t o c h a n g i n g economic conditions with the right of the m e m b e r s of t h e minority t o r e f u s e t o participate in ventures beyond their initial  contemplation.  Such a right of appraisal is intended to avoid the common law  d i f f i c u l t i e s o f t r y i n g to restrict an abuse of power detrimental to minority shareholders t y t h e d i r e c t o r s o rby majority shareholders where shareholcer a p p r o v a l i s r e q u i r e d . C o r p o r a t e l a w statutory p r o v i s i o n s authorize a shareholder who dissents from a t r i g g e r i n g t r a n s a c t i o n in t h e p r o p e r manner and time to demand that the corporation p u r c h a s e s his shares a t their f a i r value. 260 The right arises only in situations involving  major structural changes often described as fundamental corporate changes and while the enterprise is a going concern. 354 258 259  Macintosh, "Shareholders Appraisal Rights in Canada", supra, note 9. J.S. Ziegel, Daniels, Johnston & Macintosh, Cases and Materials in Partnerships and Canadian Business Corporations (2d. 1989) 1143. Section 231 B.C.C.A.; Section 190 C.B.C.A.  142  If the shareholder and the corporation cannot agree on the price, the statutes make provision forjudicial appraisal of the shares to determine their prices. 2 6 1 Where the action to which exception is taken does not fall under one of the events triggering the appraisal remedy, the shareholder can sometimes bring an action for relief from oppression or a derivative claim.  II.  Economic Analysis of the Appraisal Remedy  The appraisal right may b e seen as a trade-off for the loss of individual veto rights which shareholders had when fundamental corporate'transactions required unanimous approval.  The exit option provided by appraisal rights supplements the  requirement of super majoritarian ratification through a special resolution. But it cannot be assumed that the existence of an appraisal remedy will always increase the value of investments. The exercise of the right of appraisal generates its cost. Because dissenters have the right to demand that their shares be purchased by the corporation, they have the right to withdraw capital from the corporation. This may force the corporation to sell organization-specific assets at distress prices or incur flotation and related costs to raise new capital262 A relatively modest number of shareholders claiming the appraisal remedy may constitute a severe economic.threat to the corporate enterprise. A sudden and largely unpredictable drain may be imposed upon a corporation's cash position if some shareholders go the appraisal road. This demand for a cash payout to the shareholders may come at a time when the enterprise is in need of every liquid dollar it can put its hand on. 261  262  Section231(4) B.C.C.A.; Section 190(15) and (16) C.B.C.A. Because of these costs, non-financial f j r m s Hn not use redeemable shares as a financing device. By contrast, financial organizations such as <>|wn-end mutual funds can issue redeemable claims because financial assets (i.e., publicly traded Securities) are not organization specific and can be tfadid with low fiassststa aiste leg I-.F-. Fama & M.C. Jensen, "Agency Problems and Residual Claims", (1983) 26 J. Law & Econs. 327, 337-39.  143  Exiting 1he corporation through Ihe exercise of an appraisal light might give rise to a taxation event, the cost of which might have been avoided by remaining in the corporation and accepting the fundamental corporate change.  There is an added  problem generated by reinvestment and brokerage costs in situations where the minority shareholder, after exercising his right of appraisal in one corporation, seeks to reinvest in another. The appraisal procedure is highly technical with several distinct steps to be completed in limited time periods. right.  A little slip may extinguish the exercise of the  Moreover, the appraisal process itself is costly.  Corporations must devote  considerable time and hire lawyers and other experts. The same applies to the minority shareholderwho may not be able to afford the financial costs of retaining a lawyer. T o malice matters worse, some of these costs may not b e recovered in the appraisal proceeding.  The uncertainty created by the possibility that dissenters will b e over-  compensated represents a further cost. Lack of precise valuation methods adds to the possibility of over-compensation.  Any method of valuation may b e highly inexact;  different appraisers will reach radically different conclusions regarding the value of the firm and a particular shareholder's proportionate interest. Uncertainty is a cost to riska v e r s e s h a r e h o l d e r s a n d it m a k e s t h e appraisal procedure less attractive. Shareholders  are the losers if these costs deter value-increasing transactions. •  -..:.•..•  The foregoing costs do not imply that the appraisal right does not have its benefits.. Its chief benefit lies in the fact that it is a mechanism admirably suited to reconcile the need to give the majority members of a normally perpetual, organization the right to make drastic changes in the enterprise. T o meet new conditions as they a r i s e w i t h t h e need i n such organization  to prevent the minority from being  involuntarily dragged along into a drastically changed enterprise in which it has no confidence.' The potential value of the appraisal right lies in holding a put option that arises on the happening of specified triggering events.  The put option enables the  minority shareholder who would not otherwise be able to do so, to cash out of the  144  enterprise i(in the case of a closdy-foeld corporation) or to cash out at a better price than the current market price (in the aase of a widely-held ooiporaticn) and (in both cases) to avoid the effects of the fundamental change.  This has the prospective effect of  protecting shareholdersagainst certain inks. Ex ante, it may not b e clear to a shareholder if he will be in the majority o r minority with respect to an intended fundamental corporate change. Where he is i n the majority, he will bear part of the cost of an exercise of the appraisal right t y the majority. Thus, from a prospective viewpoint, it is not clear whether an appraisal right will represent a benefit or burden.  Nevertheless, t y reducing the probability of  unprofitable fundamental corporate changes, the appraisal right represents a value to all shareholders. In a situation where an opportunistic fundamental corporate change may have the potential effect of reducing enterprise value, the availability of an appraisal right may serve as 2 backstop if the requirement to secure voting approval of fundamental changes fails.  And where the existence of a controlling shareholder, management  control of the proxy machinery o r shareholder apathy makes it possible to secure the a p p r o v a l o f a v a l u e d e c r e a s i n g fundamental change, a widespread exercise of the  appraisal right may abort the change. Ch the other hand, the existence of an-appraisal right will not p r e v e n t value-generating transactions.  It is possible that widespread  e x e r c i s e - o f appraisal r i g h t may i n s o m e cases ocGur with respect to value-generating  changes, especially 'where shareholders are unable to share the inside information processed t y managers.  B u t i n s u c h cases, the managers have an incentive to reveal  t h e i n f o r m a t i o n t o shareholders i n s o f a r a s such a course of action will not harm the  corporation'sbusiness and competitive interests. From a more general perspective, the appraisal right furthers the ideals of fairness in the modern corporate enterprise.  It prevents a shareholder from being  145  forced into a change he thinks ill-considered or unfair.263  It attunes management  sensibilities to shareholder interests as opposed to those of insiders.  Voting  requirements and an oppression provision further this end too, but absent an appraisal right, power i n the modem corporation may be unduly concentrated in the majority. Appraisal creates an additional consideration which the insiders must take into account. It is more than a shield of protection;  it is often used as a weapon to gain real  advantage for the minority. Without this weapon, there is a deep void in the power relations within the corporation.264  Whether the benefits of appraisal outweigh the costs is an empirical question for which there is no obvious answer.  T h e retention of appraisal remedies in most  corporate statutes creates a presumption, however, that appraisal produces net benefits. But the strength of this presumption should not be exaggerated.  Under economic  analysis, the appraisal remedy is viewed as an implied as opposed to an express  contractual term.  T h e costs of writing and enforcing protective covenants in bond  contracts, for example, are deliberately incurred by the parties to the agreement. It is unlikely that the parties would incur this expense unless there were net benefits. With the appraisal remedy, the parties do not directly incur the costs of writing and negotiating contracts but instead adopt the standard term set by corporate-statutes. Thus only a weak Inference can be drawn about the desirability of appraisal remedies.?65 263  264  265  H o w e v e r , ttie p r e s e n c e of appraisal remedies is evidence that they  . .••• •• Appraisal involves "[a] delicate balancing of the interests of majority and minority owners . . . for the majority owners should not be chained to what they believe to be unsound business judgment; yet, neither should the minority owners be bound to remain shari'liolikiswhcn tlicy have similar misgivings.", Voeller v. Neilston &Warehouse Co. (1941) 311 U.S. 531 at 535-6, See also Chicago CoT. v. Munds (1934) 20 Del. Ch. 142. Ebll:., "l)c Facto Mergers in Delaware: Hariton v. Arco Electronics Inc. (1963) 49 Va. L. Rev. 1261at 1293. The inference would be stronger if firms could contract out of an appraisal remedy provided by corporate law. In this event, appraisal would be a standard form contractual provision that the parties could alter by agreement.  146  p r o d u c e n e t benefits. R e c e n t j u d i c i a l d e c i s i o n s h a v e also emphasised t h e i m p o r t a n c e o f t h e a p p r a i s a l mmft: f^  ID.  ,fi  Appraisal Remedy and the Corporate Structure G e n e r a l l y s p e a k i n g , shareholders i n w i d e l y - h e l d corporations will n o t b e Viry  c o n c e r n e d w i t h f u n d a m e n t a l c o r p o r a t e c h a n g e s that do not d e c r e a s e t h e m a r k e t v a l u e of t M r shares.  In c o n t r a s t , shareholders in c l o s e l y - h e l d corporations may have good  r e a s o n t o b e c o n c e r n e d e v e n if t h e r e i s n o adverse effects o n t h e value of their shares. W h i l e t h e a p p r a i s a l r i g h t s may be of little value in the former case, in the latter case it m a y b e o f g r e a t value. theory  Two reasons exist for this proposition: the modern capital  w h i c h i n c l u d e s t h e i n v e s t m e n t p o r t f o l i o diversification theory and the  availability o r non-availalality of a market-exit option.  The Modern Capital Theory and the Investment Portfolio Diversification Theory Modern capital theory267 indicates when shareholders are likely to be concerned with fundamental corporate changes that do not adversely affect share values. Economists divide the. risks facing shareholders into two types; namely unsystematic and systematic risks.  This division indicates that some risks are peculiar- to a given  corporation while others are reflective of general economic conditions and trends affecting the market as a whole.  Peculiar risks are unsystematic while the latter is  systematic. I n v e s t m e n t p o r t f o l i o diversification t h e o r y teaches shareholders to diversify u n s y s t e m a t i c r i s k s b y h o l d i n g a p o r t f o l i o o f s h a r e s in m a n y corporations. The effect of 266  For example, sea Re Domglas Inc. (1980) 13 B.L.R. 135. Weinberger v. UOP, Inc. (1983) 457 A. 2d 701.  267  R. Brealey & S. Meyers, Principles of Corporate Finance (New York: McGraw-Hill Inc. 1981). •  147  a fluctuation in the price of any single share in the portfolio arising f r o m unsystemaffi influences will, on the average, be offset by contrary movements in the prices of othSF shares in the portfolio.268  Shareholders who diversify their investments will 88  substantially less unconcerned with changes in unsystemaffi; n s k o f  1115  corporation than  those who cannot do so. Systematic risk is n o t diversifiable because the f f F 5 8  o f 311  corporations will  tend to be affected in the same direction by general economic conditions. T h e value of the appraisal right against fundamental corporate changes will thus depend o n t h e ability of shareholders to diversify their investments and also on the ability to sell their shares in the market in response to changes in risk that do not suit their risk p r e f e r e n c e s .  T h e widely-held  a n d closely-held corporations will be  considered.  The Widely-Held Corporations  E c o n o m i c analysts a r g u e that the appraisal remedy is likely to be of little value in protecting t h e shareholders.  Because of t h e availability of a liquid market, a  dissenting shareholder may simply sell his shares in the  market without loss of ranital  and purchase a more satisfactory investment. But the quoted price may not reflect the fair value of the shares. Where a corporation's shares are thinly traded (as in most C a n a d i a n c o r p o r a t i o n s ) there i s a risk.of short-run fluctuations in the market price of t h e s h a r e s a w a y f r o m an e q u i l i b r i u m value. Arguably, the minority shareholder might wish to b e p r o t c c t c d against this risk by being assured a reliable and fair exit option as r e p r e s e n t e d by t h e appraisal right. However, given the relative costs of the appraisal option as opposed to a market value, it will be inconceivable that the right would be a  Macintosh, supra, note 9 s.iV!ll.  148  valued protection for minority shareholders against changes that do not affect the share value; In Canada, the Ontario Business Corporations Act269 formerly restricted the appraisal remedy to closely-held corporations. This was based on the recommendation of the report of the Committee on Mergers, Amalgamations and Certain Related Matters,270 which advised that the determining factor on which an appraisal remedy, if it should be granted at all, should rest in the presence of absence of a market. According to the Committee, in the case of the widely-held corporation, the remedy would not appear to be any more effective than if the shareholder were to sell his stock in the face of a triggering transaction and certainly not persuasive enough to compensate f o r the cash drain which may be caused a corporation, to the possible detriment of the corporation, its creditors and the majority or the possibility that a transaction might have to be called off, because of the cash drain in meeting appraisal rights. The Committee seemed to have agreed with the conclusion reached by Bayless Manning271 that "appraisal should be considered an economic substitute for the stock exchange and its use should be limited to situations at which the exchange, or some kind of a reasonable market is not available". However, the current form of the Ontario Business Corporations Act and indeed other corporate statutes in Canada do not limit the exercise of therightto closely-held corporations. There are somegood reasons why the market exit option may not be an a d e q u a t e p r o t e c t i o n f o r t h e shareholders.  First, large shareholders who are forced to  sell quickly to e s c a p e the fundamental corporate change may realize an inferior price in the market b e c a u s e of the hurried liquidation of the iarge block.  Second, all  269  Section 100.  270  Ontario Select Committee on Company Law (1973) 52.  271  Manning, "The Shareholder's Appraisal Remedy: An Essay for Frank Coker" (1962) 72 Yale L.J. 223.  .  149  s h a r e h o l d e r s , w h e t h e r l a r g e o r small, m a y only b e a b l e t o r e a l i z e a p r i c e that already r e f l e c t s t h e m a r k e t ' s anticipation o f - t h e e f f e c t o f t h e fundamental change.'"  The  possibility o f a d e m o r a l i z e d market in which fair prices are not available and in which m a n y c o r p o r a t i o n s publicly o f f e r t o b u y their o w n shares b e c a u s e t h e market grossly u n d e r v a l u e s them s u g g e s t s that a c c e s s t o m a r k e t v a l u e i s n o t a r e a s o n a b l e alternative f o r a dissenting m i n o r i t y s h a r e h o l d e r . F i n a l l y , a n y restriction in the exercise of appraisal rights based on the availability of s t o c k m a r k e t may be inconsistent with the purpose of appraisal establishing a r e s e r v a t i o n p r i c e for all or part of the corporation in situations where c o o r d i n a t i o n o r conflict o f interest problems might otherwise lead to inferior outcomes.  The Closely-Held Corporations S h a r e h o l d e r s i n c l o s e l y - h e l d corporations for which there exists no liquid market f o r their s h a r e s tend t o h a v e different response to shifts in enterprise risk than their c o u n t e r p a r t s i n w i d e l y - h e l d corporations. They are often substantially underdiversified s i n c e a l a r g e part o f their wealth (including their employment) is tied up in the corporation.  In m o s t such enterprises, there is no reliable market exit option.  Although members often attempt to reduce the adverse effects of the absence of the market exit option by private contractual arrangements such as the buy-sell agreements, such arrangements have limited effects.  Shares .of closely-held corporations will  generally be difficult to sell and may be subject to strict restrictions on alienability, reflecting the quasi-partnership status of many small,incorporated businesses. On this b a s i s , t h e e x i t o p t i o n p r o v i d e d by the appraisal right reflects an important protection for the minority shareholder against the dangers of shifts in the risk of the enterprise.  M.A. Eisenberg, "The Structure of the Corporation", (Boston: Little, Brown & Co., 1976) 7984.  150  Similarly,  opportunistic  fundamental  corporate  changes  designed  to  a c c o m m o d a t e t h e r i s k p r e f e r e n c e s o f m a n a g e r s o r m a j o r i t y s h a r e h o l d e r s a r e likely t o occur.  M a n a g e r s o f closely-held c o r p o r a t i o n s a r e o f t e n u n d e r d i v e r s i f i e d , given that  b o t h their p r i v a t e w e a l t h a n d e m p l o y m e n t a r e tied u p in the e n t e r p r i s e , thus increasing the chances of opportunism.  If p r o t e c t i o n is desired against u n w i s e o r opportunistic  f u n d a m e n t a l c h a n g e s that t h e m a j o r i t y h a v e a p p r o v e d , t h e a p p r a i s a l p r o c e d u r e i s likely to be (aside from private ordering arrangements to effect the same result) the only exit o p t i o n available.  IV  Conclusion The exercise of appraisal right generates many costs for the minority  shareholders.  The procedure is technical, long and expensive.  The amount of the  a w a r d is often unpredictable and may be taxable whereas the transaction dissented from may have produced tax free benefits to the minority shareholder.  These costs  notwithstanding, the exercise of the right is desirable in connection with transactions of the utmost gravity in which self-interest and lack of investment skills may seriously obscure management's vision. While the right presumably may not be of substantial concern-to the minority shareholder of a widely-held corporation because of the availability of a market exit option,.there are good justifications why.it is still desirable that the right be made applicable to those corporations. This line of reasoning stems from the inadequacy of the stock market sometimes to accurately reflect the value of the minority shareholder's shares. The absence of a market exit option increases the value of the remedy to a minority shareholder of a closely-held corporation who is often substantially underdiversified. Moreover, events compelling a minority shareholder to desire to bail  151  out of the enterprise in response to an anticipated diminution in value are likely to arise with some frequency in the closely-held corporation.  D.  JUST AND EQUITABLE WINDING UP  I.  Nature of Winding Up Remedy Corporate statutes provide for liquidation and winding-up to take place either  voluntarily by shareholders' resolution or involuntarily by court order.273 In the context of shareholder remedies, the dissolution order is the most drastic form of shareholder relief. A dissolution order usually consists of an order dissolving the corporation, sale of its assets and distribution of the proceeds to investors. Most of the corporate statutes provide for a shareholder application to the court for such an order on the grounds that it is "just and equitable" to do so.274 The circumstances in whicn the court will find it "just and equitable" to order a winding-up have defied any precise categorization. The courts have made it clear that there are no fixed outside limits to the rule but rather that each case must be decided on its own facts. Thus, the courts, over the years, have expanded the rule into new areas as fresh circumstances and situations have arisen and as the courts' reformulation of standards of intra-corporate conduct have developed. In one of the leading cases where this remedy was applied,275 the role of the court was characterized as that of a court of equity not bound by any classifications of wrongful behaviour and able to order a winding-up whenever it appeared "equitable" to do so.  273  274  See generally, Sections 291-320 B.C.C.A.; C.A.M.D. (Nigeria).  Sections 207-228 C.B.C.A.;  S.295(3)(a) B.C.C.A.; S.214(l)(b)(ii) C.B.C.A.; S.408(e) C.A.M.D. (Nigeria).  354 Ebrahimi v. Westbourne Galleries Ltd. (1972) 2 All E.R. 492.  Section 408  152  H o w e v e r , t h e r e m e d y i s a drastic o n e a n d is usually only a d d r e s s e d t o a serious c o n d i t i o n a f f e c t i n g t h e p r o p e r conduct or m a n a g e m e n t o f t h e c o r p o r a t i o n ' s affairs. A l t h o u g h there a r e n o fixed definitions of w h a t c i r c u m s t a n c e s w i l l c o n s t i t u t e sufficient g r o u n d s u n d e r t h e " j u s t a n d e q u i t a b l e " rule, three p r i n c i p a l categories h a v e e m e r g e d f r o m j u d i c i a l d e c i s i o n s o v e r t h e y e a r s a s c i r c u m s t a n c e s in w h i c h a c o u r t m a y readily g r a n t an o r d e r u n d e r t h e j u s t a n d equitable grounds. T h e s e c a t e g o r i e s i n c l u d e : (a)  j u s t i f i a b l e l a c k o f c o n f i d e n c e in t h e d i r e c t o r s a n d m a n a g e m e n t  (b)  deadlock  (c)  t h e p a r t n e r s h i p analogy. B u t a s stated earlier, t h e f a c t s r e n d e r i n g it j u s t and equitable that a corporation  should be wound up cannot be resolved into precise categories. Cases on the subject usually i l l u s t r a t e t h e diversity of t h e circumstances calling for the exercise of the court's discretion in winding-up a corporation because it is just and equitable to do so. In general, the words "just and equitable" are words of the widest significance and do not limit the jurisdiction of the court to any case. It is a question of fact and each case m u s t d e p e n d u p o n its o w n c i r c u m s t a n c e s .  II.  Winding Up and the Corporate Structure (a)  The Closelv-Held Corporations Generally speaking, the theory "of winding-up on the just and equitable  ground is more suited to shareholders of closely-held corporations. However, no Canadian corporate statute has limited its application to such corporations. The closely-held corporation has certain basic features which makes the remedy more suited for protection of minority interests.  It is usually formed or  continued on the basis of a personal relationship involving mutual confidence. There is usually an agreement or underlying assumption that all or some of the shareholders are to participate in the conduct of the business. Members often  153  m a k e relatively substantial capital contributions t o Ihe corporation:  shareholders  in such c o r p o r a t i o n s are'-a small close-knit g r o u p i n v o l v e d i n t h e d a y t o d a y o p e r a t i o n o f t h e b u s i n e s s a n d financially c o m m i t t e d t o t h e corporation. R e s t r i c t i o n o n alienability o f shares i s also a d o m i n a n t feature of such corporations.  B e c a u s e m e m b e r s also m a n a g e t h e c o r p o r a t i o n , distribution o f  p r o f i t s i s usually b y w a y o f salaries instead o f dividends. T h e s e f e a t u r e s s u g g e s t that m o s t c l o s e l y - h e l d corporations are incorporated partnerships in which the shareholders have some expectations based on their personal and financial involvement in the conduct of corporate affairs. While these reasonable expectations vary from case to case, the f o l l o w i n g a r e s o m e of t h e u s a b l e reasonable expectations of minority shareholders: (i)  t h e e x p e c t a t i o n of d i v i d e n d s o r o t h e r distribution o f e a r n i n g s if there are sufficient earnings to otherwise provide for the reasonable needs of the corporation,  (ii)  t h e expectation of t h e right to participate in management,  (iii)  the expectation that the majority would agree to a reasonable share valuation as required by a share transfer agreement or law,  (iv)  the general expectation that all shareholders will receive benefits that bear a pro rata.relationship to their ownership interests. Minority shareholders often enter into contractual agreements to protect  these expectations.  For instance, buy-sell agreements enable a minority  shareholder to liquidate his investment whenever he desires to do so. However, transaction costs might prevent parties from entering into appraisal contractual agreements.  Similarly, inherent human limitations often prevent parties from  taking care of unforeseen future contingencies.  The result is that contractual  agreements often do not fully articulate the parties bargains.  •  154  In situations where the minority shareholder's reasonable expectations have been breached or "are not adequately protected under the corporate constitution, he  may resort to the corporate law remedy or the other.  However, the majority shareholders might well be acting wilhin their legal rights and in doing so, treat the minority unfairly. The presence of the windingup remedy in closely-held corporations seems to be premised on the fact that; it covers some of those situations in which a minority shareholder is entitled to expect a certain standard o f conduct from his corporate partners and such  expectations has been frustrated. The remedy is based on equitable considerations and it enables the court to subject the exercise of legal rights to equitable considerations that are of a personal character arising between one individual and another which may make it unjust or unequitable to insist on legal rights or to exercise them in a particular way. dissension  cases  T h e m o s t significant benefit of the remedy is that in many i n t h e closely-held  corporation,  fulfilling  reasonable  expectations of shareholders t y application of remedies short of winding-up may not b e p r a c t i c a l b e c a u s e o f continuing animosity or irresponsible damage done to a relationship. Either the administrative cost associated with resolving these p r o b l e m s a r e p r o h i b i t i v e o r t h e c o u r t s may lack the ability to construct orders  that will result in profitable operation " InJhese cases; 'sewavuqg the relationship b e t w e e n t h e s h a r e h o l d e r s m a y b e t h e only viable alternative.  H o w e v e r , the remedy lias its own limitations.  First, a minority  shareholder who invests in a closely-held corporation often expects a voice in management and a steady source of income from the investment.  Although  wirtding-up of the corporation may enable the shareholder to generate income by reinvesting the proceeds of the liquidation, it does not enable him to realize expectations of continuing employment or participation in management.  155  Second, the proceeds from dissolution might not in any way, reflect the damage already allegedly inflicted'upon the minority shareholder's investment. T h e proceeds could also be small compared to the earnings potential cf the business especially where the only buyers for the shares are the alleged oppressors. In addition, the minority shareholders would in most cases incur legal expenses in retaining a lawyer. Moreover, the disruption of the business associated with a winding-up order may cn a general level, harm the public. The harm may arise f r o m displaced employees, suppliers, and frequently, customers. Notwithstanding these limitations, the remedy might be an appropriate relief to a minority shareholder, whose wealth and lifetime savings are substantially tied to the corporate venture. It would be unfair merely to give an order compelling the majority or the corporation to buy the shares of the minority  in situations where  the latter reasonably  expects  participation in the corporation with a voice in management.  continuous  The degree of  discussion might be such that any other remedy (such as the oppression remedy) would be insufficient especially where the corporate low have turned into  antipathy and distrust.  (b)  Widely-held Corporations  Winding-up on the just and equitable gro'iincLmay not be an appropriate remedy for the protection of the minority shareholder in the widely-held corporation. Often,  there is no underlying personal relationship amoi^st the shareholders. Given the fact that the interests and expectations of shareholders in widely-held corporations are usually more restricted than in the closely-held corporation, winding-up may not serve any purpose to a minority shareholder of a widely-held corporation. The presence of an effective market exit option makes winding-up a less useful protection in such corporations.  Absent personal commitments in the corporate  156  venture, a minority shareholder would prefer to liquidate his investment by selling his shares in the market whenever the management manifests any value decreasing conduct than going through a winding-up application and incurring the legal a n d time costs involved in such application. Moreover, shareholders i n widely-held corporations usually diversify their investment portfolio. The effect is to reduce unsystematic risks arising from the poor management of a particular corporation. A minority shareholder having a portfolio of investments would b e substantially unconcerned about the manner in which a particular corporation's affairs a r e conducted.  A n d whenever lie feels that it is no longer  profitable investing in such corporation, the presence of a liquid market enables him to exit the corporation at a less costly term However, as stated above, no Canadian corporate statute has expressly limited t h e application o f t h e r e m e d y to closely-held corporations only.  In fact, there is a  Canadian reported case where a widely-held corporation was wound up on the just and e q u i t a b l e g r o u n d . T h e case is Re R.J. Jowsev Mining Co. Ltd. 276 Here one Smith gained control of Jowsey Mining through a highly complex series of manoeuvres, including appropriation of funds without the directors' knowledge or consent from a n o t h e r widely-held corporation that he controlled. Jowsey Mining's-sole-productive asset was shares of Denison Mines Ltd.  An application for winding-up of Jowsey  M i n i n g - w a s m a d e b y a minority shareholder, "the_son of Jowsey Mining's founder, on the eve of a sale proposed to be made by Smith of a substantial portion of Jowsey  M i n i n g ' s Denison shares. T h e trial court ordered dissolution and the Court of Appeal affirmed. Laskin J. A. concluded that there was a substantial danger of dissipation of Jowsey Mining's liquid assets if a winding-up were not ordered. The learned judge noted Smith's fast and loose history of dealing with widely-held companies controlled 276  (1969) 2 O.R. 549, 6 D.L.R. (3d) 7 (C.A.) affd (19700 SOR.  n n n rr n o D u u u u u <„u DC i • •  157  by him and noted also that Jowsey Mining was not in neal of cash and that Smith had no plans for the investment of the~Denison share proceeds on behalf of Jowsey Mining. In deciding that it would not be appropriate to make a supervisory order for the conduct of Jowsey Mining's affairs, as opposed to a winding-up order, Laskin J.A. observed  that any possibility of the court becoming a superior board of directors should be avoided. It should be pointed out that the above decision was based on the peculiar facts of .the case and does not suggest that winding-up on the just and equitable grounds is ideal for widely-held corporations. On the contrary, there is reason to suggest that the remedy is more suited for the protection of minority shareholders of closely-held corporations who have personal and underlying assumptions in entering into the  corporate venture.  Conclusion Just and equitable winding-up is a remedy ideally granted in those circumstances when the reasonable expectations of a minority shareholder in a closely-held corporation has been frustrated. Not every breach of a reasonable expectation gives rise to the availability of the remedy. The remedy is a drastic one and applies in those unusual circumstances where continuance of the corporate venture would be wholly impracticable.  -  " _  As a remedy predicated on frustration of some personal understanding between the corporate participants, it may not be of great value to a minority shareholder in the widely-held corporation.  The likelihood of diversification of investments by  shareholders in widely-held corporations and the existence of market based exit option render the remedy less valuable to the minority in such corporations. Shareholders in widely-held corporations would arguably prefer to sell their shares in open markets  158  rather than pursuing a winding-up application and incurring the legal and other cost' inherent in the procedure.  159  C H A P T E R SEVEN THE ADEQUACY OF THE SELECTED STATUTORY MINORITY SHAREHOLDERS'REMEDIES  Introduction This chapter will examine some of the practical considerations arising from the operation of the selected remedies.  My aim is to determine whether these statutory  remedies in their current form afford adequate protection to the shareholders in the  corporation. I t is c o m m o n k n o w l e d g e that t h e major aim of the corporate law reform in Canada over the past decade has been to overcome the substantive and procedural hurdles placed in the way of minority shareholders by previously decided Canadian English cases. For instance, in Percival v. Wright.277 it was held that the directors' fiduciary duties run only to the corporation and not to the shareholders requiring the latter to obtain leave to sue derivatively should the board refuse their request to lend the company's name to the proceedings. Similarly, in Foss v. Harboitle.278 it was held that the p r o p e r p l a i n t i f f i n an action for wrongs committed by the directors against the corporation is the corporation itself. Most of "the_proccdural hurdles that grew from the c o u r t ' s d e c i s i o n i n Foss v. Harbottle has been removed by the statutory shareholders' d e r i v a t i v e action. The s u b s t a n t i v e aspects of majority rule and the lack of a fiduciary duty owed by the directors to the shareholders or by majority shaieholders to the minority have been dealt with in an ad hoc fashion over the past ten years by the 277  (1902) 2 Ch. 421.  278  (1843) 2 Hare. 461.  160  legislature and the courts culminating in the inclusion of the oppression remedy i n the corporate statutes.  In general, 'the position of the minority shareholders has been  enhanced by the increased protection afforded by these statutory remedies. However, it is suggested that more could be done by way of removing some procedural obstacles with respect to some of the remedies and adopting a liberal rather than a n a n o w and strict approach in interpreting these remedies to reflect the aims of those responsible fur corporate law reform in Canada and to further ensure adequate protection f o r the shareholder. The first remedy to be examined is the oppression remedy. / shall start the discussion t y examining the historical background of the remedy. This will enhance the understanding of the mischief that the remedy seeks to prevent. I shall thereafter look at the legislative provisions and the procedural matters relating to the operation of the remedy. Thejudicial response to the remedy is also relevant to an examination of the adequacy of the remedy.  It is intended to end the discussion by examining the  relationship of the oppression remedy with the other statutory remedies. My interest in this regard is to determine the potential efficacy of the remedy vis-a-vis other statutory remedies for the protection of the shareholders.  A.  The Oppression Remedy History of the Oppression Remedy, in Canada Major corporate law reform took place in Canada in the late 1960's and early  1970's. This period saw the establishment of various committees.279 set up by both the federal government and some provinces to examine the law relating to corporations. In 070  For example, the Select Committee on Company Law (1967) (Ontario Legislature) [otherwise called the Lawrence Committee]; See also, Dickerson, Proposals for a i\ew Business Corporation Act for Canada (1971) (Tlie Federal Report) [otherwise called the Dickerson report]; R. Bird, Report on Company Law [otherwise called the New Brunswick Report] 1974; D. Sheppard & M. Smith, Departmental Study Report of the Department of the Attorney General of British Columbia (1971).  161  c o n s e q u e n c e , n e w c o r p o r a t e a n d securities statutes came into f o r c e i n various jurisdictions.280  Hie committees that reviewed t h e previous  statutes i n these  jurisdictions w e r e very m u c h influenced by corporate l a w d e v e l o p m e n t s i n other jurisdictions o u t s i d e C a n a d a , notably E n g l a n d and U n i t e d States. It was recognized that the position of minority shareholders was unsatisfactory under Canadian corporate law.  In the first place, the protection for minority  shareholders u n d e r t h e c o m m o n l a w w a s n o t adequate.  The C a n a d i a n J u d i c i a r y w a s  reluctant to interfere in internal corporate affairs and the Canadian common law relating t o corporations reflected this. The general rule was and still is, that directors owed fiduciary duties to the corporation, and not to shareholders directly.281  In  addition, the majority shareholders owed no duties directly to their shareholders. Thus, the majority shareholders could act in their own interest and were entitled to use their voles to exculpate themselves from acts which would otherwise constitute breaches of their fiduciary duties as directors of the corporation. Common law also precluded the individual shareholder f r o m bringing an action on behalf of the corporation or other shareholders.'"  A l t h o u g h certain exceptions.existed to this common law rule, 283 these  exceptions were nonetheless insufficient. The statutory protection provided to minority shareholders was equally inadequate.  ._  ...  The absence of effective statutory and judicial remedies implied that the only alternative open to a dissenting minority was to apply to have the corporation wound up 280  281 282 283  For example, the Ontario Business Corporations Act 1970, the British Columbia Companies Act 1973, thc-Canada Business Corporations Act 1975. For developments in other jurisdictions; see Cheffins, 1 I he Oppression Remedy in Corporate Law: The Canadian Experience", (1988) 10 1 . l'a. .1. Int'l Bus. 1. 3115. For judicial recognition of this principle, seePercival v. Wright (1962) 2 Ch.421. Foss v. Harbottle (1843) 2 Hare. 461. These exceptions constituted instances where individual shareholders were permitted to bring ijtiauiiai. c Some of these incesireenui bekw under the discussion on Foss v. Harbottle. •• • . .  under statutory provisions that authorized the court to dissolve a corporation on the application of a minority shareholder.  But the remedy itself was far from being  adequate to solve the problems of the minority. disadvantages in applying f o r the remedy.  There were many potential  Firstly, the remedy could result in a  disadvantage to the minority shareholder who wished to continue his investment and maintain the business enterprise as a viable entity.  Secondly, the proceeds f r o m  dissolution might not reflect the damage inflicted upon the shareholder's investment and the proceeds could also b e small compared to the earnings potential of the business especially where the only buyers for the shares were the alleged oppressors. Furthermore, although Canadian corporate legislation often set out a variety of grounds for dissolution, more especially on the ground that it was just and equitable that the corporation be wound-up, the courts laboured under the assumption that winding-up  was a drastic remedy to be granted only very occasionally. Thus, it was no surprise that those responsible for recommending corporate law reforms proposed major statutory revisions to improve the position of the minority shareholders. These proposals were generally accepted by those jurisdictions enacting  new general incorporation legislation. With respect to the oppression remedy, the Canadian corporate reformers relied on the English corporate law provisions. The remedy first appeared in Canada when it was introduced into the British Columbia Company Act in 1960. The provision was borrowed directly from Section 210 of the 1948 English Companies Act.  But the  English provision suffered many defects and the British Columbia provision was similarly defective in many important respects.  For example, the applicant was  required to show that the conduct of the directors or those in control was serious enough to warrant a winding-up before the courts could exercise remedial powers under the remedy. Secondly, because the conduct had to be oppressive against a person in his capacity as member (shareholder), the remedy did not. reach one of the prototypical fact  163  situations, e x c l u s i o n o f a d i r e c t o r o r m a n a g e r . F u r t h e r m o r e , the r e m e d y w a s r e a d a s requiring a c o n t i n u o u s course ot oppressive conduct rather than a single oppressive transaction.284 Throughout the 1960's and early 1970's no other Canadian jurisdiction had an o p p r e s s i o n r e m e d y a n d t h e r e m e d y received a poor and pessimistic response from other committees appointed to consider corporate law reform.  In Ontario, the Lawrence  Committee did not find favour with the remedy which it described as constituting a c o m p l e t e d e r e l i c t i o n o f t h e accepted principle of judicial non-interference in the management of corporations.  The Committee said further that the underlying  p h i l o s o p h y of t h e r e m e d y h a d an air of reservation and defeatism about it, as if the l e g i s l a t u r e w a s u n a b l e to o f f e r any solution to t h e p l i g h t o f minority shareholders other t h a n a b a n d o n i n g t h e p r o b l e m s to the judiciary to be dealt with ad hoc on the basis of d e t e r m i n i n g , from c a s e to c a s e , w h e t h e r o r n o t t h e a f f a i r s of the company are being c o n d u c t e d in a m a n n e r oppressive to some part of the shareholders.285 In England,  i n 1 9 6 2 , t h e Jenkins Committee recommended substantial  a m e n d m e n t s t o o v e r c o m e w h a t turned out to be a number of judicially constructed limitations on the scope and application of the remedy.  In particular, the Jenkins  Committee highlighted four situations where the remedy would be most appropriate: (i)  where controlling directors unreasonably refuse to register transfers of the rminarity's holdings lo force a reduced sale-price for them to take advantage of;  (ii)  where directors award themselves excessive remuneration that diminishes the f u n d s a v a i l a b l e f o r distribution a s dividends;  (iii)  •'•  to prevent the issuing of shares to directors and others on special or advantageous terms; and  284  See Re H.R. Hammer Ltd. (1958) 3 All E.R. 689 (C. A.).  285  Lawrence Report, supra, note 279 at 60.  m n n o * vn" n <i it u u u / u a J  164  (iv)  to prevent the refusal to declare non-cumulative preference dividends on shares held by the minority.  These categorizations notwithstanding, the determination of the type of conduct which amounts to oppression has been evolving and it would not take an abundance of imagination to envision many other circumstances in which the oppression remedy  would be an appropriate response. In Canada, when the new British Columbia Compan Act was enacted in 1973, the  remedy  was  significantly  revised  in  accordance  with  other  important  recommendations made by the Jenkins Committee although the revised Company Act did not expressly incorporate the situations where the remedy would be most a p p r o p r i a t e . First, t h e r e q u i r e m e n t that grounds for winding-up exist for there to be a successful application was removed.  Secondly, the type of conduct for which relief  could be granted was broadened to include unfair prejudice. Thirdly, the requirement that t h e p e t i t i o n e r s h o w a c o u r s e o f c o n d u c t which was oppressive was removed. It w a s s p e c i f i e d t h a t a single a n d isolated a c t of oppression is enough to justify the application of the remedy. Fourthly, the scope of potential applicants were increased to include legal personal representatives and others to whom shares are transmitted by operation of law.  The types of relief which could be made were , also .expanded.  Finally, it was specified that unfairly prejudicial conduct did not have to exist at the time of .the application for the-application to succeed. Gradually., oilier C a n a d i a n jurisdictions subsequently adopted and improved on the English provisions which in turn was significantly altered by Section 459 of the English Companies Act 1985 (as amended by the Companies Act of 1989).  Essence of the Remedy The introduction of the oppression remedy into Canadian corporate law was premised on the belief that minority shareholders did not have adequate protection  165  a g a i n s t c o r p o r a t e misconduct by those i n control o f c o r p o r a t e affairs. I t w a s introduced to c o v e r all those situations in w h i c h there has been s o m e a c t o f oppression but f o r w h i c h the winding-up r e m e d y could not b e an a p p r o p r i a t e one. Judicial decisions h a v e helped i n c l a r i f y i n g a n d stating w h a t t h e oppression r e m e d y intends to achieve. I n Goldex M i n e s Ltd. v. Revill. t h e court m a d e a broad statement of principle with respect to the essence of the oppression remedy: "The principle that the majority governs in corporate affairs is fundamental to corporation law, but its corollary is also important - that the majority must act fairly and honestly. Fairness is the touchstone of equitable justice and when the test of fairness is not met, the equitable jurisdiction of the court can be invoked to prevent' or remedy the injustice which misrepresentations or other dishonesty has caused." In E l d e r v. E l d e r and Watson Ltd.. 286 L o r d Cooper said that the essence of the remedy seems t o b e that t h e c o n d u c t complained of should at the lowest involve a visible d e p a r t u r e from t h e standards of f a i r dealings a n d a violation of the condition of fair play on which every shareholder who entrusts his money to a corporation is entitled to rely. A shareholder has some reasonable expectations in investing in the corporation. He is equally entitled to expect a certain pattern of behaviour from management and fellow shareholders depending on the nature of the corporation and other circumstances.  It therefore follows that relief ought to be granted when those  expectations have been frustrated.  The courts have indicated that the oppression  remedy should be applied in situations where the reasonable expectations of the shareholder have been frustrated. In Ebrahimi v. Westbourne Galleries Ltd.. 287 the c o w l staled thai "the foundation of the remedy lies in the words "just and equitable" . . .. The words are a recognition of the fact that a limited company is more than a mere legal entity, with a personality in law of its own: that there is room in company law 286  (1952) S.C.49.  287  (1973) A.C. 360.  166  for the recognition of the fact that behind it, or amongst it, there are individuals with rights, expectations and obligationhinter se which are not necessarily submerged in the company structure.".  This statement lends credence to the fact that the interest of  shareholders should not be tramelled t y those in a position of advantage over them: a purpose which the oppressionremedy seeks to achieve. However, the reasonable expectations approach may have limitations primarily because the criteria for ascertaining and evaluating shareholder expectations are left open.  The Statutory Provisions  Outside of British Columbia, the oppression remedy was introduced into C a n a d i a n statutes t y the Canada Business Corporations Act in 1975. The result was  what is now Section 241 of that Act. S e c t i o n 2 4 1 contains t h e r e v i s i o n s which were incorporated into its counterpart  in t h e British Columbia Company Act.  Under the section, a "complainant"288 may  a p p l y t o a c o u r t f o r a n order and where the court is satisfied that (a)  a n y act o r o m i s s i o n o f the corporation or its affiliates effects a result, or  (b)  the b u s i n e s s o r affairs of the corporation or its affiliates are or have been carried  on or conducted in a manner, or (c)  the powers of the directors of the corporation or any of its affiliates are or have been exercised in a manner that is oppressive or unfairly prejudicial to or that unfairly disregards the interests of any security holder, creditor, or officer,  the court may make an interim or final order it thinks fit. The remedies which the court may grant are comprehensive allowing it to rectify almost any type of conduct so as to protect the interest of the minority.289 288  The term is defined in Scction 238 C.B.C.A.  289  See S.241(3) C.B.C.A.  •  167  Section 224 of the British Columbia Company Act has similar provisions.290 However, there are some major'differences between the two statutes. The class of potential applicants is wider under the federal legislation.  Secondly, although both  Acts permit applications by persons the court deems proper, under the British Columbia Act, only present shareholders are expressly authorized to apply.291 Under the Canada Business Corportions Act, past shareholders, other security holders, former and present directors, and officers of the corporation and the Director are expressly authorized to apply. Furthermore, there is a third class of conduct which can give rise to relief under the Canada Business Corporations Act: conduct which unfairly disregards the interests of the applicant. Moreover, conduct of an affiliated corporation can also give rise to  the remedy. Also while the British Columbia Company Act provides that the impugned c o n d u c t m u s t a f f e c t t h e applicant in the capacity of member (shareholder), the Canada  Business Corporation Act provides that the conduct can affect the applicant in the capacity of security holder, creditor, director of officer. The list of remedies which are specifically authorized is broader under the Canada Business Coiporations Act. H o w e v e r , t h e British C o l u m b i a statute has a prospective aspect. The applicant can seek relief from "threatened" acts of the company and "proposed" resolutions of the members or class of members. The Canada Business Corporations Act provisions appears to be limited to cases where the complained act of conduct has already taken  place. 290  291  The section provides that a member of a company may apply to the court for an order on the ground that the affairs o f the company are being conducted or the powers of the directors are being exercised in a manner oppressive to one or more of the members including himself or that atl u i tlu' ««npany has been done or is threatened or that some resolution of the members or any class of members has been passed or is proposed that is unfairly prejudicial to one or more of the members, including himself. • The Company Law discussion paper (B.C.C.A.) recommends the extension of potential applicants to include former members and directors.  nnn sgillfiS Wff^t^SSifMPi u u u i un it) O Jc  168  Other provinces which have adopted statutes based on the Canada Business Corporations Act have enacted an oppression remedy which closely resembles Section 241. 2 9 2  1.  The Procedural Issues Relating to the Remedy.  (a)  Standing to Sue: T h e initial issue with respect to the adequacy of the statutory oppression remedy  is to determine whether the standing requirement is adequate for the protection of shareholders. All jurisdictions that have the oppression remedy allow shareholders to apply.  M o r e o v e r , all j u r i s d i c t i o n s except British Columbia also allow other security  holders, creditors, directors and officers to apply. The extension of the availability of  relief to groups other than shareholders indicates that the oppression remedy is an openended one which recognizes the existence of the many groups of interests in the corporation.  Apart from shareholders, the creditors and directors have economic  interests in ensuring t h e honest management of t h e corporation.  Corporate statutes  recognizes that certain acts of those in control might prejudice the interests of those other groups. Thus provision has been made for them under the oppression remedy. On the nexus of contract approach, there may seem some apparent justifications for e x t e n d i n g t h e s c o p c o f potential applicants beyond shareholders.  Under the  economic approach, t h e shareholders are not treated as owners of the business, but as parties who have contracted to lend capital to the corporation. They are simply viewed a s o n e of t h e g r o u p s w h o contract with the corporation. This implies that they should not be singled out for special treatment in corporate law. It presumably justifies the o p e n - e n d e d C a n a d i a n a p p r o a c h that allows applications by other persons who contract with t h e c o r p o r a t i o n such as the creditors and management.  Under this analysis,  OQ9 For example, S.247 Ontario Business Corporations Act 1982, although that provision seems broader than the C.B.C.A. because it specifies that threatened conduct can give rise to the relief.  rrn n n „ n q i » u u u u • u 0 ~i u  m  secured creditors, the fsdiral government arid trade creditors have applied under the oppression remedy with success, 2 9 3 However, it should he realized that even if the nexus of contract view is accepted, the contracts betw'^en creditors and corporations and between shareholder and corporation differ in many respects. A debt contract is generally simpler than a contract entered into by a shareholder because a creditor's claim is for a fixed amomtft rather than for a flew of income based on the corporations profits. A creditor will be less concerned about profit maximization of the corporation and will have less reason to negotiate with respect to corporate governance. The result is that a contract between a creditor and a corporation is usually easier to articulate in express terms than a contract between a shareholder and the corporation.294 When the contractual relationship is of this nature, it apparently seems that there is no need for an open-ended term such as the oppression remedy to fill the gaps in the creditor's bargain. In addition, creditors can protect themselves by the terms of their contract with a corporation and there is no compelling justification for giving them standing to apply.  Given the nature of the  corporation, there is not the same need to legislate for the protection of creditors as there is for shareholders. The same reasoning applies to the directors and officers who are treated as one of the contracting participate under the bargaining approach. To determine whether the inclusion of this group within the scope of potential applicants is justified, it may be ncccssary tu examine the nature of the contractual relationship between them and the corporation. The managers usually invest a considerable amount of their human capital in the corporation, in the hope of a long-term reward and cutting this off by fixing  Cheffins, supra note 7 at 795. A secured creditor applied in Bank of Montreal v. Dome Petroleum 91987) 54 Alta. L.R. (2d) 289 (Alta. Q.B.). The federal government was the applicant in R. v. Sands Motor Hotel Ltd. (1985) w W.W.R. 59 (Sask. C.A.). ' 294  This may not be so in all situations however.  170  them might b e seen as a form of a shareholder opportunism.295 This may lead 1® inefficiencies, since informed managers would react to the threat of shareholder opportunism by under-investing in firm specific human capital,  Offering them tffi  opportunity to apply for relief from oppression might b e an efficient response to tffi problem since the managers could have been given a greater incentive to seek long terift rewards in the firm.296 The Canada Business Corporations Act and other jurisdictions which have followed the federal model also give standing to the Director297 to apply for relief under the remedy. The Inclusion of the Director as a potential applicant may not seem justifiable since the shareholders usually, suffer the direct consequences of any impugned conduct by those in control.  They are therefore in a position to decide  whether or not to seek redress.298 Where oppressive or unfairly prejudicial acts have direct effects o n shareholders, they ought to be left to their own devices to decide whether to seek redress or not. As an action under the oppression remedy is primarily d e s i g n e d t o p r o t e c t t h e private interests of shareholders such a hands off policy is on t h e w h o l e defensible. 299 Provided that shareholders have adequate financial resources to p r o t e c t t h e i r interests, they are the best judges of what those interests are. The only  354 295 296  297  298  See Buckley & Connelly; supra, note 101 at 394. Cheffins asserts that it is not clear whether, the possibility of shareholder opportunism justifies allowing tilt1 dirfctBrs and officers to apply under the oppression remedy and that the answer depends on whether other potential sources of implied contractual terms such as employment law supply adequate gap-fillers. See Cheffins, supra, note 9 at 797. The Director is an administrate official appointed under the Act in contradistinction to the directors of a particular corporation. Often, the impugned conduct of those in control of the corporation usually has direct adverse effec.ts on the sharci].oJdt'i' nmjssi taxing <IJ) appJkaJtiiui for relief under the remedy without more. This is not to argue that there is not a compelling public interest that the affairs of corporations should be conducted in a proper manner as if they are not his will have an external effect in reducing enthusiasm for the use of the corporate fonn.  171  argument for granting the director standing is where the costs of litigation preclude a n action by the shareholders. Che notable omission f r o m t h e British Columbia Company Act a s regards standing to sue, is the non-eligibility of past members to bring a n application under 1h6 oppression remedy. T h e Canada Business Corporation Act and other statutes modelled after t h e federal legislation 'dearly extend the standing requirement to previous members and officers. T h e British Columbia provision should therefore be extended to cover former members of the corporation, as unfairly prejudicial conduct .yflhich. occurred when they were members may only come to light after they have ceased to be so. This would correct one of the defects of corporation law which tends to ignore thS plight of ex-members who discover wrongdoing which may have diminished the valug of their shares, only after ceasing to be members.300  (b)  What must b e proved^ T o obtain relief under the oppression remedy, the applicant must prove either  that: (i)  oppression a r o s e o u t of the way the affairs of the company are being conducted o r t h e p o w e r s o f the directors are being exercised, or  (ii)  ...  h e o r any member(s) (including himself) has been unfairly prejudiced as a result of s o m e a c t o f t h e company which "has-been done or threatened or some resolution of t h e members or any class of members which has been passed or proposed.301  30 0  Fortunately, the British Columbia Discussion Paper on. company law (January 1991) has  I'ti'ominimksJ the extension of the scope of applicants to cover former members, similarly, in Buckley v. B.C.T.F. (1990) 44 B.C.T.F. (1990) 44 B.C.L.R. 31; the court extended the meaning of "members" under S.224 B.C.C.A. to include past members, otherwise expelled members of the Teachers Association would be precluded from bringing an action under the oppression remedy following their unlawful expulsion from the Association. 301  S. 224 B.C.C.A. Due to lack of space, the discussion will be limited to the provisions of the B.C.C.A. •••  T h e first w a y t h e a p p l i c a n t can b r i n g himself w i t h i n t h e a m b i t o f the r e m e d y is to s h o w that t h e o p p r e s s i v e c o n d u c t a r o s e o u t o f t h e m a n n e r i n w h i c h t h e c o m p a n y ' s affairs are being or have been conducted. constitutes the "affairs" of the company. Ltd. T  302  There is no precise definition of what In Morgan v. 45 Flers Avenue Property  it w a s stated n o t t o b e l i m i t e d t o trade m a t t e r s , b u t t o e n c o m p a s s capital  structure, dividend p o l i c y , v o t i n g rights, c o n s i d e r a t i o n of t a k e o v e r o f f e r s a n d i n d e e d , all m a t t e r s w h i c h m a y c o m e b e f o r e t h e b o a r d f o r consideration. Another way in which an applicant can bring himself, within the ambit of the oppression remedy is by showing that the unfairly prejudicial act arise out of any actual or threatened act of the company or actual or proposed resolution of the members. A l t h o u g h t h e p h r a s e " a c t u a l act" raises n o e x p l a n a t o r y p r o b l e m , t h e r e m a y b e great uncertainty with r e s p e c t t o t h e c i r c u m s t a n c e s in which a " t h r e a t e n e d act" w i l l constitute the basis for obtaining relief. Many corporate acts never advance beyond the stage of discussion which, had they been implemented, would have been unfairly prejudicial to some members.  I t may be asserted that such tentative acts do not, and cannot  c o n s t i t u t e t h e b a s i s f o r s u c c e s s f u l application under the oppression remedy.  For a  t h r e a t e n e d act t o j u s t i f y a relief, i t m u s t h a v e reached a degree of maturity that there is a strong likelihood of its implementation by the company, so as to constitute a threat on its o w n . Again, for any actual-or threatened act to-give rise to relief, the applicant must prove that it is the act of the company. This requirement would be satisfied in the case of a n act of t h e b o a r d o f t h e directors.303 Similarly, the acts of a managing director to  302 303  (1986) 10 A. C.L.R. 692, 704 (C.A.). This is more especially under the organic theory of corporate law which states that the corporation is an entity which functions through many organs including the board of directors. Under the theory, the acts of directors may be attributed to the company provided they act within the limits of their powers.  173  w h o m t h e p o w e r s o f the b o a r d h a v e b e e n delegated, o r of a d i r e c t o r who h a s b e e n a l l o w e d t o c o n d u c t t h e a f f a i r s of the c o r p o r a t i o n w i t h o u t a n y i n t e r f e r e n c e f r o m the o t h e r d i r e c t o r s , w o u l d c o n v e n i e n t l y b e treated a s t h o s e o f t h e corporation.3fi4 T h e section also g i v e s p r o t e c t i o n t o actual o r p r o p o s e d resolution of t h e m e m b e r s w h i c h u n f a i r l y p r e j u d i c e s t h e applicant.  T h e inclusion of this proviso is  apparently i n r e c o g n i t i o n of t h e likelihood that m a j o r i t y s h a r e h o l d e r s c o u l d u s e their powers to pass resolutions which unfairly prejudices the minority. In situations, such resolutions may be equated to the acts of the corporation since the majority shareholders control the meeting. In this regard, the British Columbia provision may be seen as an advancement over the English corporate statute which makes no express p r o v i s i o n f o r actual o r p i o p o s e d r e s o l u t i o n o f t h e shareholders.  (c)  The Concepts of Oppressive and Unfairly Prejudicial Conduct The various statutes which have provided for the oppression remedy do not  define what constitutes oppression or unfair prejudice.  The Canadian courts have  however, taken a narrow view of what constitutes oppression and have followed the jurisprudence developed under the original English provision.305 Thus, oppression has been held to amount to conduct which is burdensome, harsh and wrongful or which l a c k s o f probity a n d f a i r dealing. 306  30?  305  306  :  Re H.R. thinner Ltd. (1959) 1 W.L.R.ffi, 75 where the court whilJ considering s.210 of the U.K. Companies Act 1948 which has been replaced by S.459 of the English Companies Act 1985 (as amended in 1989) and which provision is similar to S.224 R.C.C. A., stilted that the section is wide enough to rover the activities of someone taking part in die conduct of the affairs of the company whether de facto or de jure. Cheffins, "Oppression Remedy in Corporate Law: The Canadian Experience", (1988) 10 U. Pa. J. Int'l. Bus. L. 305, 320. Nystad v. Harcrest Apartments (1986) 3 B.C.L.R. 40; Journet v. Superchef (1984) 29 B.L.R. 205 (Que.S.C.), Redekop v. Robco Constr. Ltd. (1987) 89 D.L.R. 3d. 507.  174  The concept of "unfairly prejudicial" has however, not received a n a n o w interpretation f r o m the courts. 'In fact it is not feasible to formulate a generally accepted or comprehensive definition of what will b e treated as being unfairly : prejudicial. Any attempt to formulate a precise definition would have the unfortunate effect of confining the term within a j udicially imposed straightj acket. The. existence of unfairly prejudicial conduct is usually determined t y the impact and effect on the shareholder and not the motives or the nature of the conduct of the majority. In Re Bovey Hotel Ventures Ltd.,307 SladeJ. stated that "The test of unfairness must be an objective, not a subjective one. In other words, it is not necessary for the petitioner to show that the persons who have had de facto control of the company have acted as they did in the conscious knowledge that this was unfair to the petitioner or that they were acting in bad faith; the test is whether a reasonable bystander observing the consequences of their conduct would regard it as having unfairly prejudiced the petitioner's interests." It is not. necessary for the applicant to point to any actual irregularity or to an invasion  of his legal rights.308 However, a n applicant will not b e unfairly prejudiced merely because he is adversely affected by t h e operations of t h e corporation. 3 0 9  The conduct must be  detrimental or damaging t o the applicant's rights in a manner which is unjust or  inequitable. 3 1 0  '307  308  309  ._•.....  : :—: •31st July, 1981 (unreported). See also Sparling v. Javelin Int'l Ltd., (1986) R.J. Q. 1073, 1077; • ReR.A. Noble & Sons (Clothing) I,td. (1983) B.C.L.R. 273, 290-91 (per Nourse J.).  Thomas v. H.W.Thcmas Ltd. (1984) 1 N.Z.L.R. 686, 693. In Re M. Dalley & Co. Pty. Ltd. (1974-76), 1 A.C.L.R. 489, 492, the court stated that "it is not necessary for a complainant to point to any actual irregularity or to an invasion of his legal rights or a lack of probity or want of nood faith towards him or the Dart of those in control of the company. It is for this reason that acting on legal advice would not necessarily prevent conduct from being unfairly prejudicial if it is otherwise so". O'Connor v. '.Winchester Oil & Gas Inc. (1986) 69 B.C.L;R; 330,337. Diligenti v. RWMD Operations (1976) 1 B.C.L.R. 36, 45-46.  175  It may also be pointed out that the boundaries of what constitutes unfairly prejudicial conduct do not stop at'constitutional propriety.311  While a particular act  may on its face appear to be legally proper, it may nevertheless constitute unfair prejudice. In Re A Company.312 Harman J. held that a rights offer on a pro rata basis could unfairly prejudice a shareholder where it was known that the shareholder did not have the resources to take up his allotment and the allotment was intentionally made to exploit this and to dilute his holdings in the company.313 Similarly, on this reasoning, the failure by a corporation with distributable profits to declare a dividend could constitute a ground for relief. 314  2.  Judicial Response to the Oppression Remedy The various committees that recommended corporate law reform in Canada in  the early 1960's and 1970's did not provide guidelines as to how the oppression remedy was to operate.  Only the Dickerson Committee which formulated the proposals for  reforming the federal corporation legislation made a comprehensive statement on the matter. The committee gave examples of freeze-out techniques as instances where the remedy would be invoked more frequently in relation to closely-held corporation and indicated that a broad standard of fairness should be invoked in applying the remedy. 315 It became obvious that the sections dealing with the remedy would rely heavily upon judicial discretion for its effect, "instead of defining clear-cut standards that the applicant must meet, the sections demand only a vague standard of "unfairness" 311  D.D. Prentice, "The Theory of the Firm: Minority Shareholder Oppression: Sections 459-461 ofthe Companies Act 1985" (1988) 8 Oxford Journal of Legal Studies, 55, 79. ;  312  (1985) B.C.L.R. 80.  313  See also Browning v. C&C Plywood Ltd. (1967) 434 P. 2d 339 (Supreme Court of Oregon).  314  Re Ferguson and Imax Systems, (1983) 43 O.R. (2d.) 128.  354  Cheffins, supra, note 280 at 313.  176  be proved. It is therefore, the judicial interpretation of the sections that determines the range'of this remedy. Despite the lack of legislative guidance however, the judiciary have made extensive use of the oppression remedy, notwithstanding that somejudges have adopted a narrow interpretation of it. 316 Oi the whole, the judicial response to the oppression  remedy has brought it to the forefront of remedies available to minority sharetoakfers, as applications has succeeded in a wide range of cases. Case law has gradually increased over the years, affirming the rights of minority shareholders as the oppression remedy is used with greater versatility to define and correct unacceptable corporate behaviour.  Courts have followed the often cited  r e c o m m e n d a t i o n in Ferguson v . Imax Systems Corporation317 that  "the section which provides for the oppression remedy must not be regarded as being simply a codification of the common law today. One  looks t o t h e section when considering the interest of the minority s h a r e h o l d e r s a n d t h e section should be interpreted broadly to carry out its p u r p o s e . . . . W h a t is oppressive or unfairly prejudiced in one case may n o t necessarily b e so in the slightly different setting of another."  N o t w i t h s t a n d i n g j u d i c i a l readiness to ever increase the ambit of the oppression remedy, t h e r e m e d y h a s limits.  In Mason v. Intercity Properties.318 the court stated that the  r e m e d y d o e s n o t o p e n t h e door to every disgruntled shareholder. And in H.J. Rai Ltd. v. R e e d P o i n t Marina.319 the court said that the remedy does not alter the basic p r i n c i p l e of m a j o r i t y r u l e and cannot be used by the minority to abuse the majority. H o w e v e r , t h e a b s e n c e of any precise categorization of circumstances giving rise to relief u n d e r t h e r e m e d y h a s not precluded the courts from using it in a wide variety 316  For example, Brant Investments Ltd. v. Keepright Inc. (1987) 37 B.L.R. (Ont. H.C.), C/F Sparling v. Javelin International Ltd. (1986) R.J.Q. 1073 (Que. S.C.). Re Ferguson and Imax Systems Corp. (1983) 43 O.R. 2d. 128 (Ont. C.A.).  317  (1983)43 O.R. (2d.) 128, 137.  318  (1987) 37 B.L.R. 6, 29 (Ont. C.A.).  354  (B.C.S.C. 1981) unreported.  '  177  of situations in which it is difficult to make any classifications.  T h e difficulty in  classifying the cases which has arisen under the remedy becomes more evident when it is realized that any such attempt will not only be arbitrary to some degree since the factual circumstances in each of the cases have been different, but also some S3S£S cao fit comfortably into two or mare classes. N o t w i t h s t a n d i n g t h e s e qualificatiaQ^ most typical applications under the o p p r e s s i o n r e m e d y o f t e n involve bad faith on the part of the management or directors  of the corporation and the denial of shareholders rights to return on investment or some economic damage to the corporation.  Applications under the remedy have also  succeeded in cases where it is alleged that the controllers of the corporation have divested corporate profits to their own use or have used corporate money or assets for their p e r s o n a l a d v a n t a g e . I n Redekop v. Robco Construction Ltd.. 320 the breach was a  conflict of interest through which the majority shareholder of Robco received shares in a n o t h e r c o r p o r a t i o n a s a result of his position in Robco. As a shareholder and director of b o t h , h e c a u s e d Robcso to contract with the new corporation to carry on its c o n s t r u c t i o n b u s i n e s s f o r the new corporation's account at a fixed price, thus bearing the risk of cost over-runs.  There was no allegation of fraud or bad faith and the  evidence before the court was at least consistent with the new agreement being a sound  business deal f o r both companies. Because he had not complied with the disclosure p r o v i s i o n s o f t h e C o m p a n i e s Act, 321 the majority shareholder was bound to account to Robco for his shares in the new company and for any profits he might have made through it. Despite lack of evidence of loss to Robco, the courts held that the majority shareholder was "helping himself with the use of Robco's assets, ultimately at the expense of Robco's shareholders". The conduct was held oppressive.322 320  (1978) 89 D.L.R. 3d. 507 (B.C.S.C.).  321  S.B.C. 1973, C.18.SS.144 to 146, now Company Act R.S.B.C. 1985.  322  Supra, note 320 at 515.  /v.•  M  > ^  --V'-^  it*.  178  Many oppression applications allege that the corporate affairs and proceedings have not been conducted in accordance with the corporate constitution. But mere proof of non-compliance with corporate constitution generally is not sufficient to warrant the granting of an order under the remedy. Something more is usually required, such as that the non-compliance is a device t y the controllers to run the corporation to the total exclusion of other shareholders. I n Jackman v. Jackets I interpi-ises Ltd..323 the major complaint was that t h e majority shareholder had caused the defendant corporation to  mortgage its assets as security for a loan paid to another corporation of which he was t h e sole shareholder.  T h e related corporation had no prospect of being able to repay  the loan and, consequently, the complainant's equity in the defendant corporation had been impaired. T h e court found that this conduct was indeed oppressive, ever, though the p r e v i o u s r e l a t i o n s h i p b e t w e e n t h e companies by which the related corporation had p r o v i d e d c o n s i d e r a b l e assistance to t h e defendant corporation, made the loan a reasonable business arrangement.  What was oppressive was the lack of adequate  security for the loan from the related corporation. . In deciding on his order, Fulton J. examined the financial statements of the c o r p o r a t i o n s a n d c o n c l u d e d that even if the related corporation were a party to the a c t i o n , it c o u l d n o t g i v e meaningful security.  With the consent of-the defendant  s h a r e h o l d e r , t h e c o u r t o r d e r e d that he provide a personal guarantee of the loan and that he pay or cause to be paid the difference in " interest obligations that the defendant corporation had incurred through these financial arrangements for the related corporation's benefit. Another class of cases where the oppression remedy has been applied involved the exclusion of the applicant from the operations of the corporation, more especially from employment, participation in management and remuneration. However,- it may be 323  > !•  '  V  (1977) 4 B.C.L.R. 358 (S.C.).  ^  imiiHiS  n n n ri rijj 'lj ij> u u u u > u a io  79  pointed o u t t h a t e x c l u s i o n p e r s e d o e s not attract t h e g r a n t i n g o f t h e r e m e d y because t h e v a r i o u s corporation statutes r e c o g n i z e a n d p e r m i t the r e m o v a l o f d i r e c t o r s a n d o f f i c e r s of t h e corporation.324 T h e c o u r t s i n a w a r d i n g reliefs u n d e r t h e r e m e d y always look for something more than mere removal or exclusion from the operation of the corporation. O n this basis, t h e c o u r t h a s g r a n t e d relief i n R e F e r g u s o n a n d I m a x  Systems  Corporation.325 where it was found that the removal of the applicant from the corporation which resulted in the reduction of the applicant's role in the corporation w a s p a r t o f a p l a n ultimately to f o r c e h e r t o leave the corporation. A number of applications under the remedy had been brought successfully on the basis of conduct which was permissible under the relevant legislation and the corporate constitution, but which allegedly constituted a breach of underlying u n d e r s t a n d i n g a n d equitable consideration.  T h i s c o n c e p t of fundamental and  underlying understanding or expectation of shareholders through the use of the oppression remedy has been employed frequently in the closely-held corporation in situations involving exclusion from corporate affairs. In widely-held corporations, the expectations of shareholders are usually little more than expectations regarding a reasonable return on investment and responsible behaviour on the part of the directors and the concept of frustrated shareholder expectations is less frequently discussed by the courts in those situations.  Applications under the oppression remedy have  increasingly been resolved by balancing the expectation interests of the shareholders in forming or investing in the corporation with the rights of the board of directors to exercise its legal powers. Courts have often implemented the legitimate expectations of shareholders and have provided remedies in situations where those expectations have been frustrated by the conduct of the majority.  324  For example, see S. 154(3) B.C.C. A.  325  (1983) 43 O.R. (2d.) 128 (Ont. C.A.).  180  Moreover, with the introduction of the "unfairly prejudicial act" as one of the grounds upon which an application could b e brought, the courts came to recognize another category of shareholder rights based not upon the corporation's statute or Articles, but upon equitable considerations.  In Diliaenti v. R . W . M . D . Operations  Kelowna Ltd. , 3 2 6 the participants have been in partnership before incorporation and the relationship between Ihem w a s personal as well a s commercial.  A subsequent  disagreement among the participants saw the plaintiff ousted from the exercise of any management authority and removed as a director. At the same time, the director's fees were increased to $1,000 per month and a management fee payable to the respondent's company was increased to 2-1/2% of gross sales per month M r . Justice Fulton noted that under the English law and earlier British Columbia oppression cases, an applicant could not complain of his removal as director because such conduct did not oppress him in his capacity a s a shareholder. Fulton J, relying partly on the winding u p case of Ebrahimi v. Westboume Gallaries L t d . . 3 2 7 held that in a closely-held corporation where participation in management is of the essence of the interest of the shareholders, removal as a director does affect the member in that capacity and the conduct was unfairly prejudicial to the applicant. Many succcssful applications have involved the diversion of corporate-profits or •  19R  the personal use of corporate assets t y those controlling the corporation. 326 (1976)1 B.C.L.R.36(S.Cr).  327  "  -  (1973) A.C. 360. In fact, Fulton J. concluded in the Diligent! case that the words "unfairly prejudicial" empowered the court to give the broad relief contemplated by that section for the same conduct which the British courts in Ebrahimi had decided justified only a winding up order. He found the defendant company to be one that met the tests for quasi-partnerships, it having been formed (Hit of a pre-existing partnership still heinj: closely held by die shareholders who had been the partners and exhibiting fundamental understandings about management narticioation derived from its partnership history, flic other sharcholdcrscould not insist upon their legal rights based on the corporate entity to abrogate these equitable rights. See also Rs Sabex Internationales (1979) 6 B.L.R. 65. . See, for example, Palmer v. Carling O'Keefe Ltd. (1989) 67 O.R. 161 (Ont. Div. Ct.) which involved the Elders'takeover of Carling O'Keefe Ltd.  181  In summary, notwithstanding the lack of legislative guidance, Canadian courts have done a good job in determining what conduct will found a successful application under the oppression remedy. The courts have exhibited a general reluctance to put a gloss over circumstances which could give rise to the remedy. On the other hand, they have put some reasonable limits on the type of conduct which will give rise to a successful application.  3.  Is the Conduct of the Applicant a Relevant Consideration in Granting Relief Under the Remedy? A question discussed in a number of recent cases is what effect, if any, the  applicant's conduct should have in the granting of a relief under the oppression remedy. The applicant's conduct may be relevant in one of two ways: (a)  It can either have a bearing on the question of whether oppression or unfair  prejudice has been proven, or (b)  it can affect the nature of the remedy that could be granted.  A situation might arise where it is such that the applicant ha§ acted in a way that j u s t i f i e s his e x c l u s i o n f r o m t h e c o r p o r a t i o n .  For* example, if the corporation has been  set u p o n t h e b a s i s that t h e a p p l i c a n t w i l l make a contribution to the running of its a f f a i r s a n d h e f a i l s w i t h o u t c a u s e t o d o s o , t h i s may Justify-his exclusion. 329 Thus, on the shareholder expectations approach, the conduct of the applicant is a relevant  consideration under the rcincch. The relevance of the conduct of the applicant also finds sufficient support from the economic approach to corporate law. Under this approach, the participants in the corporation are seen as having contracting among themselves with reciprocal obligations .and expectations from each contracting party.  An applicant who had  See, for example, Re Wondoflex Textiles Pty. Ltd; (1951) V.L.R. 458.  182  engaged in some form of misconduct may justly be removed from his employment and this might not constitute unfairly prejudical conduct. Cm the whole, Canadian courts have paid much attention to the reciprocal nature of obligations in corporations and have held i n some cases that the conduct of the applicant should bar an application.  4.  The Relationship of the Oppression Remedy with Other Remedies The oppression remedy is the most important remedy under the Canadian  corporation legislation.  In contrast with other statutory remedies, the oppression  remedy does not suffer much procedural hurdles, and the scope of conduct covered by the remedy is very wide. In addition, there exists in the various statutes incorporating the oppression remedy a broad r a n g e of reliefs which the courts are nermitted to grant.  While the oppression remedy has gradually emerged to the forefront of the remedies available to shareholders, the other  remedif  s  either declitfoj jn  i m p o r t a n c e o r h a v e failed to achieve the expected degree of importance. For instance, t h e a p p r a i s a l rights and the statutory derivative action have been utilized less than had b e e n anticipated a t the time of their introduction.  Applications for winding-up by  minority shareholders a r e less frequent than in jurisdictions without the oppression r e m e d y . F o r example, 330 in t h e O n t a r i o Reports between 1974 and 1982, there were seven reported winding-up applications. From 1982, the year the oppression remedy was introduced to 1988, there were no reported winding-up applications. There were,  however, f o u r applications Under the oppression remedy. While it is not intended to pre-empt the discussion on the adequacy of the other statutory r e m e d i e s , it m a y b e pointed out that the lack of reliance on these remedies is mainly because of their shortcomings. 330  Cheffins, supra, note 280 at 332.  In the case of the appraisal remedy, for  183  instance, the short time limits and the compulsory complex procedure which must be religiously followed with the advice of a lawyer precludes many shareholders from relying on the remedy. The wide scope of circumstances in which the oppression remedy applies also has diminished the importance of the other remedies.  T h e oppression remedy, for  example, covers most of the conduct which provide grounds for a winding-up order and t h e courts are often less reluctant t o wind up a corporation than to grant a relief under the oppression remedy. E v e n if the applicant's prayer is to obtain a court's order  winding-up the corporation, such order could infact equally be granted under the oppression remedy.331 In comparison with the statutory derivative action, the oppression remedy has considerable advantages.  A l t h o u g h tlie statutory derivative action has sought to give  powers to members to litigate on behalf of the corporation in situations where those in c o n t r o l either r e f u s e o r neglect to do so, judicial construction of the procedural r e q u i r e m e n t s i n h e r e n t in t h e statutory derivative action has tended to diminish its utility  as a mechanism f o r policing the board of directors and the senior management of the corporation.332  T h e result i s that s h a r e h o l d e r s have relied more on the oppression  r e m e d y than o n t h e statutory derivative action, and this is more so, when it is a c k n o w l e d g e d that f a c t s giving rise to wrongs to corporations may often constitute the subject matter of an application under the oppression remedy as well as a statutory derivative action. 333 Moreover, an applicant seeking to bring a derivative action must f i r s t o f all, obtain the l e a v e o f court. No leave is required to bring an application under 331  Section 224(2)(F) B.C.C.A.; Section 241(3)(L) C.B.C.A.  332  For example, it has been held that any shareholder seeking to pursue a derivative action must comply with the statutory provisions and obtain the leve of the court. Farnham v. Fingold (1973) 2 O.R. 132 (Ont. C.A.).  333  See, for example, Sparling v. Javelin Int'l Ltd. (1986) R.J.Q. 1073 (Que. S.C.), Re Peterson and Kanata Invs. Ltd. (1975) 60 D.L.R. 3d. 527 (B.C.S.C.).  1  ,  i,  •  n n n n  • u uu u  . n o't  ua  J  <,  i  184  the oppression remedy.  In addition, the remedies available under Ihe oppression  remedy are broader in scope than under the statutory derivative action. Some commentators334 have stated (quite rightly) that the emergence of the oppression remedy as the most potent arsenal in shareholder protection may be a cause of concern with respect to its relationship with the other remedies. There is not much problem in its relationship with the winding-up remedy because this latter remedy has been drafted with the intention of merging the two remedies. 3 3 5 With respect to the appraisal remedy, a contioversial question is whether the right of appraisal is exclusive to other remedies a n d m o r e particularly to the oppression remedy.  Case law is  conflicting o n this matter although it appears that even after requesting that the corporation purchase his or h e r shares under t h e appraisal rights provisions a shareholder can apply under the oppression remedy. The dicta in McConnell v. Newco Fin. Corp.,336 indicated that an oppression application could not be brought if appraisal rights h a d b e e n validly exercised v. Keeprite.  337  However, the court held in Brant Investments Ltd.  that an application could be brought. In reaching this conclusion, the  court stated that the remedy provided by Section 184 of the Canada Business  Corporations Act (now replaced by Section 190(1)) is in addition to the remedies p r o v i d e d b y Section 234 ( n o w replaced by Section 241) and may be-exercised  concurrently with the remedies provided by Section 234. The inter-relationship- between the oppression remedy and the statutory derivative action is more of a problem because most acts or conduct of didrectors could give rise to an action both under the oppression remedy and the derivative action.338 334  For example, Cheffins, supra, note 280 at 334-5.  335  Diekerson Report, supra, note 279, at 150-51.  336  (1979) 8 B.L.R. 180 (B.C.S.C.).  337  (1987) 37 B.L.R. 65 (Ont. H.C.).  338  Cheffins, supra, note 280, 335.  185  In Johnston v. West Fraser Timber Co.. 3 3 9 the court stated that certain allegations constitute wrongs to the corporation and should not be the proper subject matter of an oppression remedy. In the same vein, Buckley and ConneIlyj40 have suggested that boundaries be drawn around the oppression remedy by requiring certain matters be dealt with by way of a derivative action rather than the oppression remedy. However, using the derivative action to impose limits on the oppression remedy may influence the courts in imposing unnecessary procedural hurdles around the oppression remedy which will have the effect of reducing its efficacy as a protective remedy against corporate misconduct.  Summary The growth of the oppression remedy has moved far beyond a simple good faith requirement and recent case law indicates that it will increasingly infringe upon the actions o f t h e m a j o r i t y , incorporating such issues like the extent of legitimate s h a r e h o l d e r e x p e c t a t i o n s , the degree to which the court should intervene in internal c o r p o r a t e m a t t e r s a n d r e v i e w a corporation's business decisions and the scope of the m i n o r i t y s h a r e h o l d e r rights. T h e courts, while increasingly extending the scope of the r e m e d y h a v e i m p o s e d s e n s i b l e limits to the remedy.  -  ••-....  Cn the w h o l e , t h e courts have shown a willingness to carry out the mandate that the legislatures have given them to fashion remedies for shareholders who complain that they have been dealt with unfairly.  Commenting on the scope of the remedy,  Beck 341 rightly asserted that it is beyond question, the broadest, most comprehensive and most open-ended shareholder remedy in'the common law world. 339  (1982) 133 D.L.R. 3d. 77 (Appeal).  340  Corporations - Cases, Texts and Materials (1984).  354  Stanley Beck, "Minority Shareholders' Rights in the 1980s", (1982) Law Society of Upper Canada, Corporate Law in the 80s 311, 312.  186  B.  The Statutory Derivative Action  Outline: This part of t h e w o r k will e x a m i n e t h e a d e q u a c y o f t h e statutory derivative action (as a p r o t e c t i v e r e m e d y f o r the shareholders), focussing o n t h e a i m s , objectives a n d p u r p o s e s sought t o b e achieved by its existence. T h e British Columbia Compass A c t will b e used a s a m o d e l although r e f e r e n c e s will b e m a d e to e t h e r statutes "where d i f f e r e n c e s occur.  In o r d e r t o d o tliis e f f e c t i v e l y , the common l a w position towards  d e r i v a t i v e actions will b e e x a m i n e d briefly to illustrate the difficulties in the common l a w w h i c h g a v e rise t o t h e need f o r a subsequent enactment o f a statutory derivative action. R e f e r e n c e s will b e m a d e t o the position in the United States w h e r e tho re;medy has given rise t o a n u m b e r o f unique procet ural and substantive questions. The main f o c u s will b e o n t h e j u d i c i a l interpretation of the procectara requirements o f the statutory derivative action.  Emphasis will also bii given to the possibility of t h e  acceptance of special litigation committees in Canada.  Introduction: T r a d i t i o n a l c o r p o r a t e theory views the'directors and ottia- coiporafc managers and officers as owing some fiduciary duties towards the corpnrat'wn. Where there is a breach of any of the fiduciary duties, corporate interna?, autonomy fiinciple requires that the decision to sue shall be taken by the board of circc'v-s or in cert"in circumstances by the majority of shareholders in general mee'rin™.  {4 is apparent1',  unlikely that the wrongdoers will propose instituting an action -agaJitil themselves OP behalf of the corporation. From the minority shareholder's position, this asp°x.? of she  187  c o r p o r a t e i n t e r n a l a u t o n o m y p r i n c i p l e h a s o f t e n b e e n u n f o r t u n a t e , f o r it i s h a r d l y p o s s i b l e to b r i n g a n a c t i o n against'an e r r a n t director if the w r o n g c o m p l a i n e d o f can be classified a s a w r o n g t o t h e corporation. Over the years, the concept of the derivative action developed as a guarantee which ensures that some degree of accountability and control exist over the board of directors and senior officials either directly by allowing shareholders the right to bring an action against directors or officers if they have breached their duty or indirectly by t h e threat o f such an a c t i o n if duties m i g h t b e b r e a c h e d . U n d e r t h e derivative action, the minority shareholder or shareholders sue in representative form claiming redress for a w r o n g d o n e to t h e corporation. T h e w r o n g having been done to the corporation, the c o r p o r a t i o n i s t h e p r o p e r plaintiff i n the action but the action may be maintained by s h a r e h o l d e r s w h e r e t h e w r o n g d o e r s a r e in control and fail to seek redress for the wrong w h i c h has b e e n done.  T h e a c t i o n i s derivative because the plaintiff's light to sue is  secondary in nature and is accorded him on the ground that the true plaintiff refuses or neglects to bring the action. The corporation at all times is the injured party and at all times is the true plaintiff even though shareholders are permitted to maintain the action as nominal plaintiffs.  Early Developments (a)  The Common Law Position The common law position was succintly stated in Poss v. Harbottle342 where it  was held that the corporation itself is the proper plaintiff in an action on account of wrongs done to it. The rule is generally understood to preclude a shareholder from bringing an action on account of a wrong allegedly done to a corporation if the wrong complained of is capable of being ratified by the members in general meeting. 342  (1843) 2Harre 461; 67 E.R. (189).  188  Later, Mozley v. Alston 343 extended this rule to cover internal irregularities in the conduct of the corporation's affairs.  The court in Burl and w. Earle 3 4 4 ie-  emphasizedin clear terms this cardinal procedural rule of corporate law when it stated that: "it is an elementary principle, of the law relating to [joint stock] companies that the court will not interfere with the internal management of companies acting within their power, and in fact has no jurisdiction to do so. Again, it is clear law that in order to redress a wrong done to the company or to recover moneys or damages alleged to be due to the company, the action should prima facie be brought by the company itself." The procedural rule in Etoss v. Harbottle and other subsequent cases hardened into substantive law 3 4 5 and in so doing prevented the minority shareholders frcm pursuing their remedies when directors who were also majority shareholders were acting fraudulently toward the corporation.  Thus, aartain exceptions to the rule were  formulated by the courts to mitigate aiiy hardship which the rule had caused the minority shareholders. It came to be recognized that the rule was not applicable where: (a)  the acts complained of were ultra vires the corporation or otherwise illegal. 346  (b)  the activity could be effective only when approved by a special resolution and only an ordinary resolution was passed. 347  (c)  the action alleges an injury to the plaintiffs personal rights,!48 -  (d)  the acts complained of amounted to a fraud on the minority and the wrongdoers were in control.  "'  _  343" (1847) 1Ph. 790; 41E.R. 833. 344 345 346 347  354  (1902) A.C. 83 at 93. Boyle, "A Liberal Approach to Foss v. Hirbottle", (1964) 27 Mod. L.R. 603, 606. Burland v. Earle (1902) A.C. 83; Ashbury Rly. Coy. v. Riche (1875) W.R. 7 H.L. 653. Edwards v. Halliwell (1950) 2 All E.R. 1064. Pender v. Lushington (1877) 6 Ch.D. 70.  189  Fraud on the minority, defined widely involves an abuse of power, usually by those in control.  The plaintiff must prove some abuse of power and furthermore that the  conduct was not in the best interests of the corporation.349  Some of these include  instances where the majority attempted to appropriate the corporation's property to themselves; 350 themselves  351  where the majority sought to appropriate minority assets to or where the majority had been guilty of unconscionable conduct.  Although the courts indicated a willingness to intervene in any case where there is injustice and to prevent the management of corporations being so conducted as to produce injustice or injuries to any of the members, 352 generally judicial reluctance to intervene in internal corporate matters was most evident in the context of shareholder remedies.  In PavLides v. Jensen353 for example, a minority shareholder sought to  bring a derivative action against a director for negligence in selling an asset of the corporation at a gross undervaluation. The action failed since the majority could have ratified the director' saction nor could have decided not to sue. However, the effects ot* PavLides v. Jenson was ameliorated to a little extent by the case of Daniels v.. Daniels 354 where in circumstances similar to PavLides v. Jenson a minority shareholder was given standing to bring an action. But the court added that to establish a fraud oil the minority it had to be shown not only that a wrong was done to the corporation, but that the wrong benefitted the wrong-doing directors. Notwithstanding the decision in  355T  S e e L C . B . (lower. Principles of Modi""* fYimnany T jiw (4th c/1 1Q7Q) nn 616-610.  350 Menierv. Hooper's Telegraph NVorks(1874) 9 Ch. App. 350. 351  352 353 354  Sidehottom v. Kershaw, Leese & Co. (1920) 1 Ch. 154, Brown v. British Abrasive Wheel Co. (1919) 1 Ch. 290. RcLaugham Skating Kink Co., ( 1 8 8 7 ) 5 Ch: D.669, 679. (1956) Ch.565, (1956) 2 All K.R. 578 (Ch.D.). (1978) Ch.406, (1978) 2 All E.R. 89 (Ch.D.).  190  Daniels v. Daniels, the courts expanded the rule in Foss v. Harbottle to cover cases where the wrongs complained of were in fact carried out by thedirertfirsJ1" There are some advantages inherent in the rule.  In the first place, the rule  prevents a multiplicity of actions by minority shareholders who are disgruntled at the policies pursued By a legitimate majority. Secondly, the court's reluctance to interfere in internal corporate matters may have ensured that the shareholders in general meeting did have the last say in the corporation's affairs. If the irregularity was one which could be ratified, Foss v. Harbottle prevented an action being brought until a general meeting had been held to decide the issue.  The counterpart to Foss v. Harbottle in the United States is Hawes v. City of Oakland356 decided by the United States Supreme Court.  Many aspects of the  derivative action in the United States could be traced to the decision in Hawes. In that case, the court did not adopt the rule in Foss v. Harbotlle to preclude shareholder suits on behalf of the corporation. Rather, the court made use of the power vested in it to make rules of general equityjurisdiction, and established some procedural requirements for shareholder derivative actions. Those include the following: (a)  before filing an action, the plaintiff must have made a demand on the corporation's shareholders that they take- action to resolve his grievance, including endorsing an action against the prospective defendants or removing then;- from corporate office.  When the action was filed, the plaintiff's  complaint must further allege that a demand was made or state thp. rppsnns that excused him from making such demands, for example, o n grounds of futility. 355  For recent English cases, see Estmanco (Kilner House) Ltd. v. Greater London Council (1982) 1 W.L.R. 2, Prudential Assurance Co. Ltd. v. Newman Industries Ltd. (No. 2) (1982) Ch.204.  356  (1882) 104 U.S. 450.  nnn n  n  LI U U U\< LT  191  the plaintiff was required to make another demand on the directors and could be excused on grounds of futility. (c)  the plaintiffs complaint must plead with specificity, facts showing compliance with the requirements and must allege that the derivative action has not been filed as a result of collusion among the parties to create federal jurisdiction over an action that would otherwise be litigated i n state rather than federal court.  (d)  the plaintiff must establish that he owned shares at the time of the breach of duty or that his shares devolved on him by operation of law.  The rale laid down in Hawes v. Citv of Oakland differs from the rale in Foss v. Harbottle.  For instance, while the rale in Foss v. Barbottle precluded shareholder  actions raising certain types of claims, and'enabled shareholders successfully to move to dismiss such actions, the rale in Hawe* regulates derivative actions by establishing preconditions for the plaintiffs eligibility to sue but does not exclude claims from litigability. 357 The American cases treat litigation related questions as falling within the director's businessjudgement if the directors act in good faith and are disinterested in the outcome of the litigation. Thus, if the directors refuse the prospective plaintiffs demand and the plaintiff then brings a derivative action the court will dismiss Ihe action unless the plaintiff can estcblish that the directors acted wrongfully in refusing  the demand.  -  .  —  :  Derivative action in the United States developed into a well-established remedy a f t e r the decision in Hawes v . Citv of Oakland. evolution of the remedy.  Many elements contributed to the  W e have observed above that the decision in Hawes was a  product of the court's exercise of general equitable rule-making power in an era in which the-United States Supreme Court actively determined rules of general federal 357 D.A. DeMott, "Shareholder Litigation in Australia and the United States: Common Problems, Uncommon Solutions", (1987) 11 Sydney Law Rev. 258, 262.  192  common law, including principles of equity jurisprudence.  This era ended in 1931  with' the decision in Eric Railroad;... Tompkins358 which restricted the court's ability*, through its rule making powers granted by the federal Riles Enabling Act to prescribe rules of substantive law in addition to rules regulating procedures in federal court litigation.  As a result, the substantive law relating to derivative actions brought if?  federal court is state law, in most cases that of the cntparaticri's state of incorporationThe federal rules of civil procedure contain a rule specifically addressing derivative suits. 359 However, the federal courts have disagreed on the question of whether thl federal rules should be interpreted simply to make applicable the relevant provisions df applicable state law - such as demand requirements or whether it imposes significaift regulation of derivative actions.  Although the Supreme Court has not addressed thil  question directly, it was held in Burks v. Lasker 360 that in derivative actions raising claims under the federal securities law, state law governs issues concerning the right t§ control the litigation unless the state law in question conflicts with the policie§ represented by the provision of federal securities regulation from which the clairft arises.  Few states today still require a plaintiff to make a demand on the corporation's shareholders before commencing derivative action. shareholders may have been premised '— shareholder's decision, especially in  The decline-of demand on ""  likely quality of the  mmnntinnc n i a y  not  justify the cost  of making the demand. Rermirine the demand tn hp. made if the corporation has a large  numtwr of sbartboldurs i m p o s e sensiderabie burden and expense on the plaintiff.  358  (1938) 304 U.S. 64.  359  Federal Rules Civil Procedure 23.1.  360  (1979) 441 U.S. 471.  193  In addition to the demand requirement on shareholders, about one third of the states impose special security for expense requirements on derivative plaintiffs and many jurisdictions in the United States also have rules controlling the settlement of voluntary dismissal of derivative actions. The security for expense statutes require the plaintiff to post security, out of which the defendant's litigation costs can be paid if the action is unsuccessful. Some statutes provide that this requirement is unapplicable if the plaintiff owns more than a specified amount of shares. The security for expense provisions were enacted in response to assertims that many derivative suits were frivolous and were brought as strike suits to exact a settlement of little benefit to anyone other than the plaintiffs attorney. The potential for disparity in economic interest between the plaintiffs attorney and the plaintiff is part of the explanation for the special LuaalnmL of voluntary dismissals and settlements of derivative litigation. 361 Although, in the United States, the parties bear their own litigation costs but a long standing conventioft ' l a s permitted the plaintiffs attorney's fees to be taxed, on any common fund recovered by the plaintiff on behalf of the corporation, whether created as a result of judgement aficF trial or through a settlement agreement. Thus, the plaintiff with little investment in corporation may have no investment in the action if. the attorney has been engaged on & contingent fee basis. The individual defendant's interest i n negotiating the agreement i§ to minimize their personal financial contribution and loss. These factors suggest thd' the mode of settlement negotiation may not adequately prottsCi the llltfcTk'ii of tlL corporation and all of its shareholders because more of the actors in the negotiating process has economic interest that are .necessarily closely aligned with those of the corporation. 362  As a result, the federal rules of civil procedure and most states now  361  D.A. DeMott, supra, note 103 at 267.  362  Ibid, at 267.  194  require judicial approval of any settlement or voluntary dismissal of a derivative action and require the court's approval to be preceded ty notice to the corporation's shareholders of the terms of the settlement agreement.  The notice enables any  shareholder who objects to the terms of the settlement to come forward. The court reviews the terms of the agreement, including the amount to be paid to the plaintiffs attorney and the basis on which the fee was computed. The procedural and substantive requirements which have been outlined make the bringing of a derivative action in the United States a difficult undertaking. Designed primarily to prevent strike suits in which the plaintiff may directly benefit and to limit the diversity jurisdiction of the federal court, these requirements have served to confuse an already complicated area of the law and thus diminish the utility of the derivative action as a remedy for corporate misconduct.  The Statutory Reforms in Canada In Canada, mindful of the problems of the minority shareholders in attempting to bring directors and senior management to task for misdeed or negligence, most legislatures decided that the shareholders should be given a statutory derivative action, Ontario was the first jurisdiction to introduce the remedy in Canada. The Lawrence Committee after considering the alternatives to a Section 210 of the 1948 U.K.. Company Act approach (to theextent that Section-210 was available to relieve against the rule in Foss v. Harbottlel concluded that the derivative action seated to be the most effective remedy to enforce the statutory standard of conduct and care which was then to be imposed on the directors in the exercise of their responsibilities.  The  Committee was also mindful of the consequences generated ty strike suits and collusive settlements by litigants in the United States but expressed satisfaction- that the undesirable characteristics of the derivative action could be avoided.  They finally  suggested that the remedy could and should be adopted in Ontario law and practice to  195  serve as an effective procedure whereby "corporate wrongs could be put right". 363 Other legislatures followed Ontario. 364 Most of these provisions codified and to some extent modified the common law position.  It would be instructive to set out one of these sections and the British  Columbia Company Act will be most appropriate for our analysis. References to any differences with other provisions will be made where applicable. Under Section 225 of the British Columbia Companjj Act 1973 (as modified), a member or director of the company, subject 'to four qualifications, may with the leave of the court, bring or defend an action in the name and on behalf of the corporation. An action may be brought to enforce any right, duty or obligation owed to thd corporation that could be enforced by the corporation itself or to obtain damages for any breach of any such right, duty or obligation. The four qualifications are: that (a)  he has made reasonable efforts to cause the directors of the corporation td commence or diligently prosecute or defend the action,  (5)  he is acting in good faith,  (c)  it is prima facie in the interests of the cctmpany that the action be brought or defended, and  (d)  in the case of a member, that he was a member of the corporation at-the time of the transaction or other event giving rise to the cause of action.  J  The British Columbia statute and indeed all"other statutes that has provided for the remedy in Canada give a paramount role to the court. This approach may have been influenced by the existence of many strike suits and unnecessary harassment of corporationsty corporate litigants in the United States about which Canadian draftsmen 363 364  Lawrence CommitleeUcpoi t, supra note 279 at 63. British Columbia was die next Jurisdiction to introduce the remedy.  See B.C.C.A., S.B.C.  1973, C.18, S.222. 365  Section 225(3) B.C.C.A.  n n n n ' n n-i_> i u u.u u > u a u J  196  were most apprehensive. Leave of court appears to be the compromise struck by the draftsmen to allay the fears of those who thought imminent tragedy was approaching by the conferral of a derivative action right. 366 While such action is pending, the court may give directions for the conduct of the action and order that the corporation pay the interim costs of the persons controlling the conduct of the action.367  in addition, on the final disposition of the action, the  court may order that the costs taxed as between a solicitor and his own client be paid either by the corporation, or by the person bringing the action.368 No action brought or defended under Section 225 can be discontinued, settled or dismissed without the approval of the court. 369 Subsection225(7) goes to the issue of the majority's ability to ratify misconduct and provides that no application made or action brought or defended under the section shall be stayed or dismissed by reason only that it is shown that an alleged breach of a right, duty or obligation, owed to the corporation, has been or might be approved by the members of that corporation, but evidence of that approval or possible approval may be taken into account by the court in making an order under the section. Subsection225(8) was not in the original provision but was added by Section 45 of the 1976 Amendment Act. It defines a member for the purposes of the sectim to include Ziegel, et al, Cases and Materials on Partnerships and Canadian Business"Corporations, 2d. ed. (Toronto: The Carswell Co. Ltd. 19X9) at 1033. Fischel and Bradley stated that the requirement for leave o f court is a recognition that the costs of a derivative action enforced by those with a small economic stake in the venture outweigh the benefits unless limitations are imposed to reduce these costs. See Fischel and Bradley, "ThcRole of Liability Rules and The Derivative Suit in Corporate Law: A Theoretical and Empirical Analysis", Law and Economics Workshop Series, Number WS 11-111 mivcrsity of Toronto, 1985 at 43-44. 367  Section 225(4).  368  Section 225(5).  369  Section 225(6).  197  (a)  a beneficial owner of a share in the corporation, and  (b)  any other person who, in the'discretion of the court, is a proper person to make an application under the section. Following the enactment of the statutory derivativeactions, it is now settled that  the provisions dealing with the remedy have abrogated the common law position so that it is no longer possible to bring an action on behalf of the corporation independent of these provisions.  This was accepted in Ontario first by Famham v, Fingold 370 and  later followed in Goldex Mines Ltd. v. Revill 371 and Feld v, Glick. 372 Despite an argument to the contrary, based both on the rule of statutory interpretation that changes in the common law must be expressly made (which, it was argued, was not done by S.222 of British Columbia previous Company Act) and on the differences in th6 wording between the Ontario and British Columbia provisions, the courts in British Columbia have reached the same conclusion. 373 The main thrust of the statutory derivative provision is the overriding role giveit to the courts in deteirnining who shall be allowed to bring an action on behalf of thd corporation. Compliance with the preconditions is mandatory but once complied with) the court's opinion to grant leave is discretionary. The adequacy of the existing statutory provisions regulating the derivative action depend to a large extent on how successful the courts have observed and interpreted the procedural requirements for the-application of the remedy. We shall therefore examine some of tire procedural issues relating to the remedy and the court's response to them. 370 371  (1973) 3 3 D . L . R . (3d) 156. (1974) 54 D.L.R. (3d.) 672 (Cnt.C.A,).  See also Slutsky, "Shareholders' l'n -jonal Actions -  New Horizons" t {19"] 6) 39 MLR.: 331. 372 373  (1975).8 O.R. (2d.) 8. Shield Development Co. v. Synder and Western Mines Ltd. (1976) 3 W.W.R. 44. The plainti/fe in t t e s m argued that t k Ontero p t w ^ w w w i s ttiaiiiJaiw'/ while the B.C. section was permissive and therefore should allow a common law action as well as the statutory one.  321  Procedural Requirements o f the Statutory Derivative A c t i o n and the Judicial Response  1.  Standing to Sue: (a)  Contemporaneous Membership While the Canadian Business Corporations Act 3 ' 4 provides a wide range  of applicants by conferring a right of application upon "complainants" (defined to include shareholders, present and past creditors, directors and any person considered proper by the court), the British Columbia Act provides a narrow range of applicants by limiting the right to apply to members and directors. Although Subsection 225(8) of the British Columbia Corporations Act purports to extend the meaning of a member to include anyone considered a proper person by the court, a member must have been such at the time of the transaction giving rise to the action. The requirement!; of contemporaneous membership in  -  - -- ^  Columbia provision narrows down the scope of potential applicants who cgj benefit from the protection afforded by the remedy. justification  why  shareholders  who_  There seems to ^g J}g  'discover . wrongdoing  or  gross  mismanagement which took place pri o r prevented from taking advantage of  jje remedy, •  Some  commentators  ^  argued that this requirement serves as a precaution to stop or prevent strike or "bounty hunters".375 However, these fears can be adequately dealt with by the court's supervision of settlements. 374  373  The requirement of contemporaneous  S.238. For example, M.P. Krysinski, "Derivative Suits and the Special Litigation Committee - A Question of Balance in Michigan Law" (1982) 29 Wayne L. Rev. 149 at 153.  199  membership may result in inequity as between past and present shareholders, discriminating against those who actually suffer the loss. If the acts have only recently came to light, this may affect the value of all the shares held at the time the information reaches the market regardless of whether the shareholders held them at the time of the breach of duty. 376 Judicial decisions have tended generally to limit the scope of potential applicants. Re Daon Development Corporation 377 manifestsjudicial reluctance to use the statutory discretion to expand the ambit of potential applicants. Here, a debenture holder was refused standing on the grounds that his remedies, if any, should arise from his debenture trust documents. Wallace J. held that to be a proper person, an applicant must have some direct financial interest in the manner in which the affairs of the corporation is conducted. From the shareholder protection perspective, the judical reluctance to expand the ambit of applicants may seem plausible to prevent the multiplicity of litigations by throwing the floodgate of litigation open to all. There may be possible abuses of the system if a more liberal judicial approach is taken.  On  the other hand, there may be good reasons for extending the scope of potential applicants, for example, to the employees of the corporation,-who.it has been suggested,378 stand to lose their livelihood through negligent or fraudulent -management - a consequence asserted more disastrous tharrthe direct economic loss which might be suffered by shareholders. However, employees are usually more adequately protected by their employment and trade union contracts. For a judical decision allowing shareholders to recover for breach of dutv which occurred nrior to their purchase of shares, see Regal (Hastings) Ltd. v. Gulliver (1942) I All E.R. 378. (1984) 54 B.C.L.R. 235 (B.C.S.C.).  .  M . A . Maloney, "Whither the Statutory Derivative Action?", (19S6) 64 Canadian Bar Review, 309, 318.  200  Thus, there is no immediate danger in precluding them from applying under the remedy. Unlike the Canada Business Corporations Act, the British Columbia Company Act does not extend the right of application to the Director (or Registrar of Companies).  Granting the right of application to him may be  premised on the market-public perspective. Most shareholders hold diversified portfolios and have tangible economic interests in ensuring honest and open corporate governance.  A contrary argument may however, be that extending  such right to the director may force upon shareholders the costs of enforcing socially desirable conduct; good.  in effect, forcing subsidization of the public  379  An intriguing question which arises under the British Columbia standing requirements is whether the right of application should be extended to past members.  The Canada Business Corporations Act clearly contains an express  provision which extends the right of application to former members.  Generally,  the nature of relief obtained under the derivative action and the essence of the remedy (being a vindication of corporate wrong) may negate any argument for extension of the remedy to past members.  But a shareholder might have  suffered a diminution of his investment interest in the corporation as a result of  .which he was compelled to withdraw his interests.  Exiting the corporation  might not have adequately compensated the shareholder for any loss suffered because of the director's breach of duty. In recognition of this fact, the Canada Business Corporations Act provides in Subsection 240(c) that the court may make an order directing that any amount adjudged payable by a defendant in the action shall bp paid in whole or in part directly to former and present security 373  Fischel and Bradley, supra, note 366 at 149.  201  holders of the corporation.  Extending the right of application to previous  members may be important for instance, in a case where there was a wrong to the corporation, and control of the corporation had passed to new hands and the shareholders who were indirectly damnified by the wrong at the time it was committed and no longer shareholders. 380  (b)  The F^nn Fid" Apr1'™"1, Another standing requirement is that the applicant must be acting in good  faith. The inclusion of this requirement may be justified on the ground that it prevents vexatious and malicious actions. Unfortunately, none of the statutes has provided any definition of the type of conduct that would fulfill the good faith requirement.  Judicial decisions have not helped either.  Courts usually  adopt a negative definition ty pronouncing when an applicant's conduct does not fulfill the bona fide requirement.381 Approaches L t d .  382  In R£ Bellman and Western  it was suggested that lack of bona fide may be evidenced by  the fact that an applicant has available other actions with substantially the same remedies. However, deducting lack of bona fide from the applicant's decision not to pursue alternative actions may lead to the introduction of extraneous factors in the good faith requirement.  Where" an-alleged conduct gives rise to many  causes o f action, it is suggested that an applicant should have the right :o choice  of action or can plead them in the alternative provided that the requisite rules of court are observed.  Courts should therefore look for more acceptable criterion  Fortunately the B.C.C.A. Discussion Paper 1991 recommends the extension of the right of application to past members. See Anderson v. Anderson (1979) 105 D.L.R. (3d.) 341 at 343. (1981) 1 3 0 D . L . R . (3d.) 193.  n n n,n < n n u q u u u. u ' u o a ' I  £- ^ ^ g r a s '  &  i  iOTT^^^^^t^W^T^itfTT^  i ^ A ^ m r ^  r-r  —ryaim r'^^^WiiTinrfi  ' r TTTiW"""" TiTT^ '1—rrii*irr,"*:,j'«'"*:"*'ii~~"A  202  for evaluating the good faith requirement or dispense with this requirement if other procedural requirements are substantially complied with. 2.  The Demand Requirement: Reasonable F.ffortsand ReasonableNotice. The rationale for the demand requirement is to enable the corporation to have  the first opportunity to exercise its right to sue.  Although the British Columbia  Corporations Act and the Canada Business Corporations Act provide that the applicant inform the corporation of alleged wrongdoings and of his intention to pursue an action, the specific provisions of the two Acts differ. While the Canada Business Corporations Act requires only that "reasonable notice" be given to the directors of his intention td apply to the court if the actionis not prosecuted, the British Columbia Corporations Act requires that "reasonable efforts" be made to cause the directors to commence or defend the action. Neither Acts stipulate what type of conduct will constitute reasonable notice or effort.  T h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n of tha amount of information which shall be given to the  d i r e c t o r s is very important since shareholders usually have little hard evidence to  support their claims,  Access to corporate information may be limited.  t h e r e f o r e i m p o s e s e v e r e restraints on applicants if  there was  a court  It would imposed  requirement that they verify and determine W i i specificity the action~to be pursued. T h e b o a r d c£ directors, on the other hand, must be given sufficient information  regarding the alleged wrongs to reach a reasoned decision as to w h e t e f e e corporation should take action. However, they are better placed to seek out information if given a clue as to the area of the wrongdoing. It is suggested that the burden on the applicant should remain relatively light. Courts h a v e a p p r o a c h e d t h e issue with a relatively great degree of liberal disposition.  T h e conclusion gathered from decided cases suggest that it is sufficient to  203  identify the impugned transaction. In Re Northwest Forest Products Ltd., 383 the court held that the applicant need not sp&ify the exact cause of the action but merely give the board of directors sufficient facts to find an endorsement on a generally endorsed writ of summons. Some decided cases suggest that the degree of information required from the applicant may vary depending on the expertise of the intended recipient. These cases hold that where the intended recipient has the requisilg expertise t 0 decipher with reasonable clarity the impiig ne H transact;™  nn mnr/> should be required from the  applicant than a general ide  VtrAioli  rttifinifiAn  rtf  Tr> AvmPffAniv tr  384  Cory 3. considered that two letters sent by the applicant's lawyer outlining grievances without any particulars were sufficient to fulfill the requirement because of the expertise and qualification of the direg^r ( a ] a w y e r ) receiving the demand letter. Although the effect of the cqu r t 's flexibility in determining when the demand requirement is met manifests its  r e a diness  to grant leave if the other procedural  requirements are satisfied, the a^0r>tion of the suhiective test, as done in Armstrong's case may sometimes generate u f l g g f ^  p n m 2 facie suggest that when  ffld  !H g&porate law.  The case  director-recipient is a lawyer, then no particulars of  grievances may b e necessary, to satisfy the demand requirement.  However, sight  should not be lost of the fact tfoat m o s t if not all directors (who are not lawyers) usually consult Jawyers for legal advic- ™ — ;  p t  ofdetuand letters. The question that arises  is whether an applicant should go furthgf  fc  specify particulars of wrongdoings or sli( j u l d  he be  intend? to GODSUJt a  t he  applicant in Armstrong's case to'  allowed to assume that the director  8n receipt of the letter? The danger in adopting this test  may be to bring into consideration extraneous factors not considered by those  383  (1975) 4 W.W.R. 724 (B.C.S.C.).  384  (1970) 20 O.R. (2d) 648 (Ont. H.C.).  responsible for corporate law reform when the derivative action was introduced into Canadian corporate statutes. It 'is therefore suggested that courts should be wary in following the test laid down in Armstrong's case and other cases based on the same reasoning. Another problem which arises under the demand requirement is with respect to situations where the directors are themselves the wrongdoers. An interesting question is whether the demand requirement should be dispensed with if it is obvious that it will be a futile attempt to ask the directors who are the very wrongdoers to initiate proceedings against themselves.385 There is often no possibility that the directors will resolve to bring an action on behalf of the corporation against themselves. To inform them and ask them to bring such an action may lead to hostility and delay in what is likely to be a lengthy proceeding. Some commentators have expressed the opinion that in these circumstances, the demand requirement can and should be dispensed with in accordance with the futility test. 386 Two conflicting interests can be identified to be at stake here: the right of the board to have sufficient time to decide whether an action should be brought by the corporation and the possible abuse ty a hostile board of the demand requirement to delay and cause further expense to an applicant.  It may be helpful in this, regard to  draw a distinction between cases where the board is apparently neutral and those where the b o a r d is c o m p r i s e d of the v e r y wrongdoers.  It i s suggested that the Acts be  amended to provide that the demand requirement on the directors be dispensed with if the applicant can establish that it would be futile making such demand.  However,  where the board is apparently neutral, it is still essential that demand be made first and 383  "" ' Some jurisdictions in the United States apply the futility test to dispense with the demand requirement on the directors in situations where the applicant can prove that it would be {utile asking the directors to initiate proceedings, for example, Delaware and District of Columbia.  386  J.H. Schnell, "A Procedural Treatment of Derivative Suit Dismissals by Minority Directors", (1981) 69 Cal. L. Rev. 885, 885.  205  reasonable time given to allow the directors to decide whether or not to initiate proceedings.  3.  The Interests of the Company None of the statutes provides any definition of the phrase:  company".  "the interests of the  The courts have kept the phrase fluid to deal with the changing  circumstances.  In Re Northwest Forest Products Ltd. 3 8 7 the court considered that the  test was met if a bona fide claim against the corporation could be shown. It was not sufficient for the respondents to rebut the allegation ty stating that the corporation would be prejudiced by pursuits of the claim; although the court stated that it would consider the consequences of a final order on the corporation. Investments Inc,.,  388  In Re Marc-Jay  the court stated that one merely had to ask whether the action was  frivolous, vexatious or bound to be unsuccessful. Industries Ltd. and Western Approaches Ltd.  389  Similarly, the court in Re Bellman  refused to place a heavy onus of proof  on the applicant stating the he need only show that an arguable case exists. Despite the above manifestations of judicial willingness to encourage and allow t h e use of t h e derivative action t o r e m e d y corporate wrongs, recent cases seem to  impose more stringent requirements regarding the evidence needed to show that it is in the interests of the corporation that an action be brought.  For instance, in Daon  D e v e l o p m e n t Corporation; Wallace J', required conclusive evidence that the alleged wrong had been committed or at least that the petitioner show that Daon was probably insolvent at the time the directors authorized the payment o f dividends. R e Berenski 3 9 0 introduced two new requirements. 387  (I975)4W.W.R. 724.  388  (1974) 50 D.L.R. (3d) 45.  389  Supra, note 382.  390  (1981) 15 Sask. R. 182.  Furthermore,  First, the applicant has to disclose  .  206  the circumstances upon which the courts should decide that it would be in the interests of the corporation to maintain an action.  S.econdly, he has to disclose the financial  situation of the corporation. This second requirement may have the effect of making the granting of leave to institute a derivative action to depend on whether or not the corporation has financial resources to pursue an action.  Clearly this is not a  requirement of any of the corporate statute and should not be read into the provisions. Although the granting of leave to institute a derivative action is discretionary on the courts, it is suggested that the discretion should be exercised in accordance with legislative purposes and intention in introducing the derivative action as a means of policing the board.  If t h e financial strength of a corporation is taken as a factor in  granting leave, then a director or any other person who completely raided the corporate treasury may escape sanction because the corporation coald not afford to pursue the action, whilst a "less daring manipulator" 391 might have to pay the full price.  The "interests of the corporation" requirement may be relevant consideration in granting leave especially if the directors put up the defence that a corporate action would b e detrimental to corporate privacy or business. The possibility of such defence suggests that there are times when the cost of corporate litigation may outweigh any advantage or benefit to b e derived therefrom. In such circumstances, it may be proper to assume that it will not be in the interest of the corporation to bring an action.  But  the severity of the w r o n g and its possible effect on the corporation5 must always be  considered. If the view is accepted that general corporate interests usually supercedes the interests of an individual shareholder, the retention of this requirement may serve to prevent shareholders from bringing actions which may not be in the overall interests of the corporation to litigate.  Given the fact that corporate statutes provide avenues for  M.A. Maloney, "Whither the Statutory Derivative Action?" (1986) 64 Gin. Bar Rev. 309, 329.  207  redressing personal corporate injuries suffered by shareholders (example, oppression remedy) it is desirable to retain the "interests of the corporation" requirement. However, the courts should be cautious in interpreting this requirement to avoid introducing extraneous considerations which may becloud the real intent and purpose of the requirement as one of the pre-requisites for the granting of leave to institute a derivative action.  4.  The Derivative Action and Special Litigation Committees A primary consideration of this chapter has been an examination of the  adequacy of the statutory remedies available to shareholders. It is however necessary to say a few words about the special litigation committees because the consideration of extraneous factors in deciding whether to give leave to initiate a derivative action may encourage the introduction and acceptance of these committees in Canadian corporate law. The use of special litigation committees has generated great controveny in the United States and it may be briefly stated that there are conflicting judicial attitudes to the adoption of such committees. Where adopted, such committees usually look into an alleged wrong and determine whether it is in the best interests of the-corporation to pursue the matter in court.  In Auerbach v. Bennett. 392 , the New York Court of  Appeals- held that while the substantive, aspects of a decision to terminate a shareholder's derivative action against defendant corporate directors made by a c o m m i t t e e of disinterested directors appointed by the corporation's board of directors  are beyond judicial injury under the business judgement doctrine,393 the court may inquire as to the disinterested independence of the members of that committee and as to  392  (1979) 419 N.Y.S. 2d. 920. A concept yet to be accepted in Canadian coiporate law.  208  the appropriateness and sufficiency of the investigative procedures chosen and pursued by the committee. 394 Cn the other hand, in Zapata Conxtration v. Maldonado.395 the Delaware Supreme Court held that the court has an overriding role to examine the decision or recommendation of such committees. The court, according to the decision, shall apply a two-step test. Firstly, it shall inquire into the independence and good faith of the committee and the bases supporting its conclusions. If the court determines either that the committee is not independent or has not shown reasonable bases for its conclusions, it shall hold that the committee has not carried out a reasonable investigation.  The  second steps consist in striking a balance between legitimate corporate claims as expressed in a derivative shareholder suit and a corporation's best interest as expressed by an independent investigation committee. The court should determine, applying its own independent business judgement, whether or not it is in the best interest of the  corporation that the action be maintained. At the present, the use of special litigation committees has not been adopted under Canadian corporate law although the case of Re Bellman and Western Approaches Ltd, suggests the possibility of its adoption in the future. The facts of this case were uncomplicated.  A quarrel between two control groups of Western  Approaches had m a d e corporate discussions difficult. The Bellman group brought this  action alleging inter alia, that an information" circular distributed by the directors of Western contained untrue statements of material facts and omitted to state material facts as required by the Federal Act and regulations, and that the directors had exercised  their powers oppressively to the plaintiffs and in complete disregard of their interests. The corporation attempted to divert the action by referring the matter to their lawyers 394  See "also Roberts v. Alabama Power Co. (1981) 404 So. 2d. 629 (Ala); Alford v.. Shaw (1986) N.C. 349 S.E. 2d. 41 (North Carolina Supreme Court).  395  (1981) 430 A. 2d. 779.  209  who advised that Price Waterhouse and Company, independent auditors, scrutinize the corporate records of Western to determine whether there were any instances where directors did not act honestly or in good faith or exercise the skill and diligence of 2 reasonably prudent person or whether there were any material contracts to which the company was a party, in which the directors had an interest and whether such interest was disclosed. Price Waterhouse carried out the investigation apparently on a restricted basis and reported that there were no undue excessive billings.  Counsel for Western  advised that no action be taken against the accused directors. Accordingly, Western's board of directors decided not to commence an action as requested ty the plaintiffs. One of the issues before the court was whether or not the recommendation ty the board of directors not to proceed with' the action should be taken as conclusive evidence that such an action would not be in the interests of the corporation. The court held that that decision by the board of directors not to prosecute an action was not impartial. Four directors were not independent because they had been elected by the Duke group, the people under investigation. Although their decision was based on the independent reports of accountants and outside lawyers, the court considered that the limited scope of these investigations was insufficient to determine the decision, one way or another.  ...  The decision of the court in this case apparently presupposes that if in fact the board o f directors who took the decision not to ..pursue the action could have been shown to have been independent and impartial, their refusal would have decided the issue. Unfortunately, no other Canadian reported case addresses the issue of whether a disinterested board of directors can determine with finality whether a proposed action is  in the interests of the corporation. There is no unanimous opinion among academic commentators on. the issue either.  Some are of the opinion that such committees reflect an optimum solution to  balancing the conflicting interests of corporation and shareholders, or a means, by  210  which firms can contract around or opt out of derivative suits. 396  Others aae it as  tolling the death knell of the derivative action.  The advocates of the special litigation committees have put forward reasons to justify its introduction into the corporate process.  They save time and expense to  corporations. By allowing a committee to make its own determination, a proper result will be reached with lower transaction costs. 397 Special litigation committees are also advocated because they are considered able to allocate risk efficiently. 398 Derivative actions distribute risks ineffectively by placing the entire risk upon directors rather than  the more efficient risk bearers (shareholders). This may have undesirable side-effects encouraging management to become less risk averse and less effective and productive. Shareholders, it is argued, will benefit more by spreading the risk among themselves. However, whatever may be the argument in justification of the use of special litigation committees, there may be sound reasons for its non adoption.  In the first  place, such committees may effectively destroy the real utility and purpose of the derivative action.  The purpose of the derivative action is to serve as a deterrent,  ensuring that directors carry out their fiduciary duties. remedies do not remain illusory. of the members of the committee.  It ensures that shareholder  Secondly, there may be problems with the selection The possibility that they will have ties, social or  economic with insiders and-perhaps the wrongdoers themselves, cannot be ruled out. Such close relationship may affect the soundness of any decision or recommendation made by the committee.  The result will be that many wrongdoing by directors and  other corporate officers will be prevented from coming into full public view. 39 6  307  For example, Fischel and Bradley, supra, note 366. Fischel and Bradley, supra, note 366.  211  Under Canadian corporate law, the procedural requirements for initiating a derivative action is a matter of statutory provision.  Courts are given the mandate to  decide whether it is in the interests of the corporation to alkw an application for derivative action.  Conferring such a decision making power to a special litigation  committee or any other committee appointed for that purpose will amount to an abdication  of judicial responsibility  which  may  have undesirable  consequences especially for the minority shareholder.  corporate  Furthermore, it requires  legislative intervention to confer upon a body other than the courts the power to declare that an action is not in the best interestsof the corporation. It is therefore suggested that if such a committee is set up and does investigate an individual complaint, the court should consider this as information which might aid  its own decision and not conclusive of the matter.  6.  Costs and Indemnity in Derivative Action We shall conclude our discussion by briefly examining the statutory provision in  the British Columbia Company Act as it relates to costs on the final disposition of a derivative action. Subsection 225(b) grants the court the discretion to impose the costs of the action on the plaintiff or other person controlling the conduct of the-action. Given the costs of litigation today, this provision may be a very effective deterrect to a shareholder bringing a derivative action. The essence of derivative action is that it is brought on behalf of the corporation by minority shareholders on the basis that they are its representatives to obtain redress on its behalf.  That being so, the  applicant is in a position of an agent acting on behalf of the corporation and as such, should be entitled to b e indemnified by the corporation against all costs and expenses reasonably incurred by him.  212  This has been the position adopted by the English Cbuct of Appeal in Wallerrsteiner v. Moir (No. 2) 3 9 9 where Lord Denning stated that "if the minority shareholder had reasonable ground for bringing the derivative action - that it was a reasonable and prudent course to take in the interests of the company - he should not himself be liable to pay the costs of the other side, but the company itself should be liable, because he was acting for it and not for himself. In addition, he should himself be indemnified by the company in respect of his own costs even if the action fails. It is a well-known maxim of law that he who would take the benefit of a venture if it succeeds ought also to bear the burden if it fails. This indemnity should extend to his own costs taxed on a [solicitor and client] basis". Shareholders should not be inhibited from commencing derivative actions by the fear Of being ordered to pay the costs of litigation even if the action eventually fails. The risk of strike suits and frivolous actions is obviated by the presence of other statutory preconditions for commencing a derivative action: a shareholder must obtain leave of the court; he nust prove that he is acting in good faith and that it is prima facie in the interests of the corporation that the action be commenced. It is therefore suggested that once the shareholder has satisfied the preconditions and obtained leave of court, the position as to costs and indemnity should be exactly as stated by Lord Denning.  The Appraisal Remedy  Introduction  Generally speaking, a dissenting shareholder has available to him two courses of action other than the appraisal route, He may go along with the majority and hold his shares or he may sell his shares in the market (if the corporation in which the shares are held is a widely-held corporation). 399  (1975) 1 All E.R. 849.  But where he chooses to exercise his appraisal  right, it will be assumed that he considers the right more beneficial than the other options open to him.  As a remedy provided for the shareholders, the usefulness and  adequacy cf the appraisal right depends on the ease and efficiency of the appraisal procedures.  If the appraisal remedy entails substantial costs or if the shareholder is  required to hang in uncertainty for a protracted period, then the game of appraisal may not be worth the candle. Questions which may be relevant in examining the adequacy of the appraisal remedy include the following: How long will the procedure take to collect on a claim under the appraisal statute? Who is to pay for the expenses of appraisal; the claimant or the corporation? When does the dissenter have to make up his mind about filing the claim and does he forfeit other remedies if he files? When does the dissenter cease to be a shareholder for purposes of dividends, notices, suit and other matters? Once he has undertaken the route to dissent and claim, may he change his mind and rejoin the corporation? These questions and many more are relevant in assessing the adequacy of the statutory provisions which confer the right of appraisal on shareholders. Space may not permit us to touch on all the issues relevant to our evaluation but an attempt will be made to highlight the more important onces. The discussion shall be divided into four sections. The first-section considers the origin and rationale for the introduction of the appraisal right in Canadian corporationlaws.  —  Section II examines the statutory provisions regulating the appraisal procedure. The procedural requirements are highlighted since they will form the basis for examining the adequacy of the current form of appraisal right. Since most Canadian corporate statutes contain provisions relating ;o the appraisal right, it would be most imprudent to set all of them out.  For this reason, the C . B . C . A . representing the  federal provision will be used as a model for our analysis. References will be made to other statutes where differences necessitate.  214  In Section EH, the practical problems of designing and administering aft effective appraisal right are considered.  It is suggested that the current form of this  appraisal remedy is far from being adequate. In fact, it is bridled with many problem?* which include the allocation of the burden of costs, taxation of the award, questions of procedure, and lack of precise method of valuation. Suggestions for improvement aif also made in this section. Section IV examines the important question concerning the exclusiveness of tH§ appraisal remedy. The determination of this may give us some insight into the exteiit to which tire appraisal right affords protection to the minority shareholder. It is notei that while the federal model contains two conflicting subsections which render the issUe ambiguous and unresolved, the Bntish Columbia Companies Act is silent on the issue. Recentjudicial and academic opinions are examined. It is suggested till1 Re appraisal remedy ought not to be an exclusive remedy. Suggestion for legislative intervention to clarify the issue is equally offered. I  T h e O r i g i n of, a n d R a t i o n a l e f o r Introducing the R i g h t of Appraisal in  Canadian Corporate Law T h e introduction of statutory appraisal rights in Canadian corporate law, which  permit shareholders to request, upon the occurrence of certain events,, that the corporation buy their shares was intended to alter the balance of rights between majority- and minority shareholders on fundamental corporate changes. 400  The  Dickerson C o m m i t e which recommended the introduction of the appraisal remedy  400  For general overview of the origin of appraisal rights, see J.C. Macintosh, "The Shareholder's Appraisal Right in Canada; A Critical Reappraisal", (1987) 24 Osgoode Hall Law loumal 201. Thefirstmoikf'tf appraisal provisions applying to a variety of fundamental changes in widelyheld corporations were adapted in the British Columbia Companies Act, S.B.C. 1973, C.18, S.228. Prior to this period, the province of Ontario had adopted an appraisal right in respect of closely-held corporations ir\ The Corporations Act, 1953, S.O. 1953, C.19, S.99. In 1975, following the recommendation of the Dickerson Committer, the appraisal right was enacted in tlu) CiUUlia EH5Mie§§ Corporations Act (C.B.C.A.) S.C. 1974-75, C.33, S.184. The C.B.C.A. provision was modelled after similar provisions in New York's Business Corporation Law Ch.4, Consolidated Laws, Law 1961, Ch. 855.  215  into the Canada Business Corporations Act was much influenced by the reluctance of courts at common law to intervene to protect minority shareholders where there was no fraud or bad faith.  They concluded that Ihe state o f the common law was "at best  unsatisfactory, at worst downright unjust". 401  The appraisal right was intended to  strike a new balance between majority and minority shareholders - while the majority could "if they go through the proper formalities and if they pay any dissenting shareholders, effect almost any fundamental change with impurity", 4 0 2 the minority would have the right to opt out of the enterprise on the undertaking of the change and if enough shareholders dissented, the further ability to block the fundamental change altogether.  According to the Committee, the result is a resolution of the problem that  protects minority shareholders from discrimination and at the same time preserves flexibility within  the  enterprise,  permitting  it  to  adapt to  changing  business  conditions". 4 0 3 Discrimination was not the only problem to which the appraisal right was addressed, allowing  i he C o m m i u e e observed that the remedy could perform another function: the  minority  to escape  fundamental  corporate  changes  that  "change  fundamentally the nature of the business in which the shareholder invested". 4 0 4 The appraisal remedy thus seeks to strike a balance between the interests of the majority and minority shareholders o f the corporation.  On the one hand, traditional  corporate legal theory recognizes the ability of the majority shareholders, if they obtain the requisite consent, to undertake fundamental corporate changes.  In a world of  401  R.W.V. Dickerson, J.L. Howard and L. Getz, Proposals for a New Business Corporations Law for Canada, Vol. 1 (Ottawa: Information Canada, 1971) at 114-115. (Otherwise called the Dickerson Report).  4 0 2  Dickerson Repoit, supra, note 3 at 115.  403  Ibid.  404  Ibid.  216  changing business and commercial environment, a great deal of corporate flexibility is necessary to meet changing condidons of business. Such changing environments may, for example, require an alteration of the capital structure of the corporation, alteration of the rights attached to different classes of shares in the corporation or even the creation of new or elimination cf existing classes of shares. Changes in the business environment may in addition necessitate rescaling the enterprise either by corporate  combination or by reduction in the size of the enterprise. On the  other hand,  the minority  shareholders  desire protection  against  fundamental corporate changes resulting either in an alteration of the risk of the  business or impairing enterprise value and thus reducing the market value of the firm's securities.  Similar protection may b e needed against changes in the rights attached to  various securities of the corporation which may have the effect of diminishing the value of those securities. In general, the appraisal remedy recognizes the power of the majority shareholders to effect fundamental changes in the corporate structure while at the same time, giving any dissenting shareholder the right to insist that his; shares be purchased by the corporation.  II:  The Statutory Provisions What triggers the appraisal rights are fundamental corporate transactions.  Most  corporate statutes in Canada give the shareholders the right of appraisal in the event  that a triggering transaction occurs.  F o r instance, Section 190(1) of the Canada  Business Corporations Act enumerates a number of fundamental changes in which a shareholder may insist on an appraisal as a matter of rights. These include: (a)  an amendment under Section 173 or 174 of the Articles of Incorporation to add, change or remove any provisions restricting or constraining the issue, transfer or ownership of shares;  217  (b)  a n amendment u n d e r Section 173 of the Articles of Incorporation to a d d , change o r r e m o v e any restrictions upon the business that the corporation may carry on;  (c)  a resolution under Section 188 to continue the corporation under the laws of anotherjurisdiction;  (d)  t h e sale, lease or exchange of all or substantially all of the corporation's property under subsection 189(3);  (e)  and  an amalgamation with another corporation otherwise than under Section 1 8 4 . 4 0 5 In that Act, in two other contexts, an appraisal may arise not as of rights but  pursuant to a court adjudication of entitlement. 4 0 6 U n d e r the oppression provision the court m a y , as a remedial tool, order the corporation or any security holder to buy the shares of the complainant. 4 0 7  Similarly, where a statutory arrangement is undertaken,  the court has authority to order that any shareholder or shareholders may dissent under Section 190  408  The appraisal procedure as contained in the different statutes is highly technical, 4 0 9 with several distinct steps to be completed in limited time periods. In the first place, the appraisal rights do not arise unless the shareholder dissents or abstains at the meeting and sends a written objection to the corporation at or before the shareholder meeting.  The appraisal remedy is not triggered by this-written objection  and the shareholder must still send a demand for payment to the corporation within a  405 faction 231 of the B.C.C.A. contains similar provision but goes further to provide appraisal rights in circumstances enumerated under S.127 B.C.C.A. (company giving financial assistance for the purchase of its shares) and S.268 (conversion of specially limited company into a company having a Memorandum of Association). 406  Although we are concerned with situations where the shareholder can claim appraisal as of right.  407  Section 241(3)(f); See also Section 224(2)(c) B.C.C.A.  408  Section 192(4)(d) C.B.C.A.  409  See generally C.B.C.A. Section 190(3)-(16); B.C.C.A. Section 231(2)-(4).  218  20-day period410 before it has a duty to repurchase the shares. Dissenting shareholders must also return the share certificates within 30 days thereafter.411 If an offer is made by the corporation, the shareholder has 30 days to accept it. If no offer is made, or if the offer is rejected, the corporation can bring the matter to court, failing which the shareholders has a 20 day period to do so. 4 1 2  After the  demand for payment is sent in, the dissenting shareholder loses any rights to participate in the corporation. 4 1 3 The failure to perform one step in the allotted time may mean that appraisal rights are lost.  strictly.  414  However, the courts sometimes do not interpret these requirements  The courts are also given the power to determine the value of the shares  where the Corporation and the dissenting shareholders fail to do so. Ill:  The Adequacy of the Appraisal Provisions in Canadian Corporate Law Whether or not giving the minority shareholders an appraisal right is an  effective means of protecting them in the corporation depends largely on whether the right of appraisal can be designed to meet the needs of the shareholders (the object of the protection) and also on the extent of the cost of the exercise of the right to the shareholder and the corporation against which the right is being exercised. The current form of statutory provisions'regulating the exercise o f the appraisal remedy raise basic questions about the value of the right to shareholders.  410  411 412  413 414  It is  S. 190(7) C.B.C.A. In B.C.C.A. jurisdiction, he is required to do this within 14 days (S.231(3) B.C.C.A.). S.190(8) C.B.C.A. Only 14 days is required in the B.C.C.A. S.231(3). S.190(16) C.B.C.A.; could be made.  Section 231(4) B.C.C.A, provides no time within which an application  S. 190(11) C.B.C.A.; S.231(7) B.C.C.A. See, for example, Re Douglas Inc. (1980) 13 B.L.R. 135 157-58 (Que.).  219  worthwhile to take a closer look at some of the problems and see whaJ suggestions  could be made for a more adequate and effective appraisal right.  (a)  Problem of Taxation The current income tax treatment of the proceeds of dispositions arising frorfl  the exercise of an appraisal right is far from being satisfactory. While the exercise of the appraisal right by a dissenting shareholder triggers a taxable event for him, th e fundamental corporate change dissented from often does not result in any taxable ever£ for the non-dissenting shareholder who chooses to stay on with the corporation. A decision on whether to exercise the appraisal right or not will inyariably depend o n , inter a h a , the rM^tivr> t^v tr^atmont vmnrfoA Hiccpntinn and non-dissenting  members. Cti the one hand, a less favourable tax treatment for dissevers may create  an artificial disincentive to the exercise of the appraisal right and %is extenuate the protection that the renjedy affords minority shareholders.  On the other hand, a  preferential tax treatment of dissenters may result in shareholders exercising the appraisal right only lor tax reasons, "a clearly wasteful a i d unproductive use of social resources". 415 It will be improper to accord dissenters more favourable treatment than  non-dissenters and vice versa.  -  „..,.'._..'•/  A solution therefore lies in fashioning a tax rule which while not having the effect of diminishing the utility of the appraisal-remedy, does not, however, create a reason for exercising the appraisa] right, This implies that a balance should be struck in the tax treatment of dissenters and non-dissenting shareholders.  In this regard, I  suggest that dissenters should receive the same tax treatment that non-dissenting shareholders will receive under the terms of the fundamental corporate change.  More  specifically, if the fundamental transaction is such that will create taxable consequences  4 , 5  Ibid, at 250.  n n n n " ~n ri'n i u u u u , u -a b /  220  for non-dissenters, then any shareholder who dissents from the transaction should be subjected to tlie same tac treatment.  This approach will invariably remove tlie tax  system as a consideration either for or against exercising the appraisal right, and allowing the decision to b